Navigation

  • Page 1

    OPERATOR'S MANUALB-63944EN/04Common to Lathe System / Machining Center SystemFANUC Series 30*-MODEL AFANUC Series 31*-MODEL AFANUC Series 32*-MODEL A

  • Page 2

    • No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. • All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law”. The export of Series 30i/300i/300is...

  • Page 3

    CHANGE IN CNC MODEL NAMES CHANGE IN CNC MODEL NAMES The model names of the following CNCs described in this manual have been changed from those shown in lower lines to those shown in upper lines in fields of the following table. The model names were changed, but their specifications remain unch...

  • Page 4

  • Page 5

    B-63944EN/04 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s-1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this section a...

  • Page 6

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63944EN/04 s-2 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS WARNING 1 Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine. Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, th...

  • Page 7

    B-63944EN/04 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s-3 CAUTION The liquid-crystal display is manufactured with very precise fabrication technology. Some pixels may not be turned on or may remain on. This phenomenon is a common attribute of LCDs and is not a defect. NOTE Programs, parameters, and macro variable...

  • Page 8

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63944EN/04 s-4 WARNING 5 Constant surface speed control When an axis subject to constant surface speed control approaches the origin of the workpiece coordinate system, the spindle speed may become excessively high. Therefore, it is necessary to specify a maximum allowable...

  • Page 9

    B-63944EN/04 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s-5 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of machine tools. Before attempting to operate your machine, read the supplied OPERATOR’S MANUAL carefully, such that you are fully familiar with their...

  • Page 10

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63944EN/04 s-6 WARNING 8 Software operator's panel and menu switches Using the software operator's panel and menu switches, in combination with the MDI panel, it is possible to specify operations not supported by the machine operator's panel, such as mode change, override ...

  • Page 11

    B-63944EN/04 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s-7 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE WARNING 1 Memory backup battery replacement When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the p...

  • Page 12

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63944EN/04 s-8 WARNING 3 Fuse replacement Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the cause of the blown fuse. For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this work. When...

  • Page 13

    B-63944EN/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-1 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS............................

  • Page 14

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/04 c-2 4.4 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03).................................................. 47 4.5 HELICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) ..................................................... 51 4.6 HELICAL INTERPOLATION B (G02, G03).........................................

  • Page 15

    B-63944EN/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-3 7.2.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (G92.1).....................................................163 7.2.5 Addition of Workpiece Coordinate System Pair (G54.1 or G54) ........................165 7.2.6 Automatic Coordinate System Setting .......................

  • Page 16

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/04 c-4 11.2 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK.................................... 244 11.3 M CODE GROUPING FUNCTION ............................................................ 244 11.3.1 Setting an M Code Group Number Using the Setting Screen .......................

  • Page 17

    B-63944EN/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-5 16.8.3 Conditional Branch (IF Statement) ......................................................................420 16.8.4 Repetition (WHILE Statement) ............................................................................422 16.9 MACRO CALL .................

  • Page 18

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/04 c-6 19 PATTERN DATA INPUT ..................................................................... 506 19.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 506 19.2 EXPLANATION......................................

  • Page 19

    B-63944EN/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-7 21.7.5.5 Synchronization ratio specification range..................................................... 624 21.7.5.6 Retract function............................................................................................. 627 21.7.6 U-axis Control ...........

  • Page 20

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/04 c-8 III. OPERATION 1 GENERAL ........................................................................................... 831 1.1 MANUAL OPERATION.............................................................................. 831 1.2 TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING - AUT...

  • Page 21

    B-63944EN/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-9 3.9.2 Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction Handle Feed / Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction JOG Feed / Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction Incremental Feed .........892 3.9.3 Tool Tip Center Rotation Handle Feed / Tool Tip Center Rotation JOG Feed / Tool Tip Center Rotat...

  • Page 22

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/04 c-10 5.5 DRY RUN ................................................................................................ 1003 5.6 SINGLE BLOCK ...................................................................................... 1004 5.7 HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK FUNCTION...

  • Page 23

    B-63944EN/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-11 8.2.4.2 Outputting pitch error compensation data................................................... 1058 8.2.4.3 Input/output format of pitch error compensation data ................................ 1059 8.2.5 Inputting and Outputting 3-dimensional Error Compe...

  • Page 24

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/04 c-12 10.2 INSERTING, ALTERING AND DELETING A WORD .............................. 1114 10.2.1 Word Search .......................................................................................................1115 10.2.2 Heading a Program ..............................

  • Page 25

    B-63944EN/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-13 11.12 PROGRAM COPY FUNCTION................................................................ 1160 12 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA................................................. 1162 12.1 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ................................. 1177 ...

  • Page 26

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/04 c-14 12.2.18.4 Limitation.................................................................................................... 1282 12.3 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ................................. 1283 12.3.1 Displaying and Entering Setting Data ...............

  • Page 27

    B-63944EN/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-15 12.3.29.1 Operation level setting (15-inch display unit)............................................. 1376 12.3.29.2 Password modification (15-inch display unit) ............................................ 1377 12.3.29.3 Protection level setting (15-inch disp...

  • Page 28

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/04 c-16 12.4.12.6 Displaying and setting the servo setting screen .......................................... 1472 12.4.12.7 Parameter tuning screen (spindle setting) ................................................... 1473 12.4.12.8 Parameter tuning screen (miscellane...

  • Page 29

    B-63944EN/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-17 12.6.1 Displaying the Program Number, Program Name, and Sequence Number........1572 12.6.2 Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or Input/Output Operation1573 12.6.3 Displaying the Program Number, Program Name, and Sequence Number (15-inch Displa...

  • Page 30

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/04 c-18 1.3.3 Battery in the PANEL i (3 VDC) .......................................................................1666 1.3.4 Replacing Battery for Absolute Pulsecoders ......................................................1667 1.3.4.1 Overview..........................

  • Page 31

    I. GENERAL

  • Page 32

  • Page 33

    B-63944EN/04 GENERAL 1.GENERAL - 3 - 1 GENERAL This manual consists of the following parts: About this manual I. GENERAL Describes chapter organization, applicable models, related manuals, and notes for reading this manual. II. PROGRAMMING Describes each function: Format used to program functi...

  • Page 34

    1.GENERAL GENERAL B-63944EN/04 - 4 - Model name Abbreviation FANUC Series 32i-MODEL A 32i –A Series 32i FANUC Series 320i-MODEL A 320i–A Series 320i FANUC Series 320is-MODEL A 320is–A Series 320is NOTE 1 For an explanatory purpose, the following descriptions may be used according to the ty...

  • Page 35

    B-63944EN/04 GENERAL 1.GENERAL - 5 - Related manuals of Series 30i/300i/300is- MODEL A Series 31i/310i/310is- MODEL A Series 32i/320i/320is- MODEL A The following table lists the manuals related to Series 30i/300i /300is-A, Series 31i/310i /310is-A, Series 32i/320i /320is-A. This manual is indic...

  • Page 36

    1.GENERAL GENERAL B-63944EN/04 - 6 - Manual name Specification number FANUC SERVO MOTOR βis series FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi series FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi series MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-65325EN FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βi series FANUC LINEAR MOTOR LiS series FANUC S...

  • Page 37

    II. PROGRAMMING

  • Page 38

  • Page 39

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 9 - 1 GENERAL Chapter 1, "GENERAL", consists of the following sections: 1.1 TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS FIGURE-INTERPOLATION .......................9 1.2 FEED-FEED FUNCTION .......................................................................

  • Page 40

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 10 - - Tool movement along an arc • For milling machining WorkpieceTool ProgramG03 X_ Y_ R_ ; • For lathe cutting ProgramG02 X_ Z_ R_ ; or G03 X_ Z_ R_ ; WorkpieceZX Fig. 1.1 (b) Tool movement along an arc The term interpolation refers to an operation...

  • Page 41

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 11 - 1.2 FEED-FEED FUNCTION Movement of the tool at a specified speed for cutting a workpiece is called the feed. • For milling machining ToolWorkpieceTableFmm/min • For lathe cutting ToolWorkpieceChuck Fmm/min Fig. 1.2 (a) Feed function Feedrates can be...

  • Page 42

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 12 - 1.3 PART DRAWING AND TOOL MOVEMENT 1.3.1 Reference Position (Machine-specific Position) A CNC machine tool is provided with a fixed position. Normally, tool change and programming of absolute zero point as described later are performed at this position. T...

  • Page 43

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 13 - 1.3.2 Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Coordinate System Specified by CNC - Coordinate System • For milling machining Z Y XPart drawingZYXCoordinate systemZYXToolWorkpieceMachine toolProgramCommandCNCTool • For lathe cutting Part drawing Machin...

  • Page 44

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 14 - Explanation - Coordinate system The following two coordinate systems are specified at different locations: (See II-7) 1 Coordinate system on part drawing The coordinate system is written on the part drawing. As the program data, the coordinate values on...

  • Page 45

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 15 - • For milling machining Y YTableWorkpieceXXCoordinate systemspecified by the CNCestablished on the tableCoordinate system onpart drawing established on the workpiece • For lathe cutting ZWorkpieceXXZCoordinate system on part drawingestablished on the ...

  • Page 46

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 16 - - Methods of setting the two coordinate systems in the same position M To set the two coordinate systems at the same position, simple methods shall be used according to workpiece shape, the number of machinings. 1. Using a standard plane and point of th...

  • Page 47

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 17 - T The following method is usually used to define two coordinate systems at the same location. 1 When coordinate zero point is set at chuck face WorkpieceX15040Z 6040Workpiece XZChuck - Coordinates and dimensions on part drawing- Coordinate system on lat...

  • Page 48

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 18 - 1.3.3 How to Indicate Command Dimensions for Moving the Tool (Absolute, Incremental Commands) Explanation Command for moving the tool can be indicated by absolute command or incremental command (See II-8.1). - Absolute command The tool moves to a point ...

  • Page 49

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 19 - - Incremental command Specify the distance from the previous tool position to the next tool position. • For milling machining Y ZAX=40.0Z=-10.0 Y-30.0 X B G91 X40.0 Y-30.0 Z-10.0 ; Distance and direction for movement along each axis ToolCommand speci...

  • Page 50

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 20 - - Diameter programming / radius programming Dimensions of the X-axis can be set in diameter or in radius. Diameter programming or radius programming is employed independently in each machine. 1. Diameter programming In diameter programming, specify the...

  • Page 51

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 21 - 1.4 CUTTING SPEED - SPINDLE FUNCTION The speed of the tool with respect to the workpiece when the workpiece is cut is called the cutting speed. As for the CNC, the cutting speed can be specified by the spindle speed in min-1 unit. • For milling machini...

  • Page 52

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 22 - 1.5 SELECTION OF TOOL USED FOR VARIOUS MACHINING - TOOL FUNCTION Overview For each of various types of machining (such as drilling, tapping, boring, and milling for milling machining, or rough machining, semifinish machining, finish machining, threading, ...

  • Page 53

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 23 - 1.6 COMMAND FOR MACHINE OPERATIONS - AUXILIARY FUNCTION When a workpiece is actually machined with a tool, the spindle is rotated, coolant is supplied, and the chuck is opened/closed. So, control needs to be exercised on the spindle motor of the machine, ...

  • Page 54

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 24 - 1.7 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION A group of commands given to the CNC for operating the machine is called the program. By specifying the commands, the tool is moved along a straight line or an arc, or the spindle motor is turned on and off. In the program, speci...

  • Page 55

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 25 - - Program ; Oxxxxx ; Program numberBlock Block Block : : : M30 ; End of program ::: Fig. 1.7 (c) Program configuration Normally, a program number is specified after the end-of-block (;) code at the beginning of the program, and a program end code (M02 ...

  • Page 56

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 26 - 1.8 TOOL MOVEMENT RANGE - STROKE Limit switches are installed at the ends of each axis on the machine to prevent tools from moving beyond the ends. The range in which tools can move is called the stroke. Stroke area MotorLimit switch Machine zero po...

  • Page 57

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 2.CONTROLLED AXES - 27 - 2 CONTROLLED AXES Chapter 2, "CONTROLLED AXES", consists of the following sections: 2.1 NUMBER OF CONTROLLED AXES...............................................................................................27 2.2 NAMES OF AXES ..........

  • Page 58

    2.CONTROLLED AXES PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 28 - Item Series 30i-A Series 300i-A Series 300is-A Series 31i-A5 Series 310i-A5 Series 310is-A5Series 31i-A Series 310i-A Series 310is-A Series 32i-A Series 320i-A Series 320is-AM series: 3 axesM series: 3 axesM series: 3 axes M series: 3 axesControl ...

  • Page 59

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 2.CONTROLLED AXES - 29 - Five types of increment systems are available as indicated in Table 2.3 (a). For each axis, an increment system can be set using a bit from bit 0 to bit 3 (ISA, ISC, ISD, or ISE) of parameter No. 1013. IS-C, IS-D, and IS-E are optional functions. ...

  • Page 60

    2.CONTROLLED AXES PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 30 - Name of increment system Least input increment Maximum stroke 0.0001 mm ±99999.9999 mm 0.00001 inch ±9999.99999 inch IS-C 0.0001 deg ±99999.9999 deg 0.00001 mm ±9999.99999 mm 0.000001 inch ±999.999999 inch IS-D 0.00001 deg ±9999.99999 deg 0....

  • Page 61

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 31 - 3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)3 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) A number following address G determines the meaning of the command for the concerned block. G codes are divided into the following two types. Type Meaning One-shot G code The G code is effective...

  • Page 62

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 32 - 3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) T 8. When G code system A is used, absolute or incremental programming is specified not by a G code (G90/G91) but by an address word (X/U, Z/W, C/H, Y/V). Only the initial level is provided at the return point of the canned cy...

  • Page 63

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 33 - 3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)3.1 G CODE LIST IN THE MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM M Table 3.1 (a) G code list G code Group Function G00 Positioning (rapid traverse) G01 Linear interpolation (cutting feed) G02 Circular interpolation CW or helical interpolation CW G0...

  • Page 64

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 34 - 3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) Table 3.1 (a) G code list G code Group Function G33 Threading G34 Variable lead threading G35 Circular threading CW G36 01 Circular threading CCW G37 Automatic tool length measurement G38 Tool radius/tool nose radius compensat...

  • Page 65

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 35 - 3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)Table 3.1 (a) G code list G code Group Function G52 Local coordinate system setting G53 Machine coordinate system setting G53.1 Tool axis direction control G53.6 00 Tool center point retention type tool axis direction control G54 ...

  • Page 66

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 36 - 3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) Table 3.1 (a) G code list G code Group Function G82 Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle G83 Peck drilling cycle G84 Tapping cycle G84.2 Rigid tapping cycle (FS15 format) G84.3 Left-handed rigid tapping cycle (FS15 format) G8...

  • Page 67

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 37 - 3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)3.2 G CODE LIST IN THE LATHE SYSTEM T Table 3.2 (b) G code list G code system A B C Group Function G00 G00 G00 Positioning (Rapid traverse) G01 G01 G01 Linear interpolation (Cutting feed) G02 G02 G02 Circular interpolation CW or h...

  • Page 68

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 38 - 3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) Table 3.2 (b) G code list G code system A B C Group Function G30.2 G30.2 G30.2 In-position check disable 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position return G31 G31 G31 Skip function G31.8 G31.8 G31.8 00 EGB-axis skip G32 G33 G33 Threa...

  • Page 69

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 39 - 3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)Table 3.2 (b) G code list G code system A B C Group Function G50 G92 G92 Coordinate system setting or max spindle speed clamp G50.3 G92.1 G92.1 00 Workpiece coordinate system preset - G50 G50 Scaling cancel - G51 G51 18 Scaling G5...

  • Page 70

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 40 - 3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) Table 3.2 (b) G code list G code system A B C Group Function G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle G71 G71 G73 Stock removal in turning G72 G72 G74 Stock removal in facing G73 G73 G75 Pattern repeating cycle G74 G74 G76 End face peck dri...

  • Page 71

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 41 - 4 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Interpolation functions specify the way to make an axis movement (in other words, a movement of the tool with respect to the workpiece or table). Chapter 4, "INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS", consists of the fo...

  • Page 72

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 42 - • Linear interpolation type positioning The tool is positioned within the shortest possible time at a speed that is not more than the rapid traverse rate for each axis. End position Non linear interpolation type positioning Start posit...

  • Page 73

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 43 - G60, which is a one-shot G-code, can be used as a modal G-code in group 01 by setting 1 to the bit 0 (MDL) of parameter No. 5431. This setting can eliminate specifying a G60 command for every block. Other specifications are the same as tho...

  • Page 74

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 44 - Programmed end point Programmed start pointOverrun distance in the X-axis direction Overrun distance in the Z-axis direction Z X Fig. 4.2 (b) Limitation • Single direction positioning is not performed along an axis for which no overr...

  • Page 75

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 45 - 4.3 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01) Tools can move along a line. Format G01 IP_ F_ ; IP_ : For an absolute programming, the coordinates of an end point, and for an incremental programming, the distance the tool moves. F_ : Speed of tool feed (...

  • Page 76

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 46 - Example - Linear interpolation • For milling machining (G91) G01X200.0Y100.0F200.0;Y axis 100.0 200.0 0 (Start point) (End point) X axis • For lathe cutting (Diameter programming) G01X40.0Z20.1F20; (Absolute programming) or ...

  • Page 77

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 47 - 4.4 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) The command below will move a tool along a circular arc. Format Arc in the XpYp plane G02 I_ J_ G17 G03 Xp_ Yp_ R_ F_ ; Arc in the ZpXp plane G02 I_ K_G18 G03 Zp_ Xp_ R_ F_ ; Arc in the YpZp plane G0...

  • Page 78

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 48 - - Distance moved on an arc The end point of an arc is specified by address Xp, Yp or Zp, and is expressed as an absolute or incremental value according to G90 or G91. For the incremental value, the distance of the end point which is viewe...

  • Page 79

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 49 - - Feedrate The feedrate in circular interpolation is equal to the feedrate specified by the F code, and the feedrate along the arc (the tangential feedrate of the arc) is controlled to be the specified feedrate. The error between the sp...

  • Page 80

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 50 - Example M 100 60 40 0 90120 1402006050Y axis X axis The above tool path can be programmed as follows; (1) In absolute programming G92X200.0 Y40.0 Z0 ; G90 G03 X140.0 Y100.0 R60.0 F300. ; G02 X120.0 Y60.0 R50.0 ; or G92X200.0 Y40.0...

  • Page 81

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 51 - 4.5 HELICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) Helical interpolation which moved helically is enabled by specifying up to two other axes which move synchronously with the circular interpolation by circular commands. Format Arc in the XpYp plane G0...

  • Page 82

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 52 - ZYX The feedrate along the tool path is specified.Tool path Limitation • Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation is applied only for a circular arc. • Tool offset and tool length compensation cannot be used in a block in which a he...

  • Page 83

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 53 - 4.7 SPIRAL INTERPOLATION, CONICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) Spiral interpolation is enabled by specifying the circular interpolation command together with a desired number of revolutions or a desired increment (decrement) for the radius pe...

  • Page 84

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 54 - - Conical interpolation XpYp plane G02 G17 G03 X_ Y_ I_ J_ Z_ Q_ L_ F_ ; ZpXp plane G02 G18 G03 Z_ X_ K_ I_ Y_ Q_ L_ F_ ; YpZp plane G02 G19 G03 Y_ Z_ J_ K_ X_ Q_ L_ F_ ; X, Y, Z : Coordinates of the end point L : Number of revolutions (p...

  • Page 85

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 55 - When the programmed command is assigned to this function, the following expression is obtained: 222)Q)360(L'(RJ)Y(YI)X(XSSθ++=−−+−− where XS : X coordinate of the start point YS : Y coordinate of the start point I : X coordinate...

  • Page 86

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 56 - - Tool radius compensation M The spiral or conical interpolation command can be programmed in tool radius compensation mode. This compensation is performed in the same way as described in "When it is exceptional" in "Tool M...

  • Page 87

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 57 - Limitation - Radius During spiral interpolation and conical interpolation, the addresses "C", "R", ",C", or ",R" cannot be specified. - Feed functions The functions of feed per rotation, inverse...

  • Page 88

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 58 - (2) With incremental values, the path is programmed as follows: Q-20.0 G91 G02 X0 Y-130.0 I0 J-100.0 L4 F300.0 ; (Either the Q or L setting can be omitted.) - Conical interpolation The sample path shown below is programmed with absolute...

  • Page 89

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 59 - 4.8 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (G12.1, G13.1) Overview Polar coordinate interpolation is a function that exercises contour control in converting a command programmed in a Cartesian coordinate system to the movement of a linear axis (m...

  • Page 90

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 60 - Rotary axis (hypothetical axis)(unit: mm or inch) Linear axis (unit: mm or inch) Origin of the local coordinate system (G52 command) (Or origin of the workpiece coordinate system) Fig. 4.8 (a) Polar coordinate interpolation plane When th...

  • Page 91

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 61 - - G codes which can be specified in the polar coordinate interpolation mode G01.......................Linear interpolation G02, G03..............Circular interpolation G02.2, G03.2........Involute interpolation G04..........................

  • Page 92

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 62 - (X, C) Hypothetical axis (C-axis) Error in the direction of hypothetical axis (P) Center of rotary axisX-axisRotary axis (X, C) : Point in the X-C plane (The center of the rotary axis is considered to be the origin of the X-C plane.) X : X...

  • Page 93

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 63 - - Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation The polar coordinate interpolation mode (G12.1 or G13.1) cannot be started or terminated in the tool radius/tool nose radius compensation mode (G41 or G42). G12.1 or G13.1 must be specified in ...

  • Page 94

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 64 - WARNING 1 Consider lines L1, L2, and L3. ΔX is the distance the tool moves per time unit at the feedrate specified with address F in the Cartesian coordinate system. As the tool moves from L1 to L2 to L3, the angle at which the tool move...

  • Page 95

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 65 - C-axisABCDX-axis -10.+10. [Example] G90 G00 X10.0 C0. ; G12.1 ; G01 C0.1 F1000 ; X-10.0 : G13.1 ; Automatic speed control for polar coordinate interpolation Suppose that the maximum cutting feedrate of the rotary axis is 360 (3600 deg/m...

  • Page 96

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 66 - Example Sample program for polar coordinate interpolation in a Cartesian coordinate system consisting of the X-axis (a linear axis) and a hypothetical axis N204N205N206N203N202N201N208N207N200ToolC axisHypothetical axis Path after cutter ...

  • Page 97

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 67 - 4.9 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION (G07.1) 4.9.1 Cylindrical Interpolation In cylindrical interpolation function, the amount of movement of a rotary axis specified by angle is converted to the amount of movement on the circumference to allow l...

  • Page 98

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 68 - For the C axis of parameter No.1022, 6 (axis parallel with the Y axis) may be specified instead. In this case, however, the command for circular interpolation is G19 C_Z_; G02 (G03) Z_C_R_; - Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation...

  • Page 99

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 69 - - Rotary axis control function If a rotary axis using the multiple rotary axis control function is specified at the start of the cylindrical interpolation mode, the rotary axis control function is automatically disabled in the cylindrica...

  • Page 100

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 70 - Example ZC R C2301901500 mm Z deg110 90 70 120 30 60 70 270N05 N06 N07 N08 N09N10N11N12N13 36060 Example of a Cylindrical Interpolation O0001 (CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ); N01 G00 G90 Z100.0 C0 ; N02 G01 G91 G18 Z0 C0 ; N03 G07.1 C57299 ;...

  • Page 101

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 71 - NOTE Only a positive value is effective as the radius of the workpiece. If a negative value is specified, alarm PS0175 is issued. Explanation By using bit 2 (DTO) of parameter No. 3454, it is possible to switch the rotation axis command...

  • Page 102

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 72 - 4.10 CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION (G07.1) The conventional cylindrical interpolation function controls the tool center so that the tool axis always moves along a specified path on the cylindrical surface, towar...

  • Page 103

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 73 - Z-axisC-axis on the cylindrical surface Y-axisS1C1C2 N1 N2V Tool center path Programmed path V : C-axis component of C1 - C2 C1 : Cutting surface of block N1 C2 : Cutting surface of block N2 Fig. 4.10 (b) Cutting point compensation betw...

  • Page 104

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 74 - (3) When cutting point compensation is not applied between blocks When, as shown in Fig.4.10 (d) and Fig.4.10 (e), the cutting point compensation value (V in the Fig.4.10 (d) and Fig.4.10 (e)) is less than the value set in parameter No. ...

  • Page 105

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 75 - Z-axis C-axis on the cylindrical surface Y-axisC1C2V Tool center path Programmed pathV : C-axis component of C2 - C1 C1 : Cutting surface of blocks N1 and N2 C2 : Cutting surface at the end of block N3 C1N1 N2N3L1L2 Fig.4.10 (f) When th...

  • Page 106

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 76 - Z axis A axisY axis X axis C axis Fig. 4.10 (h) When used with normal direction control (1) When the normal direction changes between blocks N1 and N2, cutting point compensation is also performed between blocks N1 and N2. As shown in F...

  • Page 107

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 77 - Y-axis X-axis C1C2V1Tool center path (G42)Programmed path V1 : A-axis component of C2-C1 C1 : Cutting surface of block N1 C2’ : Cutting surface at the end point of block N2N1N2S1A-axis on the cylindrical surface Normal direction vector...

  • Page 108

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 78 - (2) The actual speed indication and feedrate during circular interpolation are as described below. Actual speed indication The speed component of each axis after cutting point compensation at a point in time during circular interpolation i...

  • Page 109

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 79 - G64 : Cutting mode G65 to G67 : Macro call G90, G91 : Absolute programming, incremental programming - Parameter To enable this function, set bit 5 (CYA) of parameter No. 19530 to 1. Limitation - Overcutting during inner corner cutt...

  • Page 110

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 80 - N05 C20.0 ; ......................................................(2) N06 G02 Z110.0 C60.0 R10.0 ; ............................(3) N07 G01 Z100.0 ;..................................................(4) N08 G03 Z60.0 C70.0 R40.0 ; .............

  • Page 111

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 81 - The cutting surface in the rotary axis direction in (3) and (4) are uniform even if the tool radius compensation amount is modified. - Example of specifying cutting point interpolation for cylindrical interpolation and normal direction...

  • Page 112

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 82 - Helix angle β1 = β2 = β3 Z A Xβ1β3β2A (Rotary axis) X (Linear axis)ΔXΔA Relationship between X-axis and A-axis Fig. 4.11 (a) Exponential interpolation Format Positive rotation (ω = 0) G02. 3 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ F_ Q_ ; Nega...

  • Page 113

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 83 - Explanation Z AX IBrJU XZ(0) r : Diameter of left end U : Excess length X : Amount of travel along the linear axis I : Taper angle B : Groove bottom taper angle J : Helix angle Fig. 4.11 (b) Constant helix machining for producing ...

  • Page 114

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 84 - Where, )tan()tan(IJK= 0/1=ω R, I, and J are constants, and θ represents an angle (radian). - Span value K A movement on an axis is carried out as linear interpolation in units of values obtained by dividing the movement on the X-axis b...

  • Page 115

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 85 - XxU x*tan(I) Ir R Origin of workpiece coordinate system x*tan(I)/R ≤ -1 (A) x*tan(I)/R > -1 Fig. 4.11 (d) Rotation angle θ - Taper angle I The machining profile and the sign of taper angle I have the following relationships: • ...

  • Page 116

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 86 - - Helix angle J The sign of the helix angle J is assigned as illustrated below. XJ > 0J > 0XExample)XJ < 0J < 0XJJJJ Fig. 4.11 (f) Helix angle J Example N10 G90 G01 X5.0 Z1.575 ;N20 G02.3 X25.0 Z2.273 I3.0 J-45.0 K1.0 R1.238F...

  • Page 117

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 87 - - Tool compensation The tool compensation functions (tool length compensation, tool radius/tool nose radius compensation, and 3-dimensional cutter compensation) cannot be used in the G02.3 or G03.3 mode. CAUTION The amount for dividi...

  • Page 118

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 88 - 4.12 SMOOTH INTERPOLATION (G05.1) Either of two types of machining can be selected, depending on the program command. • For those portions where the accuracy of the figure is critical, such as at corners, machining is performed exactly a...

  • Page 119

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 89 - To cancel them, cancel smooth interpolation (G5.1 Q0) first, and then cancel tool length compensation (G49). [Example] O0010 … (G5.1 Q1 R1;) G43 H1; G5.1 Q2 X0 Y0 Z0; … G5.1 Q0; G49; … M30; If the following functions are required b...

  • Page 120

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 90 - Example of machined parts Automobile parts Decorative parts, such as body side moldings Length of line segment Short Long Resulting surfaces produced using high-precision contour control Smooth surface even when machining is performed exac...

  • Page 121

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 91 - - Conditions for enabling smooth interpolation Smooth interpolation is performed when all the following conditions are satisfied. If any of the following conditions is not satisfied for a block, that block is executed without smooth inte...

  • Page 122

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 92 - Interpolated by smooth curve Interpolated by smooth curve (Example)N17 N16N1N2 N15N14N13N12N11N10 N9 N3N4N5N6N7N8Linear interpolation Limitation Basically, limitations on AI contour control apply. In addition, the limitations below also ...

  • Page 123

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 93 - - Functions that cannot be used together with smooth interpolation Smooth interpolation cannot be used together with the functions below. • Parallel axis control • Twin table control - Tool length compensation Specify tool length c...

  • Page 124

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 94 - If specifying the machining condition selecting function, specify G5.1 Q1 Rx first and then nano smoothing. Example O0010 … (G5.1 Q1 R1;) G5.1 Q3 X0 Y0 Z0; … G5.1 Q0; … M30; If the following functions are required before nano smooth...

  • Page 125

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 95 - Explanation Generally, a program approximates a sculptured surface with minute segments with a tolerance of about 10 μm. ToleranceProgrammed pointDesired curve Fig. 4.13 (a) Many programmed points are placed on the boundary of tolerance...

  • Page 126

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 96 - : Command point Smoothing on XYZ space : Command point Smoothing on BC space XYZBCG5.1 Q3 X0 Y0 Z0 B0 C0;X_ Y_ Z_ B_ C_; X_ Y_ Z_ B_ C_; … G5.1 Q0; Fig. 4.13 (c) Insertion points for the rotation axes are corrected so that each axis e...

  • Page 127

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 97 - N1 N2N3 θ1 θ2 θ1: Difference in angle between blocks N1 and N2θ2: Difference in angle between blocks N2 and N3 Fig. 4.13 (e) If the value specified in the parameter is 0, no decision is made at the corner on the basis of the ...

  • Page 128

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 98 - • Cutting mode • Coordinate system rotation/3-dimensional coordinate system conversion cancel • Polar coordinate command cancel • Normal direction control cancel • Polar coordinate interpolation cancel • Programmable mirror ima...

  • Page 129

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 99 - - Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation If tool radius/tool nose radius compensation is specified in the nano smoothing mode, the nano smoothing mode is cancelled. Then, when the command of tool radius/tool nose radius compensation c...

  • Page 130

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 100 - - Functions that cannot be used simultaneously The nano smoothing function cannot be used simultaneously with the following functions. • Parallel axis control • Twin table control - Background graphic display The background graphic...

  • Page 131

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 101 - 4.14 NURBS INTERPOLATION (G06.2) Many computer-aided design (CAD) systems used to design metal dies for automobiles and airplanes utilize non-uniform rational B-spline (NURBS) to express a sculptured surface or curve for the metal dies. ...

  • Page 132

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 102 - Format G06.2[P ] K X Y Z [α ] [β ][R ] [F ]; K X Y Z [α ] [β ][R ]; K X Y Z [α ] [β ][R ]; K X Y Z [α ] [β ][R ]; : K X Y Z [α ] [β ][R ]; K ; : K ; G01 . . . G06.2 : Start NURBS interpolation mode P : Rank of...

  • Page 133

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 103 - This rank is represented by k in the defining expression indicated in the description of NURBS curve below. For example, a NURBS curve having a rank of four has a degree of three. The NURBS curve can be expressed by the constants t3, t2,...

  • Page 134

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 104 - - Command in NURBS interpolation mode In NURBS interpolation mode, any command other than the NURBS interpolation command (miscellaneous function and others) cannot be specified. - Manual intervention If manual intervention is attempte...

  • Page 135

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 105 - YZX1000.2000. 4.14.1 NURBS Interpolation Additional Functions In the FANUC Series 30i/31i, NURBS interpolation provides the following additional functions: - Parametric feedrate control The maximum feedrate of each segment is determin...

  • Page 136

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 106 - Example 1. Specified program G90 G06.2 X0. Y0. K0. F2000 ; X10. Y10. K0. F1500 ; X20. Y20. K0. F1800 ; X30. Y30. K0. ; X40. Y40. K1. X50. Y50. K2. K3. K3. K3. K3. 2. Specified speed Speed Time 1500 1800 2000 3. Parametric s...

  • Page 137

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 107 - - High-precision knot command If bit 1 (HIK) of parameter No. 8412 is set to 1, knot commands with a whole number of up to 12 digits and a decimal fraction of up to 12 digits can be specified. This function can be used only for knot com...

  • Page 138

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 108 - G06.2 [P ] [K ] [IP ] [R ] [F ] ; K IP [R ] ; K IP [R ] ; K IP [R ] ; … K IP [R ] ; K ; … K ; G01… … G06.2 : NURBS interpolation mode ON P : Rank of the NURBS curve IP : Control point...

  • Page 139

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 109 - 4.15 HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION (G07) In helical interpolation, when pulses are distributed with one of the circular interpolation axes set to a hypothetical axis, sine interpolation is enabled. When one of the circular interpolati...

  • Page 140

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 110 - - Move command Specify hypothetical axis interpolation only in the incremental mode. - Coordinate rotation Hypothetical axis interpolation does not support coordinate rotation. Example - Sine interpolation YZ20.0010.0 N001 G07 X0 ...

  • Page 141

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 111 - 4.16 VARIABLE LEAD THREADING (G34) Specifying an increment or a decrement value for a lead per screw revolution enables variable lead threading to be performed. Fig. 4.16 (a) Variable lead screw Format G34 IP_ F_ K_ Q_ ; IP_ : End poin...

  • Page 142

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 112 - 4.17 CIRCULAR THREADING (G35, G36) Using the G35 and G36 commands, a circular thread, having the specified lead in the direction of the major axis, can be machined. LL: Lead Fig. 4.17 (a) Circular threading Format A sample format for th...

  • Page 143

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 113 - FXZKRIEnd point (Z, X)Arc centerStart point Explanation - Specifying the arc radius If R is specified with I and K, only R is effective. - Shift angle If an angle greater than 360° is programmed, it is set to 360°. M - Specifying...

  • Page 144

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 114 - Limitation - Range of specifiable arc An arc must be specified such that it falls within a range in which the major axis of the arc is always the Z-axis or always the X-axis, as shown in Fig. 4.17 (b) and Fig. 4.17 (c). If the arc includ...

  • Page 145

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 115 - Start pointCenterEnd pointrCenterEnd pointrStart point Fig. 4.17 (e) Movement when the end point is not on an arc

  • Page 146

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 116 - 4.18 SKIP FUNCTION (G31) Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move following the G31 command, like G01. If an external skip signal is input during the execution of this command, execution of the command is interrupted...

  • Page 147

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 117 - Example - The next block to G31 is an incremental programming G31 G91 X100.0 F100;Y50.0;50.0100.0Skip signal is input hereActual motionMotion without skip signalYX Fig. 4.18 (a) The next block is an incremental programming - The next ...

  • Page 148

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 118 - 4.19 MULTI-STEP SKIP (G31) In a block specifying P1 to P4 after G31, the multi-step skip function stores coordinates in a custom macro variable when a skip signal (4-point or 8-point ; 8-point when a high-speed skip signal is used) is tur...

  • Page 149

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 119 - Format G31 IP ; G31; One-shot G code (If is effective only in the block in which it is specified) 4.21 SKIP POSITION MACRO VARIABLE IMPROVEMENT Overview In macro variables #100151 to #100200 (#5061 to #5080) for reading the skip positio...

  • Page 150

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 120 - Explanation - Custom macro variables If a high-speed skip signal is input when G31P90 is issued, absolute coordinates are stored in custom macro variables #5061 to #5080. For a system exceeding 20 axes, they are stored in variables #1001...

  • Page 151

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 121 - Format G31 P98 Q_ α_ F_ G31 P99 Q_ α_ F_ G31 : Skip command (one-shot G code) P98 : Performs a skip operation if the torque of the servo motor reaches the limit value. P99 : Performs a skip operation if the torque of the servo motor r...

  • Page 152

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 122 - (1) At point A, the machine comes in contact with the object under measurement and stops. At this time, because the torque limit value is not reached, no skip operation is performed, move commands are continuously output, and the current ...

  • Page 153

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 123 - Position during a skip operation Current position of the CNCMachine position Error Position compensated for by reflecting the delay Position not reflecting the delayCoordinate origin Stop point NOTE 1 Specify only a single axis with t...

  • Page 154

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 124 - Explanation - G code group G02.4 and G03.4 are modal G codes of group 01. They therefore remain effective until another G code in group 01 is specified. - Start point, mid-point, and end point An arc in a 3-dimensional space is unique...

  • Page 155

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 125 - - Velocity commands As the velocity command, specify the tangential velocity along the arc in the 3-dimensional space. Limitation - Cases in which linear interpolation is performed • f the start point, mid-point, and end-point are o...

  • Page 156

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 126 - • 3rd, 4th reference position return G30 • Skip G31 • Threading G33 • Automatic tool length measurement G37 • 3-dimensional cutter compensation G41 • Tool offset G45,G46,G47,G48 • Programmable mirror image G50.1,G51.1 • Lo...

  • Page 157

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 127 - - Other limitations When the following function is used, 3-dimensional circular interpolation cannot be used: • Arbitrary angular axis control A limitation may be imposed on other NC command combinations. See the description of each f...

  • Page 158

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 128 - 5 FEED FUNCTIONS Chapter 5, "FEED FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections: 5.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................................................128 5.2 ...

  • Page 159

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 129 - - Tool path in a cutting feed When the movement direction changes between a specified block and the next block during cutting feed, the tool path may be rounded because of the relationship between the time constant and feedrate (Fig. 5.1 (b)). 0P...

  • Page 160

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 130 - 5.3 CUTTING FEED Overview Feedrate of linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03), etc. are commanded with numbers after the F code. In cutting feed, the next block is executed so that the feedrate change from the previous block ...

  • Page 161

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 131 - T Feed per minute G98 ; G code (group 05) for feed per minute F_ ; Feedrate command (mm/min or inch/min) Feed per revolution G99 ; G code (group 05) for feed per revolution F_ ; Feedrate command (mm/rev or inch/rev) Inverse time feed (G93) G93 ; I...

  • Page 162

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 132 - • For milling machining WorkpieceTableToolFeed amount per minute(mm/min or inch/min) • For lathe cutting Feed amount per minute (mm/min or Íinch/min) F Fig. 5.3 (b) Feed per minute CAUTION No override can be used for some commands such ...

  • Page 163

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 133 - • For lathe cutting Feed amount per spindle revolution(mm/rev or inch/rev)F Fig. 5.3 (c) Feed per revolution CAUTION When the speed of the spindle is low, feedrate fluctuation may occur. The slower the spindle rotates, the more frequently f...

  • Page 164

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 134 - Example - For linear interpolation (G01) distancefeedratetime(min)1FRN== Feedrate: mm/min (for metric input) inch/min (for inch input) Distance: mm (for metric input) inch (for inch input) - To end a block in 1 (min) 1(min)11(min)1=...

  • Page 165

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 135 - N04 G94 X10.0 F100.0 ; N05 Y10.0 ; N06 G95 X10.0 ; ⇒ Alarm PS0011 is issued. N07 Y10.0; M30; NOTE 1 In G93 mode, if the axis command and the feedrate (F) command are not in the same block, alarm PS1202, "NO F COMMAND AT G93" is issued...

  • Page 166

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 136 - Reference See Appendix D for range of feedrate command value.

  • Page 167

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 137 - 5.4 CUTTING FEEDRATE CONTROL Cutting feedrate can be controlled, as indicated in Table 5.4 (a). Table 5.4 (a) Cutting Feedrate Control Function name G code Validity of G code Description Exact stop G09 This function is valid for specified blocks...

  • Page 168

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 138 - 5.4.1 Exact Stop (G09, G61), Cutting Mode (G64), Tapping Mode (G63) Explanation The inter-block paths followed by the tool in the exact stop mode, cutting mode, and tapping mode are different (Fig. 5.4.1 (a)). Tool path in the exact stop modeTool ...

  • Page 169

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 139 - θ θ θ θ : Tool : Programmed path : Tool center path 1. Straight line-straight line 2. Straight line-arc 3. Arc-straight line 4. Arc-arc Fig. 5.4.2 (a) Inner corner - Override range When a corner is determined to be an inner corner, the fe...

  • Page 170

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 140 - c daLsLebLsLe(2)Programmed pathTool center path Tool Fig. 5.4.2 (d) Override Range (Straight Line to Arc, Arc to Straight Line) - Override value An override value is set with parameter No. 1712. An override value is valid even for dry run and o...

  • Page 171

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 141 - If Rc is much smaller than Rp, Rc/Rp 0; the tool stops. A minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) is to be specified with parameter No. 1710. When Rc/Rp≤MDR, the feedrate of the tool is (F×MDR). If parameter No. 1710 is 0, the minimum deceleration r...

  • Page 172

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 142 - Feedrate of liner axis(X axis) ()minmmXLXFF/′Δ×= Feedrate of rotary axis(C axis) ()mindegCLCFF/′Δ×= Synthetic movement distance ()mmCClZYXL2222180⎟⎠⎞⎜⎝⎛Δ××+Δ+Δ+Δ=′π Movement time ()minFLT′=′ lC : imaginary radi...

  • Page 173

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 143 - ())()()/()()/()()(min/)(2)()(24719755.1017453292.0107453292.12957795.577453292.110107453292.11801010180secminminmmmmmindegmmdegmmCmmdegmmCFLTFBlL⋅⋅⋅=⋅⋅⋅=⋅⋅⋅=′=′⋅⋅⋅=⋅⋅⋅×=⋅⋅⋅=⎟⎟⎠⎞⎜⎜⎝⎛××=⎟...

  • Page 174

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 144 - The feedrate element of a rotary axis is excluded. The movement feedrate of a standard point becomes instruction feedrate F. Standard point Fig. 5.5 (b) Limitation This function corresponds only the linear interpolation(G01). However, it doesn'...

  • Page 175

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 145 - 5.6 DWELL Format M G04 X_; or G04 P_; X_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (decimal point permitted) P_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (decimal point not permitted) T G04 X_ ; or G04 U_ ; or G04 P_ ; X_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (deci...

  • Page 176

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 146 - M Specify dwell also to make an exact check in the cutting mode (G64 mode). If the specification of P and X is omitted, an exact stop occurs.

  • Page 177

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 6.REFERENCE POSITION - 147 - 6 REFERENCE POSITION A CNC machine tool has a special position where, generally, the tool is exchanged or the coordinate system is set, as described later. This position is referred to as a reference position. Chapter 6, "REFERENCE POSIT...

  • Page 178

    6.REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 148 - A (Start position for reference position return) C (Destination of return from the reference position) R (Reference position) Automatic reference position return (G28) A → B → R Movement from the reference position (G29) R → B → C B (I...

  • Page 179

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 6.REFERENCE POSITION - 149 - - Reference position return check G27 IP_; IP : Specify positioning to the reference position in the absolute coordinate system so as to return to the reference position. (absolute/incremental programming) Explanation - Automatic reference ...

  • Page 180

    6.REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 150 - - In-position check disable reference position return (G28.2, G30.2) You can disable in-position check at a middle point and reference position by specifying G28.2 or G30.2 as a reference point return command. Disabling the in-position check ...

  • Page 181

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 6.REFERENCE POSITION - 151 - Limitation - Status the machine lock being turned on The lamp for indicating the completion of reference position return does not go on when the machine lock is turned on, even when the tool has automatically returned to the reference positio...

  • Page 182

    6.REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 152 - G29X1300.0Y200.0 ; (Programs movement from B to C. The tool moves from reference position R to C specified with G29 via intermediate position B.) 20030050020010001300YXAutomatic reference position return (G28)A → B → RMovement from the re...

  • Page 183

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 6.REFERENCE POSITION - 153 - Example YXWorkpieceIntermediate position (50,40)Floating referencepositionG30.1 G90 X50.0 Y40.0 ;

  • Page 184

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 154 - 7 COORDINATE SYSTEM By teaching the CNC a desired tool position, the tool can be moved to the position. Such a tool position is represented by coordinates in a coordinate system. Coordinates are specified using program axes. When three program ...

  • Page 185

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 155 - Format M (G90)G53 IP _ P1; IP_ : Absolute command dimension word P1 : Enables the high-speed G53 function. (G90)G53.2 G01 IP_F_; IP_ : Absolute command dimension word F_ : Feedrate T G53 IP _ P1; IP_ : Absolute command dimension word P1 ...

  • Page 186

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 156 - Limitation - Cancel of the compensation function When the G53 command is specified, cancel the compensation functions such as the cutter compensation, tool length compensation, tool nose radius compensation, and tool offset beforehand. - G53...

  • Page 187

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 157 - Y axis 100050 150 X axisTemporarily decelerates and stops.

  • Page 188

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 158 - 7.2 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM Overview A coordinate system used for machining a workpiece is referred to as a workpiece coordinate system. A workpiece coordinate system is to be set with the CNC beforehand (setting a workpiece coordinate syst...

  • Page 189

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 159 - Example M 25.2XZ23.00XZ600.0IIf an absolute command is issued, thebase point moves to the commandedposition. In order to move the tool tip tothe commanded position, the differencefrom the tool tip to the base point iscompensated by tool length...

  • Page 190

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 160 - Example 1 Block in which G43/G44 is issued 2 Block which is in the G43 or G44 mode and in which an H code is issued 3 Block which is in the G43 or G44 mode and in which G49 is issued 4 Block in which, in the G43 or G44 mode, compensation vector...

  • Page 191

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 161 - 7.2.3 Changing Workpiece Coordinate System The six workpiece coordinate systems specified with G54 to G59 can be changed by changing an external workpiece origin offset value or workpiece origin offset value. Three methods are available to chan...

  • Page 192

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 162 - - Changing by setting a workpiece coordinate system By specifying a workpiece coordinate system setting G code, the workpiece coordinate system (selected with a code from G54 to G59) is shifted to set a new workpiece coordinate system so that ...

  • Page 193

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 163 - Example T XX'Tool positionA160100100100200If G50X100Z100; is commanded when the tool ispositioned at (200, 160) in G54 mode, workpiececoordinate system 1 (X' - Z') shifted by vector A iscreated.New workpiece coordinate systemOriginal workpiece...

  • Page 194

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 164 - Format M G92.1 IP 0 ; IP 0 : Specifies axis addresses subject to the workpiece coordinate system preset operation. Axes that are not specified are not subject to the preset operation. T G50.3 IP0 ; (G92.1 IP 0; for G code system B or C) IP 0 :...

  • Page 195

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 165 - WZn-Machine zero pointWorkpiece originoffset valueWZoG54 workpiececoordinate system beforemanual interventionG54 workpiece coordinatesystem after manualinterventionPoPnAmount ofmovement duringmanual intervention In the operation above, a workp...

  • Page 196

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 166 - Format - Selecting the additional workpiece coordinate systems G54.1Pn ; or G54Pn ; Pn : Codes specifying the additional workpiece coordinate systems n : 1 to 48 or 1 to 300 - Setting the workpiece origin offset value in the additional work...

  • Page 197

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 167 - 7.2.6 Automatic Coordinate System Setting When bit 0 (ZPR) of parameter No. 1201 for automatic coordinate system setting is 1, a coordinate system is automatically determined when manual reference position return is performed. Once α, β, and...

  • Page 198

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 168 - Format - Changing the workpiece coordinate system shift amount G10 P0 IP_; IP : Settings of an axis address and a workpiece coordinate system shift amount CAUTION A single block can contain a combination of X, Y, Z, C, U, V, W, and H (in G ...

  • Page 199

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 169 - 7.3 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM When a program is created in a workpiece coordinate system, a child workpiece coordinate system can be set for easier programming. Such a child coordinate system is referred to as a local coordinate system. Format G...

  • Page 200

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 170 - CAUTION 3 Whether the local coordinate system is canceled at reset depends on the parameter setting. The local coordinate system is canceled when either bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No.3402 or bit 3 (RLC) of parameter No.1202 is set to 1. In 3-dim...

  • Page 201

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 171 - Example Plane selection when the X-axis is parallel with the U-axis. G17 X_Y_ ; XY plane, G17 U_Y_ ; UY plane G18 X_Z_ ; ZX plane X_Y_ ; Plane is unchanged (ZX plane) G17 ; XY plane G18 ; ZX plane G17 U_ ; UY plane G18Y_ ; ZX plane...

  • Page 202

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 172 - 8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION 8 COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION Chapter 8, "COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION", consists of the following sections: 8.1 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING ..................................................................

  • Page 203

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 173 - 8.COORDINATE VALUE ANDDIMENSIONExample M Absolute programming Incremental programming G90 X40.0 Y70.0 ; G91 X-60.0 Y40.0 ; YX70.0 30.0 40.0100.0End point Start point T Tool movement from point P to point Q (diameter programming is used for the X-axis) G code s...

  • Page 204

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 174 - 8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION 8.2 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21) Either inch or metric input (least input increment) can be selected by G code. Format G20 ; Inch input G21 ; Metric input This G code must be specified in an independent block before settin...

  • Page 205

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 175 - 8.COORDINATE VALUE ANDDIMENSION• Move command issued with the machine locked • Move command issued using a handle interrupt • Mirror image-based operation • Workpiece coordinate system shift caused by local coordinate system setting (G52) or workpiece coo...

  • Page 206

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 176 - 8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION • Mirror image-based operation • Workpiece coordinate system shift caused by local coordinate system setting (G52) or workpiece coordinate system setting (G92) If an axis is under any of the following controls, however, no a...

  • Page 207

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 177 - 8.COORDINATE VALUE ANDDIMENSION8.3 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point can be used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can be specified with the following addresses: M X, Y, Z, U, V...

  • Page 208

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 178 - 8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION NOTE 2 When more than eight digits are specified, an alarm occurs. If a value is entered with a decimal point, the number of digits is also checked after the value is converted to an integer according to the least input increment...

  • Page 209

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 179 - 8.COORDINATE VALUE ANDDIMENSIONItem Notes Feedrate along axis Specifies change of radius/rev. or change of radius/min.Display of axis position Displayed as diameter value 8.5 DIAMETER AND RADIUS SETTING SWITCHING FUNCTION Overview Usually, whether to use diamete...

  • Page 210

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 180 - 8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION - Switching method using a G code (programmable diameter/radius specification switching) The format of a G code for diameter/radius specification switching is as follows: Format G10.9 IP_ ; IP_ : Address and command value of ...

  • Page 211

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 181 - 8.COORDINATE VALUE ANDDIMENSIONLimitation - Feedrate A radius-based feedrate is specified in both of diameter specification and radius specification at all times. - Data not switchable The following data follows the setting of parameter DIAx, so that diameter ...

  • Page 212

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 182 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) 9 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) The spindle speed can be controlled by specifying a value following address S. Chapter 9, "SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION)", consists of the following sections: 9.1 SPECIF...

  • Page 213

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 183 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION) - Constant surface speed controlled axis command G96Pα ; P0 : Axis set in the parameter No. 3770 P1 : X axis, P2 : Y axis, P3 : Z axis, P4 : 4th axis P5 : 5th axis, P6 : 6th axis, P7 : 7th axis, P8 : 8th axis NOTE If multi-...

  • Page 214

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 184 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) The spindle speed (min-1) almost coincideswith the surface speed (m/min) at approx.160 mm (radius). Spindle speed (min-1) Relation between workpiece radius, spindle speed and surface speedRadius (mm)Surface speed S is 600 m...

  • Page 215

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 185 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION) - Surface speed specified in the G96 mode G96 modeG97 modeSpecify the surface speed in m/min(or feet/min)G97 commandStore the surface speed in m/min(or feet/min)Command forthe spindlespeedSpecifiedThe specifiedspindle speed(mi...

  • Page 216

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 186 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) Example T 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 110012001300 1400150010501475200 375 500 300 400 700 X Z1234N16N16N15 N15 N14N14N11N11100 675 600 Programmed pathTool path after offsetRadius value φ600 φ400 N8 G00 X1000.0Z140...

  • Page 217

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 187 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)1) Positioning with an arbitrary angle by an axis address 2) Positioning with a semi-fixed angle by a given M code (set with a parameter) 3. Canceling the spindle positioning mode, and entering the spindle rotation mode Place ...

  • Page 218

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 188 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) M-code (Ex.) β = α + 5 Positioning angle (Ex.) β = 30° Mα β 30° M (α + 1) 2β 60° M (α + 2) 3β 90° M (α + 3) 4β 120° M (α + 4) 5β 150° M (α + 5) 6β 180° When the number of M codes to be used, value γ, ...

  • Page 219

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 189 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)G-code system A in lathe systemG-code system B or C in lathe system, and machining center system Command format Address used Command A-B in the above figureAddress used and G code Command A-B in the above figureAbsolute command...

  • Page 220

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 190 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) NOTE 2 Even when the single-block, multiple-M code command function is also used, related M codes must be specified in a single block. 3 Axis address commands for positioning of a spindle must be specified in a single block....

  • Page 221

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 191 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)Format - Spindle fluctuation detection on G26 Pp Qq Rr Ii; P: Time (in ms) from the issue of a new spindle rotation command (S command) to the start of checking whether the actual spindle speed is so fast that an overheat can ...

  • Page 222

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 192 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) Explanation The function for detecting spindle speed fluctuation checks whether the actual speed varies for the specified speed or not. Si or Sr, whichever is greater, is taken as the allowable fluctuation speed (Sm). An ala...

  • Page 223

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 193 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)(Example 2) When an alarm OH0704 is issued before a specified spindle speed is reached Spindle speed Specified speed Actual speed Time AlarmStart of check Specification ofanother speed CHECKNO CHECKCHECK SqSqSiSiSrSrPG26 mod...

  • Page 224

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 194 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) NOTE 3 The parameters that become valid are the parameters of the spindle speed fluctuation detection function (No.4911, No.4912, No.4913, No.4914) for the spindle on which the currently selected position coder is mounted. ...

  • Page 225

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 195 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)9.6.2 Spindle Indexing Function Format G96.1 P_ R_ ; After spindle indexing is completed, the operation of the next block is started. G96.2 P_ R_ ; Before spindle indexing is completed, the operation of the next block is starte...

  • Page 226

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 196 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) - Spindle indexing speed Issuing G96.1 or G96.2 causes a move speed to be dedicated to spindle indexing. Specify the move speed for spindle indexing, using parameter No. 11012. Spindle indexing command (absolute coordinate...

  • Page 227

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 197 - 10 TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) Chapter 10, "TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)", consists of the following sections: 10.1 TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION .........................................................................................

  • Page 228

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 198 - NOTE 1 The maximum number of digits of a T code can be specified by parameter No.3032 as 1 to 8. 2 When parameter No.5028 is set to 0, the number of digits used to specify the offset number in a T code depends on the number of tool of...

  • Page 229

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 199 - Tool management function 64 sets 64 sets in total Tool management function 240 sets 240 sets in total Tool management function 1000 sets 1000 sets in total NOTE For the number of tool management data sets, refer to the relevant manu...

  • Page 230

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 200 - The machine (PMC) determines tool breakage and stores corresponding information through the window. In tool management of the CNC, a broken tool is regarded as being equivalent to tools whose lives have expired. • Tool information ...

  • Page 231

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 201 - NOTE When the machine control type is the combined system type, tool length compensation and cutter compensation numbers are used for paths for the machining center system, and for paths for the lathe system, tool geometry compensati...

  • Page 232

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 202 - • Spindle positions and standby positions, regarded as special cartridge positions, have fixed cartridge numbers 11 to 14 (the positions of the first to fourth spindles) and 21 to 24 (the first to fourth standby positions). • With...

  • Page 233

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 203 - . . . . . Tool management data- Data of each tool such as type number, life status, and compensation number - The number of sets of data is 64, 240, or 1000. Cartridge management table- This table indicates the cartridge and pot to ...

  • Page 234

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 204 - - Tool search order Tools having a tool type number (T) specified by a program are searched sequentially from tool management data number 1 while registered data contents are checked. The following shows how a search operation is mad...

  • Page 235

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 205 - - System variables The following tool management data of the tool being used as a spindle after a tool change by M06 and the tool to be used next which is specified by a T code can be read through custom macro variables: Being used I...

  • Page 236

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 206 - Being used Item #8468 Customize data 38 #8469 Customize data 39 #8470 Customize data 40 When a cartridge number of a spindle position (11 to 14) or standby position (21 to 24) is specified in #8400, information about the correspondin...

  • Page 237

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 207 - Multi-path system Depending on whether the local path is a machining center system or a lathe system, tool compensation numbers are specified by using one of the above methods. Spindle selection When specifying compensation numbers ...

  • Page 238

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 208 - G10 L75 P1; N_ ; Tool management data number specification T_ C_ L_ I_ B_ Q_ H_ D_ S_ F_ J_ K_ ; P0 R_ ; Customization data 0 P1 R_ ; Customization data 1 P2 R_ ; Customization data 2 P3 R_ ; Customization data 3 P4 R_ ; Customization...

  • Page 239

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 209 - G10 L75 P2 ; N_ ; T_ C_ L_ I_ B_ Q_ H_ D_ S_ F_ J_ K_ ; P_ R_ ; N_ ; : G11 ; Deleting tool management data The data of a specified data number can be deleted from tool management data. The cartridge management table data correspon...

  • Page 240

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 210 - N21 R29; Changes the tool management data number of the standby position to No. 29. G11 ; Deleting cartridge management table data Tool management data numbers can be deleted from the cartridge management table. G10 L76 P3 ; N car...

  • Page 241

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 211 - P4 R65 ; character “A” ASCII code 41h P5 R83 ; character “S” ASCII code 53h P6 R85 ; character “U” ASCII code 55h P7 R82 ; character “R” ASCII code 54h P8 R69 ; character “E” ASCII code 45h P9 R53 ; character “5...

  • Page 242

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 212 - 10.3 TOOL MANAGEMENT EXTENSION FUNCTION Overview The following functions have been added to the tool management function: 1. Customization of tool management data display 2. Setting of spindle position/standby position display 3. Inpu...

  • Page 243

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 213 - R Item Display width Remarks 9 L-STATE 6 or 12 The display width is switched by bit 1 of parameter No. 13201. 10 S (Spindle speed) 10 11 F (Feedrate) 10 12 Tool figure number (A) 3 • Offset-related items for machining center sys...

  • Page 244

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 214 - R Item Display width Remarks 85 CUSTOM 5 10 86 CUSTOM 6 10 87 CUSTOM 7 10 88 CUSTOM 8 10 89 CUSTOM 9 10 90 CUSTOM 10 10 91 CUSTOM 11 10 92 CUSTOM 12 10 93 CUSTOM 13 10 94 CUSTOM 14 10 95 CUSTOM 15 10 96 CUSTOM 16 10 97 CUSTOM 17 10 98...

  • Page 245

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 215 - Example Example of setting tool offset memory A G10L77P3; N1 R1; N2 R2; N3 R3; N4 R4; N5 R5; N6 R6; N7 R7; N8 R8; N9 R9; N10 R11; N11 R21; N12 R22; N13 R80; N14 R81; N15 R-1; G11; Set tool management data screen display customization...

  • Page 246

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 216 - Example 1: Page 2 NOTE 1 This setting is enabled when bit 0 (TDC) of parameter No. 13201 is set to 1. 2 Up to 20 pages can be set. 3 Be sure to specify an end. 4 If an item that requires the corresponding option is specified without...

  • Page 247

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 217 - Explanation - Spindle position/standby position setting (N_) Specify a spindle position or standby position to be renamed. The table below indicates the values to be specified. Spindle position First Second Third Fourth 1st path 111...

  • Page 248

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 218 - In the MG item on the tool management data screen, spindle 1 is displayed as "SP1", and standby 1 is displayed as "WT1". NOTE Data registered becomes effective after the screen display is switched to the tool ma...

  • Page 249

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 219 - NOTE 1 If G10 L77 P5 is terminated normally, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. 2 The setting becomes effective after the power is turned off then back on. 3 When the number of decimal places is set for custom...

  • Page 250

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 220 - G10L77P5; <1> Set customize data decimal point position N1 R3; <2> Set 3 as decimal point position of customize data 1 N2 R1; <3> Set 1 as decimal point position of customize data 2 G11; <4> Cancel the setting...

  • Page 251

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 221 - Item Description Data length 1 byte (flag data) #5 REV 0: A life count period of 1 sec is used. (S) 1: A life count period of 8 msec is used. (M) Range of count is as follows. 1sec: 0 to 3,599,999 seconds (999 hours 59 minutes 59 sec...

  • Page 252

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 222 - <Registration of new tool management data> G10 L75 P1 ; N_; A_; G11 ; N_: Tool management data number A_: Specify tool figure number (0 to 20). <Modification of tool management data> G10 L75 P2; N_; A_; G11 ; N_: Tool ...

  • Page 253

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 223 - 10.5 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT Tools are classified into several groups, and a tool life (use count or use duration) is specified for each group in advance. Each time a tool is used, its life is counted, and when the tool life expires, a n...

  • Page 254

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 224 - M If the tool life management B function is enabled, the function for selecting a tool group by an arbitrary group number can be used. T The tool life management B function can be used. However, the function for selecting a tool grou...

  • Page 255

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 225 - Table 10.5.1 Maximum numbers of registrable groups and tools Bit 1 (GS2) of parameter No. 6800 Bit 0 (GS1) of parameter No. 6800Number of groups Number of tools 0 0 1/8 of maximum number of groups (parameter No. 6813) 32 0 1 1/4 of ma...

  • Page 256

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 226 - - Arbitrary group number M If a function for allowing specification of arbitrary group numbers is used (bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 = 1), an arbitrary group number can be specified with a T code to select a tool life management...

  • Page 257

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 227 - Format - Registration after deletion of all groups M Format Meaning G10L3; P-L-; T-H-D-; T-H-D-; : P-L-; T-H-D-; T-H-D-; : G11; M02(M30); G10L3: Register data after deleting data of all groups. P-: Group number L-: Tool life value ...

  • Page 258

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 228 - - Change of tool life management data M Format Meaning G10L3P1; P-L-; T-H-D-; T-H-D-; : P-L-; T-H-D-; T-H-D-; : G11; M02(M30); G10L3P1: Start changing group data. P-: Group number L-: Tool life value T-: Tool number H-: Code for sp...

  • Page 259

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 229 - CAUTION If the Q command is omitted, the life count type is set according to the setting of bit 2 (LTM) of parameter No. 6800. - Arbitrary group number M If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter...

  • Page 260

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 230 - NOTE 1 If the remaining life setting (R) is 0 or omitted, the remaining life is assumed to be 0. In this case, the tool life expiration prior notice function is disabled. 2 The remaining life setting (R) cannot exceed the life value (...

  • Page 261

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 231 - 10.5.3 Tool Life Management Commands in Machining Program Explanation M - Commands The following commands are used for tool life management: T○○○○○○○○; Specifies a tool group number. The tool life management funct...

  • Page 262

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 232 - D99; Selects the D code registered in tool life management data for the currently used tool to perform cutter compensation. Parameter No. 13266 can be used to enable compensation according to a D code other than D99. D00; Cance...

  • Page 263

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 233 - T If the tool change type is the ATC type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1), commands are specified in the same manner as for the M series except that neither H99 nor H00 is used for the T series. See the description for the M s...

  • Page 264

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 234 - NOTE If life counting is not performed, or if the specified tool does not belong to the group for which life counting is being performed, alarm PS0155 is issued. The numbers of digits in and 99/88 vary as follows: No.5028 99 88 1 T ...

  • Page 265

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 235 - Example: Suppose that the tool life management ignore number is 100. T101 ; : M06 ; : T102 ; : M06 T101 ; : : : T103 ; : M06 T102 ; : G43 H99 ; : G41 D99 ; : D00 ; : H00 ; A tool whose life has not expired is selected from group 1. (S...

  • Page 266

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 236 - - Tool change type D For a tool selected by a tool group command (T code), life counting is performed by a tool change command (M06) specified in the same block as the tool group command. Specifying a T code alone does not results in...

  • Page 267

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 237 - 10.5.4 Tool Life Counting and Tool Selection Either use count specification or duration specification is selected as the tool life count type according to the state of bit 2 (LTM) of parameter No. 6800. Life counting is performed for...

  • Page 268

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 238 - - Use count specification (LTM=0) If a tool group command (T○○99 code) is issued, a tool whose life has not expired is selected from the specified tool group, and the life counter for the selected tool is incremented by one. Unle...

  • Page 269

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 239 - - M99 If the life count is specified by use count and bit 0 (T99) of parameter No. 6802 is 1, the tool change signal TLCH is output and the automatic operation is stopped if the life of at least one tool group has expired when the M9...

  • Page 270

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 240 - Example: Suppose that M16 is a tool life count restart M code and that the tool life management ignore number is 100. Also suppose that the life count is specified by use count. T101 ; A tool whose life has not expired is selected ...

  • Page 271

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 241 - M T NOTE 1 The tool life count restart M code is treated as an M code not involved in buffering. 2 If the life count type is use count specification, the tool change signal is output if the life of at least one tool group has expire...

  • Page 272

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 242 - If the setting of parameter No. 6846 is 0, the remaining tool number notice signal TLAL is not output. The remaining tool number notice signal TLAL becomes "0" when: • A value is input to parameter No. 6846. • Using a G...

  • Page 273

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 243 - 11 AUXILIARY FUNCTION Overview There are two types of auxiliary functions; auxiliary function (M code) for specifying spindle start, spindle stop, program end, and so on, and secondary auxiliary function (B code) for specifying index table po...

  • Page 274

    11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 244 - - M98 (Calling of subprogram) This code is used to call a subprogram. The code and strobe signals are not sent. See the subprogram II-13.3 for details. - M99 (End of subprogram) This code indicates the end of a subprogram. M99 execution re...

  • Page 275

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 245 - 11.3.1 Setting an M Code Group Number Using the Setting Screen - Procedure for displaying the M code group setting screen Fig. 11.3 (a) M code group setting screen You can use the “M code group setting screen (Fig. 11.3 (a))” to set a...

  • Page 276

    11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 246 - <1> to <4> indicate parameters Nos. 3441 to 3444. (1) When <1> = 300, <2> = 400, <3> = 500, and <4> = 900 are set Number 0000 : 100 codes0099 0300 : 100 codes0399 ...

  • Page 277

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 247 - 11.3.3 M Code Group Check Function When multiple M commands in a single block (enabled when bit 7 (M3B) of parameter No. 3404 is set to 1) are used, you can check the following items. You can also select whether to check the items using bit ...

  • Page 278

    11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 248 - (When bit 0 (AUP) of parameter No.3450 is set to 0) When the second auxiliary function with no decimal point is specified, the specified value is output on the code signals as is, regardless of the desktop calculator decimal point setting ...

  • Page 279

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 249 - Setting unit Bit 0 (AUX) of parameter No.3405 = 0 Bit 0 (AUX) of parameter No.3405 = 1 Reference axis: IS-A 100×1000×Reference axis: IS-B 1000×10000×Reference axis: IS-C 10000×100000×Reference axis: IS-D 100000×1000000×Inch input sys...

  • Page 280

    12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 250 - 12 PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Chapter 12, "PROGRAM MANAGEMENT", consists of the following sections: 12.1 FOLDERS..................................................................................................................................

  • Page 281

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 251 - [Initial folder configuration] / SYSTEM/ //CNC_MEM MTB1/ USER/ PATH1/ PATH2/ LIBRARY/(1) Root folder (2) System folder (SYSTEM) (3) MTB dedicated folder 1 (MTB1) (5) User folder (b) Common program folder (LIBRARY) (a) Path folders (PATHn) Th...

  • Page 282

    12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 252 - /SYSTEM/[Sample folder configuration]//CNC_MEMMTB1/USER/PATH1/PATH2/LIBRARY/User created foldersPrograms are grouped bypart to be machined, and theprogram groups are stored inindividual folders.CYLINDER/PISTON/GEAR1/GEAR2/MTB2/ 12.1.2 Folder...

  • Page 283

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 253 - - Foreground default folder A folder used for foreground operations except automatic operations and program editing is set. The target operations include: • Program input/output • External data input • External workpiece number search ...

  • Page 284

    12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 254 - O9999 Program number 9999 File names that cannot be treated as program numbers ABC o123 O123.4 NOTE 1 File names must each be unique in the same folder. 2 When the file name of a program is not treated as a program number, the progr...

  • Page 285

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 255 - • Change protection level/output protection level - Edit disable Editing of a specified program can be disabled. A program cannot be input (registered) from an external device to the folder. - Edit/display disable Editing and display of...

  • Page 286

    12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 256 - <4> MTB dedicated folder 1, which is an initial folder (MTB1) <5> System folder, which is an initial folder (SYSTEM) Subprogram (called by M code/specific address/2nd auxiliary function) Macro program (called by G code/M code...

  • Page 287

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 257 - • Interruption type macro call (M96) • Figure copying (G72.1, G72.2) When a program is called in the above functions, a subprogram call by file name and a macro call by file name can be used. • Subprogram call by file name M98 <f...

  • Page 288

    12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 258 - Parameter No. Bit No. Description Manipulation/execution target 3 (P8E) Disables or enables editing of programs O80000000 to O8999999. Same as above 4 (P9E) Disables or enables editing of programs O90000000 to O99999999. Same as above 3204 5 ...

  • Page 289

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 259 - NOTE 1 Creating one folder results in the number of programs yet to be registerable decreasing one. 2 The program storage size means the maximum size of a program if the program is the one and only program registered. 3 If more than one progr...

  • Page 290

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 260 - 13 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION Overview - Main program and subprogram There are two program types, main program and subprogram. Normally, the CNC operates according to the main program. However, when a command calling a subprogram is encountere...

  • Page 291

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 261 - - Program section configuration A program section consists of several blocks. A program section starts with a program number or file name and ends with a program end code. Program section configuration Program section Program number ...

  • Page 292

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 262 - A leader section generally contains information such as a file header. When a leader section is skipped, even a TV parity check is not made. So a leader section can contain any codes except the EOB code. - Program start The program start...

  • Page 293

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 263 - The mark is not displayed on the screen. However, when a file is output, the mark is automatically output at the end of the file. If an attempt is made to execute % when M02 or M30 is not placed at the end of the program, the alarm PS5010,...

  • Page 294

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 264 - Example) % ; <PARTS_1> ; N1 ... : M30 ; % NOTE A file name can be coded: - At the beginning of a program - Immediately after M98, G65, G66, G66.1, M96, G72.1, or G72.2 Do not code a file name in other than the above. - Seq...

  • Page 295

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 265 - Table 13.2 (b) Major functions and addresses Function Address Meaning Program number O(*) Program number Sequence number N Sequence number Preparatory function G Specifies a motion mode (linear, arc, etc.) X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C Coordi...

  • Page 296

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 266 - Function Address Input in mm Input in inch Increment system IS-A ±999999.99 mm ±999999.99 deg. ±99999.999 inch *3 ±999999.99 deg. Increment system IS-B ±999999.999 mm ±999999.999 deg. ±99999.9999 inch *3 ±999999.999 deg. Increment ...

  • Page 297

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 267 - The values and uses for some codes are limited by parameter setting. (For example, some M codes are not buffered.) For details, refer to the parameter manual. - Optional block skip When a slash followed by a number (/n (n=1 to 9)) is sp...

  • Page 298

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 268 - 3. When the signal BDTn is set to 0 while the CNC is reading a block that contains /n, the block is ignored. BDTn "1" "0" Read by CNC → . . . ; /n N123 X100. Y200.; N234 . . . . This range of information is ...

  • Page 299

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 269 - 13.3 SUBPROGRAM (M98, M99) If a program contains a fixed sequence or frequently repeated pattern, such a sequence or pattern can be stored as a subprogram in memory to simplify the program. A subprogram can be called from the main program....

  • Page 300

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 270 - NOTE 1 When calling a subprogram of a 4-digit or shorter subprogram number repeatedly (P8 digit), make the subprogram number 4 digits by prefixing it with “0” if the subprogram number is shorter than 4 digits. Example) P100100: Call su...

  • Page 301

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 271 - - Execution sequence of subprograms called from a main program 1 2 3Main program N0010 . . . ; N0020 . . . ; N0030 M98 P21010 ; N0040 . . . ; N0050 M98 P1010 ; N0060 . . . ; SubprogramO1010 . . . ;N1020 . . . ;N1030 . . . ;N1040 . . . ;N...

  • Page 302

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 272 - N1010 . . . ; N1020 . . . ; N1030 . . . ; N1040 . . . M02 ;N1050 M99 P1020 ;/ Optional block skip ON - Subprogram call with sequence number Setting bit 0 (SQC) of parameter No. 6005 to 1 can call a specified sequence number in the subp...

  • Page 303

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 273 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING14 FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING Chapter 14, "FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING", consists of the following sections: 14.1 FIGURE COPYING (G72.1, G72.2) ...............................................................

  • Page 304

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 274 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING . . . . . ; M99 ; (Example of a correct program) O1000 G00 G90 X100.0 Y200.0 ; . . . . . ; . . . . . ; M99 ; - Combination of rotational and linear copying The linear copying command can be specified in a subprogram for a r...

  • Page 305

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 275 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING Start point End point of the first copyStart point of the second copy Y 70P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5P6P7X3020 Main program O1000 ; N10 G92 X-20.0 Y0 ; N20 G00 G90 X0 Y0 ; N30 G01 G17 G41 X20. Y0 D01 F10 ; (P0) N40 Y20. ; (P1) N50 X30. ...

  • Page 306

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 276 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING - Unit system The two axes of the plane for copying a figure must have an identical unit system. - Single block Single-block stops are not performed in a block with G72.1 or G72.2. - Specifying tool radius compensation ...

  • Page 307

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 277 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING - Rotational copying (spot boring) Main programO3000 ;N10 G92 G17 X80.0 Y50.0 ; (P0)N20 G72.1 P4000 L6 X0 Y0 R60.0 ;N30 G80 G00 X80.0 Y50.0 ; (P0)N40 M30 ;SubprogramO4000 N100 G90 G81 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ F_ ; ...

  • Page 308

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 278 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING - Combination of rotational copying and linear copying (bolt hole circle) Main program O1000 ; N10 G92 G17 X100.0 Y80.0 ; (P0) N20 G72.1 P2000 X0 Y0 L8 R45.0 ; N30 G80 G00 X100.0 Y80.0 ; (P0) N40 ...

  • Page 309

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 279 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING• For lathe cutting XX'Z'ZSurface to bemachinedB#3#2#1#4YZMachining such as milling, pocketing, and drilling is performed. Format M G68 XpX1 Ypy1 Zpz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 Rα ; Starting 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion : ...

  • Page 310

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 280 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING : Nn G69 ; 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion can be executed twice. In the N1 block, specify the center, direction of the axis of rotation, and angular displacement of the first rotation. When this block is execute...

  • Page 311

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 281 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING - Equation for 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion The following equation shows the general relationship between (x, y, z) in the program coordinate system and (X, Y, Z) in the original coordinate system (workpiece coor...

  • Page 312

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 282 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING - Three basic axes and their parallel axes 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion can be applied to a desired combination of three axes selected out of the basic three axes (X, Y, Z) and their parallel axes. The 3-dimens...

  • Page 313

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 283 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGG44 Decreasing tool length compensation G45 Increasing the tool offset G46 Decreasing the tool offset G47 Doubling the tool offset G48 Halving the tool offset G49 Canceling tool length compensation G50.1 Canceling programm...

  • Page 314

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 284 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING Feedrate When bit 1 (D3R) of parameter No. 11221 is set to 1 (for the rapid traverse mode), the rapid traverse rate in the drilling direction in a canned cycle for drilling in the tilted working plane command mode, 3-dimensi...

  • Page 315

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 285 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING - Reset If a reset occurs during 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode, the mode is canceled and the continuous-state G code is changed to G69. Bit 2 (D3R) of parameter No. 5400 determines whether just the G69.1 code ...

  • Page 316

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 286 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING Limitation - Manual intervention 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion does not affect the degree of manual intervention or manual handle interrupt. - Positioning in the machine coordinate system 3-dimensional coordin...

  • Page 317

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 287 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING T - Relationship between 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion and tool offset When using a tool offset command, nest the tool offset command within the 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode. (Example) G68.1 X10...

  • Page 318

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 288 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING Example N1 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 ; Carries out positioning to zero point H. N2 G68 X10. Y0 Z0 I0 J1 K0 R30. ; Forms new coordinate system X'Y'Z'. N3 G68 X0 Y-10. Z0 I0 J0 K1 R-90. ; Forms other coordinate system X''Y''Z''. The origin ...

  • Page 319

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 289 - 15 COMPENSATION FUNCTION Chapter 15, "COMPENSATION FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 15.1 TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION (G43, G44, G49)...................................................................289 15.2 SCALING (...

  • Page 320

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 290 - Format Type Format Description Tool length compensation A G43 Z_ H_ ; G44 Z_ H_ ; Tool length compensation B G17 G43 Z_ H_ ; G17 G44 Z_ H_ ; G18 G43 Y_ H_ ; G18 G44 Y_ H_ ; G19 G43 X_ H_ ; G19 G44 X_ H_ ; Tool length compensation C G43 α_...

  • Page 321

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 291 - Example : H1 ; The offset value of offset number 1 is selected. : G43 Z_ ; Offset is applied according to the offset value of offset number 1. : H2 ; Offset is applied according to the offset value of offset number 2. : H0 ; Offset is ...

  • Page 322

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 292 - Example 1 When tool length compensation B is executed along the X-axis and Y-axis G19 G43 H_ ; Offset in X axis G18 G43 H_ ; Offset in Y axis Example 2 When tool length compensation C is executed along the X-axis and Y-axis G43 X_ H...

  • Page 323

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 293 - Example Actual positionProgrammed position Offset value =4mm #1203030120 #3#2+Y +X3050 +Z 335301822 8Tool length compensation (in boring holes #1, #2, and #3)(1) (2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(7) (8)(9)(13)(10)(11) (12) Program H1=-4.0 (Tool length c...

  • Page 324

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 294 - 15.1.2 G53, G28, G30, and G30.1 Commands in Tool Length Compensation Mode This section describes the tool length compensation cancellation and restoration performed when G53, G28, G30, or G31 is specified in tool length compensation mode. ...

  • Page 325

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 295 - (IP_ : Dimension word) CAUTION 1 If a tool length compensation vector is restored only with H_, G43, or G44 when tool length compensation is applied along multiple axes, the tool length compensation vector along only the axis normal to a...

  • Page 326

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 296 - 15.2 SCALING (G50, G51) Overview A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling). Two types of scaling are available, one in which the same magnification rate is applied to each axis and the other in which different magnification...

  • Page 327

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 297 - NOTE 1 Entering electronic calculator decimal point input mode (bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401 = 1) does not cause the units of the magnification rates P, I, J, and K to change. 2 Setting the least input increment equal to 10 times the ...

  • Page 328

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 298 - Y axis X axis bad a/b : Scaling magnification of X axis c/d : Scaling magnification of Y axis o : Scaling center Programmed figure Scaled figure o c Fig. 15.2 (b) Scaling of each axis CAUTION Specifying the following commands at the ...

  • Page 329

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 299 - Even for an R-specified arc, scaling is applied to each of I, J, and K after the radius value (R) is converted into a vector in the center direction of each axis. If, therefore, the above G02 block contains the following R-specified arc, ...

  • Page 330

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 300 - - Scaling and optional chamfering/corner R Chamfering Scaling x 2 in the X direction x 1 in the Y direction Corner R If different magnifications are applied to the individual axes, corner R results in a spiral, not an arc, because scalin...

  • Page 331

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 301 - T This function is available to G code systems B and C only; it is not available to G code system A. During scaling, the following functions cannot be used. If any of them is specified, alarm PS0300, “ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SCALING” will o...

  • Page 332

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 302 - NOTE 1 The position display represents the coordinate value after scaling. 2 When a mirror image was applied to one axis of the specified plane, the following results: (1) Circular command ......................................... Directio...

  • Page 333

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 303 - 15.3 PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE (G50.1, G51.1) A mirror image of a programmed command can be produced with respect to a programmed axis of symmetry (Fig. 15.3 (a)). Y100605050X60100(1)(2)(3)(4)(1) Original image of a programmed command(2) I...

  • Page 334

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 304 - Command Explanation Circular command G02 and G03 are interchanged. Tool radius ⋅ tool nose radius compensation G41 and G42 are interchanged. Coordinate system rotation CW and CCW (directions of rotation) are interchanged. Limitation - S...

  • Page 335

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 305 - 15.4 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (G40.1,G41.1,G42.1) Overview When a tool with a rotation axis (C-axis) is moved in the XY plane during cutting, the normal direction control function can control the tool so that the C-axis is always perpendic...

  • Page 336

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 306 - Explanation - Angle of the C axis When viewed from the center of rotation around the C-axis, the angular displacement about the C-axis is determined as shown in Fig. 15.4 (d). The positive side of the X-axis is assumed to be 0, the posit...

  • Page 337

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 307 - Center of the arcProgrammed tool path Tool center path The tool is controlled so that the C-axis is always normal to the tool path determined by circular interpolation. A rotation command is inserted so that the C-axis becomes normal to th...

  • Page 338

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 308 - - Movement for which arc insertion is ignored Specify the maximum distance for which machining is performed with the same normal direction as that of the preceding block. • Linear movement When distance N2, shown below, is smaller than...

  • Page 339

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 309 - 15.5 WORKPIECE SETTING ERROR COMPENSATION When a workpiece is placed on the machine, the workpiece is not always placed at an ideal position. With this function, a displaced workpiece can be machined according to the program. This function...

  • Page 340

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 310 - [About Δx, Δy, and Δz] Δx, Δy, and Δz represent the coordinate values of the origin of the workpiece coordinate system (X'Y'Z' in the Fig. 15.5 (b), which is hereinafter referred to as the "workpiece setting coordinate system&...

  • Page 341

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 311 - X (= X') Z YZ’ Y’ΔaX Z YZ’ Y’ΔbX' X Z YZ’ Y’ΔcX' X Z YZ’Y’X'( Δx, Δy, Δz ) The workpiece coordinate system (X,Y,Z) is rotated about the X-axis by Δa. Further rotated about the Y-axis by Δb. Further rotated about th...

  • Page 342

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 312 - No setting can be made for a hypothetical axis. In the descriptions above, X, Y, and Z represent the three basic axes, X, Y, and Z, specified by parameter No. 1022. If the specification of any of the three basic axes, X, Y, and Z, is m...

  • Page 343

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 313 - First, the error values of No. 00 are converted to those based on C = 0.000. C positive direction XY X'Y' 10 Δy = 10.000 C = -90 C = 0 X YX' Y' 10Δx = 10.000 Next, the error values of No. 01 are converted to those based on C = 0.000. X...

  • Page 344

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 314 - [About errors Δa, Δb, and Δc] With parameter No. 11201, the number of decimal places of the least input increment can be specified. Parameter No. 11201 1 2 3 4 Least input increment (deg) 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 Maximum settable value (de...

  • Page 345

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 315 - Error No.00 (COMMON)Error No.01Error No.02Error No.03Error No.04Error No.05 Error No.06 ErrorNo.07Table rotation axis position 2 #26007 #26017#26027#26037#26047#26057 #26067 #26077 - Workpiece setting error compensation mode By specifyin...

  • Page 346

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 316 - Parameter No. Description 19688 Inclination angle when the second rotation axis is inclined 19689 Rotation direction of the second rotation axis 19690 Rotation angle when the second rotation axis is a hypothetical axis 19696#0 Whether the...

  • Page 347

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 317 - NOTE 1 If any of the parameters above is set incorrectly, alarm PS0438, “ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN TOOL DIRC CMP” is issued. 2 Depending on the machine configuration, it may be physically impossible to orient the tool in the compensation d...

  • Page 348

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 318 - Tool rotation type Table rotation typeComposite typeRotation axis closer to the tool Rotation axis closer to the workpiece - Singular point and singular point posture on a 5-axis machine A tool posture is uniquely determined w...

  • Page 349

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 319 - - Conditions to decide that Tool is in singular posture When the angle between the tool and the singular posture is less than the parameter No.11204, it is decided that the tool is in singular posture. In the descriptions below, the descr...

  • Page 350

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 320 - X Y The tool posture in the machine coordinate systemThe calculated tool posture after movement (Singular) The tool posture before movement (Singular) In this case, the rotation axis about the Z-axis (the rotation axis closer to the work...

  • Page 351

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 321 - X Y The tool posture in the machine coordinate systemThe tool posture after movement (Singular) The tool posture before movement (Singular) In this case, the rotation axis about Z-axis (the rotation axis closer to the workpiece) moves ...

  • Page 352

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 322 - (3) In the case that the current machine position is singular and the position after movement in real time is not singular. : In order to position the tool to the correct direction, there are two pairs of solutions of rotation axes angles ...

  • Page 353

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 323 - Assume that the tool posture after the compensation of tool direction becomes like following figure. X Y The tool posture in the machine coordinate systemThe tool posture after movement (Not singular) The tool posture before movement (N...

  • Page 354

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 324 - In the case that rotary axes have movable range and a singular point exists in that range, Workpiece setting error compensation must be activated after the rotary axes have been moved to the range where the rotary axes should move, that is...

  • Page 355

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 325 - X Y Z N40 end B C Absolute -1.0 0.0Machine -1.0 0.0 X Y Z In the middle of N50 X Y Z N50 end B C Absolute 90.0 90.0Machine 90.0 90.0 At N50, machine position moves to B90.0 and C90.0, as commanded. Next, suppose there is the ...

  • Page 356

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 326 - B axis movable range -45deg 100deg B axis position of N20 before Workpiece setting error compensation is activated Singular point 0deg O2 N10 G5.1 Q1 N20 G90 G01 B-1.0 C0 F1000 ; B axis machine position is between the lower limit and the ...

  • Page 357

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 327 - B axis movable range -45deg 100deg Singular point 0degB axis position of N20 before Workpiece setting error compensation is activated O3 N10 G5.1 Q1 N20 G90 G01 B1.0 C0 F1000 ; B axis machine position is between the upper limit and the s...

  • Page 358

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 328 - X Y Z N50 end B C Absolute 90.0 90.0 Machine 90.0 90.0 This time, machine position moves to B90.0,C90.0 during N50. As the result, B axis does not move over the lower limit of B axis movable range. In O2, the case that B axis moves o...

  • Page 359

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 329 - X Y Z In the middle of N50 X Y Z N50 end B C Absolute 90.0 90.0Machine 90.0 90.0 At N50, the machine position moves to B90.0,C90.0. As the result, B axis does not move over the lower limit of B axis movable range. - Error for which...

  • Page 360

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 330 - [Table rotation type example] In a table rotation type, specify the A-axis (rotating about the X-axis) and C-axis (rotating about the Z-axis), respectively, as the master and slave rotation axes. The C-axis is a rotation axis closer to t...

  • Page 361

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 331 - - Tolerance for assuming rotation direction errors to be 0 Tolerance for assuming rotation direction errors to be 0 can be set in parameters Nos. 1750 to 11752. When the machine has a table rotation axis When the machine has a table rota...

  • Page 362

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 332 - Since B = 90.0 is set for the table rotation axis position when workpiece setting errors are measured, when the position about the B-axis in the machine coordinate system is 90.0, workpiece setting errors Δa, Δb, and Δc are defined as s...

  • Page 363

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 333 - If a rotation direction error is outside the range set in the corresponding parameter No. 11753 to 11758, alarm PS0517, “SETTING ERROR AMOUNT IS OUT OF RANGE” is issued when workpiece setting error compensation is started. When the mac...

  • Page 364

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 334 - For acceleration/deceleration after interpolation When bit 1 (D3R) of parameter No. 11221 is set to 1 (for the rapid traverse mode), rapid traverse in the drilling direction in a canned cycle for drilling in the tilted working plane comma...

  • Page 365

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 335 - G54 G55Original workpiece setting position Actual workpiece setting position Workpiece setting error P1 (for G54) Workpiece setting error P2 (for G55) Workpiece setting coordinate system for G54 Workpiece setting coordinate system for G55 ...

  • Page 366

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 336 - Set the number of the workpiece coordinate system on which each of workpiece setting errors Nos. 01 to 07 is based in parameter No. 11411 to 11417. For G54 to G59, set 54 to 59. For G54.1P1 to G54.1P300, set 1001 to 1300. When one of the ...

  • Page 367

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 337 - Suppose that the workpiece is displaced from the "correct workpiece setting position" as shown in Fig. 15.5 (i). Workpiece setting coordinate system (X'Y'Z') XY Workpiece coordinate system G55 (XYZ) Correct workpiece setting posi...

  • Page 368

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 338 - The machine is of tool rotation type, the C-axis is the master rotation axis and rotates about the Z-axis, and the B-axis is the slave axis and rotates about the Y-axis. For cutting on the plane normal to the movement direction, the tool i...

  • Page 369

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 339 - O2 ; N10 G55 ; Set coordinate system N15 G05.1 Q1 AI contour control mode ON N16 G54.4 P1 Workpiece setting error compensation mode ON N20 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z300.0 B0 C0 ; Move to initial position N30 G01 G43.4 H01 Z40.0 F500. ; Start tool c...

  • Page 370

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 340 - G02 Circular interpolation (CW) G03 Circular interpolation (CCW) G04 Dwell G05.1 Q0/Q1 AI contour control mode OFF/ON G10 Programmable data input G11 Programmable data input mode cancel G17 Plane selection (XY) G18 Plane selection (ZX) G19...

  • Page 371

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 341 - T G69.1 Coordinate system rotation / 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion/tilted working plane command cancel G90 Absolute programming (for G code system B and C) G91 Incremental programming (for G code system B and C) G94 Feed per m...

  • Page 372

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 342 - G69.1 Coordinate system rotation/3-dimensional coordinate system conversion/tilted working plane command cancel G90 Absolute programming (for G code system B and C) G91 Incremental programming (for G code system B and C) G94 Feed per minut...

  • Page 373

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 343 - Workpiece coordinate system Y Workpiece setting coordinate systemCenter of mirror Programmed pathActual path X X'Y' If an attempt is made to use workpiece setting error compensation and external mirror image (using the mirror image signa...

  • Page 374

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 344 - • Bit 0 (C08) of parameter No.3407 • Bit 6 (LVK) of parameter No.5003 - Synchronous slave axis absolute coordinates If feed axis synchronization is in effect, no slave axis absolute coordinate is displayed properly. - Workpiece coo...

  • Page 375

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 345 - Point on the programH: Tool offset number X axis geometry offset valueH: Tool offset number X axis wear offset value H: Tool offset number Z axis geometry offset value H: Tool offset number Z axis wear offset value Fig. 15.6 (a) Correspon...

  • Page 376

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 346 - Bit 3 (TAL) of parameter No. 5001 Regardless of this setting, the operation of 1, "Not generate an alarm even if two or more axes are offset", is performed. Bit 6 (EVO) of parameter No. 5001 Regardless of this setting, the oper...

  • Page 377

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 347 - • G10 data format • Example O0010; G10L200P1X_Z_R_Q_Y_; Overwrite tool wear compensation, such as tool offset. G10L1200P1X_Z_R_Q_Y_; Add tool wear compensation, such as tool offset. G10L201P1X_Z_R_Y...

  • Page 378

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 348 - G10G90L110P1R5.001 G10G90L111P1R6.001 The offset data that supports the L format is: L10 : Z axis tool offset (geometry) L11 : Z axis tool offset (wear) L12 : Tool offset (geometry) L13 : Tool offset (wear) L110 : Corner R offset (g...

  • Page 379

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 349 - When bit 3 (V15) of parameter No. 6000 is set to 1 System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #2001 to #2200 Z axis tool offset (geometry) (Old name: Tool compensation value (H code, geometry)) Note) Subscript n repre...

  • Page 380

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 350 - Note NOTE This function is an optional function.

  • Page 381

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 351 - 16 CUSTOM MACRO Although subprograms are useful for repeating the same operation, the custom macro function also allows use of variables, arithmetic and logic operations, and conditional branches for easy development of general programs such as poc...

  • Page 382

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 352 - - Range of variable values Local and common variables can have a value in the following ranges. If the result of calculation exceeds the range, an alarm PS0111 is issued. When bit 0 (F16) of parameter No.6008 = 0 Maximum value: approx. ±10308 M...

  • Page 383

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 353 - [Example] Assume that system common parameter No. 6036 is set to 20. If the setting of parameter No. 6036 is not to be reflected in the fourth path only, make the settings below. Path number No.6036 NC1 Area of the custom macro variables used 1 0 2...

  • Page 384

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 354 - (a) Quotation When an undefined variable is quoted, the address itself is also ignored. Original command G90 X100 Y#1 Equivalent command when #1 = <null> G90 X100 Equivalent command when #1 = 0 G90 X100 Y0 (b) Definition/replacement, additi...

  • Page 385

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 355 - #102=[#_ABSKP[#500*2]] ; : #506x (skip position of [#500*2]th axis) is read off and assigned to #102. If a value other than an integer is specified for subscript n, a variable value is referenced, assuming that the fractional portion is rounded o...

  • Page 386

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 356 - The names specified by the command can be used in a program. For example, when 10 is assigned to #510, the expression [#TOOL_NO]=10; can be used instead #510=10;. If the custom macro variable name expansion function is enabled, the SETVN 510[TOOL_N...

  • Page 387

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 357 - Tool compensation memory B when bit 3 (V15) of parameter No.6000 = 0 System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #2001-#2200 Tool compensation value (wear) Note) Subscript n represents a compensation number (1 to 200).#10001-#1...

  • Page 388

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 358 - System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #2601-#2800 Tool compensation value (D code, wear) (Note 1) Subscript n represents a compensation number (1 to 200). Note 1) Enabled when bit 5 (D15) of parameter No.6004 = 1. #13001-...

  • Page 389

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 359 - With tool geometry/wear compensation memory System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #2001-#2064 #10001-#10999 [#_OFSXW[n]] R/W X-axis compensation value (wear) (*1) Note) Subscript n represents a compensation number (1 to ...

  • Page 390

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 360 - - Tool compensation value when the complex machining tool offset function is enabled M When bit 3 (V15) of parameter No.6000 = 0 System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #2001-#2200 Z-axis tool offset (wear) (Old name: Too...

  • Page 391

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 361 - System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #22001-#22999 [#_CORR_W[n]] R/W Corner R offset (wear) Note) Subscript n represents a compensation number (1 to 999).#23001-#23999 [#_OFST[n]] R/W Virtual tool tip T position Note) Su...

  • Page 392

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 362 - - Time System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #3011 [#_DATE] R Year/Month/Date #3012 [#_TIME] R Hour/Minute/Second - Path number of the parameter to be read or written System variable number System variable name Attribu...

  • Page 393

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 363 - System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #4114 [#_BUFN] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last minute (sequence number) #4115 [#_BUFO] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last mi...

  • Page 394

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 364 - T System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #4001-#4030 [#_BUFG[n]] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last minute (G code) Note) Subscript n represents a G code group number. #4108 [#_BUFE] R Modal inf...

  • Page 395

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 365 - - Position information System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #5001-#5020 End point position of the previous block (workpiece coordinate system) Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 20) #100001-#100050 [#_ABS...

  • Page 396

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 366 - - Servo position deviation System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #5101-#5120 Servo positional deviation Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 20). #100251-#100300 [#_SVERR[n]] R The numbers to the left can al...

  • Page 397

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 367 - System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #100601-#100650 [#_WZG59[n]] R/W G59 workpiece origin offset value Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 50). Extended workpiece origin offset value #7001-#7020 [#_WZP1[n]...

  • Page 398

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 368 - System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #100451-#100500 [#_WZG56[n]] R/W G56 workpiece origin offset value Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 50). #100501-#100550 [#_WZG57[n]] R/W G57 workpiece origin offset ...

  • Page 399

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 369 - System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #5561-#5580 Standard fixture offset value (third set) Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 20). #117151-#117200 [#_FOFS3[n]] R/W The numbers to the left can also be used....

  • Page 400

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 370 - - Dynamic standard tool compensation value M System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #118051-#118100 [#_DOFS1[n]] R/W Dynamic standard tool compensation value (first set) Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 5...

  • Page 401

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 371 - Variable number Variable name Point Interface input signal #1001 [#_UI[1]] 1 UI001 (21) #1002 [#_UI[2]] 1 UI002 (22) #1003 [#_UI[3]] 1 UI003 (23) #1004 [#_UI[4]] 1 UI004 (24) #1005 [#_UI[5]] 1 UI005 (25) #1006 [#_UI[6]] 1 UI006 (26) #1007 [#_UI[7]]...

  • Page 402

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 372 - [Output signal] Interface output signals can be sent by assigning values to system variables #1100 to #1132 for sending interface signals. Variable number Variable name Point Interface input signal #1100 [#_UO[0]] 1 UO000 (20) #1101 [#_UO[1]] 1 UO...

  • Page 403

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 373 - When UIni = 1, Vi = 1. n = 0-3 NOTE 1 When a value other than 1.0 or 0.0 is assigned to variables #1100 to #1131, it is assumed as follows. <null> is assumed to be 0. A value other than <null> or 0 is assumed to be 1. Where, a va...

  • Page 404

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 374 - Example Structure of DI 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Used for other purposes Sign102 101 100 Structure of DO 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Not used Used for other purp...

  • Page 405

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 375 - - Tool compensation value #2001-#2800, #10001-#13999, #21001-#22999 (Attribute: R/W) M The compensation values can be obtained by reading system variables #2001 to #2800, #10001 to #13999, or #21001 to #22999 for tool compensation. The compensatio...

  • Page 406

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 376 - Geometry Wear Compensation number Variable numberVariable name Variable number Variable name 1 #11001 [#_OFSG[1]] #10001 [#_OFSW[1]] 2 #11002 [#_OFSG[2]] #10002 [#_OFSW[2]] 3 #11003 [#_OFSG[3]] #10003 [#_OFSW[3]] : : : : : 998 #11998 [#_OFSG[...

  • Page 407

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 377 - H code Geometry Wear Compensation number Variable numberVariable name Variable number Variable name : : : : : 199 #2199 [#_OFSHG[199]] or [#_OFSZG[199]] #2399 [#_OFSHW[199]] or [#_OFSZW[199]] 200 #2200 [#_OFSHG[200]] or [#_OFSZG[200]]...

  • Page 408

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 378 - H code Geometry Wear Compensation number Variable numberVariable name Variable number Variable name 998 #11998 [#_OFSHG[998]] or [#_OFSZG[998]] #10998 [#_OFSHW[998]] or [#_OFSZW[998]] 999 #11999 [#_OFSHG[999]] or [#_OFSZG[999]] #10999 [#_...

  • Page 409

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 379 - D code Geometry Wear Compensation number Variable numberVariable name Variable number Variable name 1 #12001 [#_OFSDG[1]] or [#_OFSRG[1]] #13001 [#_OFSDW[1]] or [#_OFSRW[1]] 2 #12002 [#_OFSDG[2]] or [#_OFSRG[2]] #13002 [#_OFSDW[2]] or [#_OF...

  • Page 410

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 380 - Compensation numberVariable numberVariable name Description 1 #2201 [#_OFSR[1]] 2 #2202 [#_OFSR[2]] 3 #2203 [#_OFSR[3]] : : : 63 #2263 [#_OFSR[63]] 64 #2264 [#_OFSR[64]] Tool nose radius compensation value 1 #2301 [#_OFST[1]] 2 #2302 [#_OFST[2]]...

  • Page 411

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 381 - (*1) X-axis: X-axis of basic three axes, Z-axis: Z-axis of basic three axes, Y-axis: Y-axis of basic three axes <2> With tool geometry/wear compensation memory • When the number of compensations is 64 or less Compensation numberVariable n...

  • Page 412

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 382 - Compensation numberVariable numberVariable name Description 1 #2901 [#_OFSRG[1]] 2 #2902 [#_OFSRG[2]] 3 #2903 [#_OFSRG[3]] : : : 63 #2963 [#_OFSRG[63]] 64 #2964 [#_OFSRG[64]] Tool nose radius compensation value (geometry) 1 #19001 [#_OFSYG[1]] 2...

  • Page 413

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 383 - Compensation numberVariable numberVariable name Description 1 #2901 [#_OFSRG[1]] 2 #2902 [#_OFSRG[2]] 3 #2903 [#_OFSRG[3]] : : : 63 #2963 [#_OFSRG[63]] 64 #2964 [#_OFSRG[64]] X-axis compensation value (geometry) (*1) 1 #19001 [#_OFSYG[1]] 2 #190...

  • Page 414

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 384 - Type Variable number Variable nameUnit At power-on Count condition Clock 1 #3001 [#_CLOCK1] 1 ms Reset to 0 Anytime Clock 2 #3002 [#_CLOCK2] 1 hourSame as at power-downWhen the STL signal is on The clock accuracy is 16 ms. Clock 1 returns to 0 afte...

  • Page 415

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 385 - NOTE #3003 is cleared by a reset. - Enabling of feed hold, feedrate override, and exact stop check #3004 (Attribute: R/W) Assigning the following values in system variable #3004 allows the specification of whether feed hold and feedrate override...

  • Page 416

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 386 - #3005 #15 #14 #13 #12 #11 #10 #9 #8 Setting FCV #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Setting SEQ INI ISO TVC #9 (FCV) : Whether to use the FANUC Series 15 program format conversion capability #5 (SEQ) : Whether to automatically insert sequence numb...

  • Page 417

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 387 - [Example] May 20, 2004, PM 04:17:05 #3011 = 20040520 #3012 = 161705 - Path number of the parameter to be read or written #3018 (Attribute: R/W) If a parameter for another path is to be read or written using parameter reading with the operation...

  • Page 418

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 388 - - Main program number #4000 (Attribute: R) System variable #4000 can be used to read the main program number regardless of the level of a subprogram. Variable number Variable name Description #4000 [#_MAINO] Main program number NOTE 1 The main ...

  • Page 419

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 389 - Category Variable number Variable name Description <1> <2> <3> #4111 #4311 #4511 [#_BUFH] [#_ACTH] [#_INTH] Modal information (H code) <1> <2> <3> #4113 #4313 #4513 [#_BUFM] [#_ACTM] [#_INTM] Mo...

  • Page 420

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 390 - Category Variable number Variable name Description <1> <2> <3> #4120 #4320 #4520 [#_BUFT] [#_ACTT] [#_INTT] Modal information (T code) <1> <2> <3> #4130 #4330 #4530 [#_BUFWZP] [#_ACTWZP] [#_INTW...

  • Page 421

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 391 - - Position information #5001-#5080, #100001-#100200 (Attribute: R) The end position of the previous block, the specified current position (for the machine coordinate system and workpiece coordinate system), and the skip signal position can be obta...

  • Page 422

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 392 - - Tool length compensation value #5081-#5100, #100201-#100250 (Attribute: R) M Tool length compensation in the block currently being executed can be obtained for each axis by reading system variables #5081 to #5100 or #100201 to #100250. Variable ...

  • Page 423

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 393 - <2> With tool geometry/wear compensation memory Variable number Variable name Position information Read operation during movement #5081 #5082 #5083 #5084 : #5100 [#_TOFSWX] [#_TOFSWZ] [#_TOFSWY] [#_TOFS[4]] : [#_TOFS[20]] X-axis tool off...

  • Page 424

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 394 - - Servo position deviation #5101-#5120, #100251-#100300 (Attribute: R) The servo position deviation for each axis can be obtained by reading system variables #5101 to #5120 or #100251 to #100300. Variable number Variable name Position information ...

  • Page 425

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 395 - Variable number Variable name Position information Read operation during movement #5181 #5182 : #5200 [#_DIST[1]] [#_DIST[2]] : [#_DIST[20]] 1st axis distance to go value 2nd axis distance to go value : 20th axis distance to go value #100801 #1...

  • Page 426

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 396 - Variable number Variable name Controlled axis Workpiece coordinate system#5241 #5242 : #5260 [#_WZG55[1]] [#_WZG55[2]] : [#_WZG55[20]] 1st axis workpiece origin offset value 2nd axis workpiece origin offset value : 20th axis workpiece origin offset...

  • Page 427

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 397 - Axis Function Variable number 1st axis External workpiece origin offset value #2500 G54 workpiece origin offset value #2501 G55 workpiece origin offset value #2502 G56 workpiece origin offset value #2503 G57 workpiece origin offset value ...

  • Page 428

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 398 - Axis Function Variable number External workpiece origin offset value #2850 G54 workpiece origin offset value #2851 G55 workpiece origin offset value #2852 G56 workpiece origin offset value #2853 G57 workpiece origin offset value #2854 G58 work...

  • Page 429

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 399 - Variable number Variable name Controlled axis Additional workpiece system number #7941 #7942 : #7960 [#_WZP48[1]] [#_WZP48[2]] : [#_WZP48[20]] 1st axis workpiece origin offset value 2nd axis workpiece origin offset value : 20th axis workpiece...

  • Page 430

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 400 - System variable number = 101000 + (Coordinate system number -1) × 50 + Axis number Coordinate number: 1 to 300 Axis number: 1 to 50 M NOTE 1 When variables exceeding the number of control axes are specified, the alarm PS0115, “VARIABLE NO. OUT...

  • Page 431

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 401 - - Reference fixture offset number being selected #5500 (Attribute: R) M The reference fixture offset number being selected can be read by reading system variables #5500. Variable number Variable name Description #5500 [#_FOFSP] Reference fixture o...

  • Page 432

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 402 - Variable number Variable name Controlled axis Fixture offset number #117101 #117102 : #117150 [#_FOFS2[1]] [#_FOFS2[2]] : [#_FOFS2[50]] 1st axis reference fixture offset value being selected 2nd axis reference fixture offset value being selec...

  • Page 433

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 403 - - Dynamic reference tool compensation value #118051-#118450 (Attribute: R/W) M The dynamic reference tool compensation value in the rotary head dynamic tool compensation function can be obtained by reading system variables #118051 to #118450. The ...

  • Page 434

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 404 - 4 : Rigid tapping 5 : Cs contour control Variable number Variable name Description #100951 #100952 #100953 #100954 [#_SPSTAT[1]] [#_SPSTAT[2]] [#_SPSTAT[3]] [#_SPSTAT[4]] State of the first spindle on the path State of the second spindle...

  • Page 435

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 405 - xxxxxxx: Variable number Common variable (#100 to #499(Note), #500 to #999(Note)) or system variable number (1000 and above, 10000 and above, 100000 and above) NOTE Available common variables and system variables differ depending on the system c...

  • Page 436

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 406 - - Interface signals System variable numberAttribute Description #1000 to #1035 R Interface input signals #1100 to #1135 R/W Interface output signals - Tool compensation value System variable numberAttribute Description #2001 to #2964 #10001 ...

  • Page 437

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 407 - - Position information System variable numberAttribute Description #5001 to #5020 #100001 to #100050 R End point position of the block (workpiece coordinate system) #5021 to #5040 #100051 to #100100 R Current position (machine coordinate syste...

  • Page 438

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 408 - T System variable numberAttribute Description #5201 to #5340 #100301 to #100650 R/W Workpiece origin offset value Extended workpiece origin offset value #7001 to #7960 #101001 to #116000 R/W Workpiece origin offset value - Skip position (det...

  • Page 439

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 409 - Type of operation Operation Description <4> Functions #i=SIN[#j] #i=COS[#j] #i=TAN[#j] #i=ASIN[#j] #i=ACOS[#j] #i=ATAN[#j] #i=ATAN[#j]/[#k] #i=ATAN[#j,#k] #i=SQRT[#j] #i=ABS[#j] #i=BIN[#j] #i=BCD[#j] #i=ROUND[#j] #i=FIX[#j] #i=FUP[#j] #i=LN[#...

  • Page 440

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 410 - When the bit 0 (NAT) of parameter No. 6004 is set to 1: -180° to 180° Example: When #1 = ATAN[-1]/[-1]; is specified, #1 is -135.0. - ARCTAN #i = ATAN[#j]; (one argument) • When ATAN is specified with one argument, this function returns the ...

  • Page 441

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 411 - NOTE For compatibility among programs, it is recommended that the ADP function be not used, and decimal points be added in the argument specification for a macro call. - Rounding up and down to an integer (FUP and FIX) With CNC, when the absolu...

  • Page 442

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 412 - b) Specifying a path number using a system variable By specifying a path number using system variable #3018, it is possible to read a parameter for the specified path. Example Reading the fourth axis of parameter No. 01322 for the second path #3...

  • Page 443

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 413 - For example, assume that #1 and #2 have the following true values in the process of operation. (The following values are examples in the process of operation and cannot actually be specified from any program.) #1=9876543210.987654321 #2=98765...

  • Page 444

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 414 - Table 16.4 (b) Errors involved in operations Operation Average error Maximum error Type of error a = b*c 1.55×10-10 4.66×10-10 a = b / c 4.66×10-10 1.88×10-9 a = b 1.24×10-9 3.73×10-9 Relative error(*1) a = b + c a = b – c 2.33×10-10 5....

  • Page 445

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 415 - - Brackets Brackets ([ ]) are used to enclose an expression. Note that parentheses ( ) are used for comments. - Divisor When a divisor of zero is specified in a division, an alarm PS0112 occurs.

  • Page 446

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 416 - 16.5 INDIRECT AXIS ADDRESS SPECIFICATION Overview When the custom macro function is enabled, you can use AX[(axis-number)] in an axis address specification to indirectly specify an axis with its axis number and not to directly specify it with its a...

  • Page 447

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 417 - When the number of controlled axes is 3, the name of the first axis is X, that of the second axis is Y, and that of the third axis is Z 1. #500=AXNUM[X]; A value of 1 is stored in #500. 2. #501=AXNUM[Y]; A value of 2 is stored in #501. 3. #502=...

  • Page 448

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 418 - #2=12 ; Parameter number setting #3=0 ; Bit number setting #4=3 ; Axis number setting If reading data with all bits #1=PRM[#2]/[#4] ; #1=10010001 If reading data with a specified bit #1=PRM[#2, #3]/[#4] ; #1=1 2. Reading the value of the fourth ax...

  • Page 449

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 419 - 16.8 BRANCH AND REPETITION In a program, the flow of control can be changed using the GOTO statement and IF statement. Three types of branch and repetition operations are used: Branch and repetition GOTO (unconditional branch) IF (condition...

  • Page 450

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 420 - A branch to N10 before the GOTO statement occurs. A branch to N10 after the GOTO statement occurs. WARNING Do not specify multiple blocks with the same sequence number in a single program. It is very dangerous to specify the sequence number of th...

  • Page 451

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 421 - If the value of variable #1 is greater than 10, a branch to sequence number N2 occurs. If the condition isnot satisfied IF [#1 GT 10] GOTO 2 ;N2 G00 G91 X10.0 ;: ProcessingIf the condition is satisfied IF[<conditional expression>]THEN If...

  • Page 452

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 422 - 16.8.4 Repetition (WHILE Statement) Specify a conditional expression after WHILE. While the specified condition is satisfied, the program from DO to END is executed. If the specified condition is not satisfied, program execution proceeds to the bl...

  • Page 453

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 423 - Limitation - Infinite loops When DO m is specified without specifying the WHILE statement, an infinite loop ranging from DO to END is produced. - Processing time When a branch to the sequence number specified in a GOTO statement occurs, the se...

  • Page 454

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 424 - • With a macro call, an argument (data passed to a macro) can be specified. A subprogram call does not have this capability. • If a macro call block contains another NC command (such as G01 X100.0 G65 Pp), an alarm PS0127 occurs. • If a subpr...

  • Page 455

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 425 - 16.9.1 Simple Call (G65) When G65 is specified, the custom macro specified at address P is called. Data (argument) can be passed to the custom macro program. P : Number of the program to calll : Repetition count (1 by default)Argument : Data pas...

  • Page 456

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 426 - • Argument specification II Argument specification II uses A, B, and C once each and uses I, J, and K up to ten times. Argument specification II is used to pass values such as 3-dimensional coordinates as arguments. AddressVariablenumberABCI1J1...

  • Page 457

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 427 - - Extended axis name The axis address of an extended axis name cannot be specified as an argument. If an attempt is made to specify it, alarm PS0129 is issued. M When a value is specified with no decimal point, the number of decimal places is de...

  • Page 458

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 428 - NOTE 1 When V is used in a call using a specific code, the number of decimal places is determined according to the setting for the reference axis. 2 α is determined according to the increment system for the reference axis (axis specified with para...

  • Page 459

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 429 - NOTE 1 α is determined according to the increment system for the reference axis (axis specified with parameter No. 1031) as listed in the table in NOTE 2. 2 β is determined according to the increment system for the corresponding axis address ...

  • Page 460

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 430 - • When M99 is executed in a macro program, control returns to the calling program. At that time, the local variable level is decremented by one; the values of the local variables saved when the macro was called are restored. Macro (level 4) O000...

  • Page 461

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 431 - I : Radius of the circle........................................................................................................................... (#4) A : Drilling start angle ........................................................................

  • Page 462

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 432 - - Calling format G65 P9100 Kk Ff ; Z : Hole depth (absolute programming) W : Hole depth (incremental programming) K : Cutting amount per cycle F : Cutting feedrate - Program calling a macro program O0002; G50 X100.0 Z200.0 ; G00 X0 ...

  • Page 463

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 433 - Explanation - Call • After G66, specify at address P a program number subject to a modal call. • When a number of repetitions is required, a number from 1 to 999999999 can be specified at address L. • As with a simple call (G65), data passe...

  • Page 464

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 434 - Sample program M The same operation as the drilling canned cycle G81 is created using a custom macro and the machining program makes a modal macro call. For program simplicity, all drilling data is specified using absolute values. Operation 1Opera...

  • Page 465

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 435 - Sample program T This program makes a groove at a specified position. U - Calling format G66 P9110 Uu Ff U : Groove depth (incremental programming) F : Cutting feed of grooving - Program that calls a macro program O0003 ; G50 X100.0 Z200.0 ;...

  • Page 466

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 436 - G66.1 P p L l <argument-specification> ; P : Number of the program to call l : Repetition count (1 by default) Argument : Data passed to the macro O0001 ; : G66.1 P9100 L2 A1.0 B2.0 ; A10.0 B20.0 F300 ; A0 B-30.0 ; F1000 ; G67 ; :...

  • Page 467

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 437 - Execution order of the above program (blocks not containing the move command omitted) Calling program N1 N2 N3 N4 N5N6O1000 Called programs O2000 In N1 and N2 blocks, O1000 is called and the X and Y specifications are ...

  • Page 468

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 438 - Explanation By setting a G code number from -9999 to 9999 used to call a custom macro program (O9010 to O9019) in the corresponding parameters Nos.6050 to 6059, the macro program can be called in the same way as with G65. To call custom macro progr...

  • Page 469

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 439 - 16.9.5 Macro Call Using a G Code (Specification of Multiple Definitions) By setting the starting G code number used to call a macro program, the number of the starting program to be called, and the number of definitions, macro calls using multiple...

  • Page 470

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 440 - The number of repetitions and argument specification are set in the same way as with a macro call using a G code. [Example] Set parameter No. 6041 to 900, parameter No. 6042 to 2000, and parameter No. 6043 to 100. G90.0 → O2000 G90.1 → O2001 G9...

  • Page 471

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 441 - Example) When parameter No. 6080 is set to 990, O9020 is called using M990. - Repetition As with a simple call, a number of repetitions from 1 to 99999999 can be specified at address L. - Argument specification As with a simple call, two type...

  • Page 472

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 442 - 16.9.8 Macro Call Using an M Code (Specification of Multiple Definitions) By setting the starting M code number used to call a macro program, the number of the starting program to be called, and the number of definitions, macro calls using multiple...

  • Page 473

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 443 - - Correspondence between parameter numbers and program numbers Parameter number Program number 6071 6072 6073 6074 6075 6076 6077 6078 6079 O9001 O9002 O9003 O9004 O9005 O9006 O9007 O9008 O9009 - Repetition As with a simple call, a number of r...

  • Page 474

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 444 - NOTE 1 The calls defined by this setting become all invalid in the following cases: <1> A value outside the valid data range is set in one of the above parameters. <2> (No. 6045 + No. 6046 - 1) > 99999999 2 If the M code set in par...

  • Page 475

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 445 - Explanation - Call By setting bit 1 (SCS) of parameter No. 6007 to 1, subprogram O9029 can be called each time a S code is specified in a machining program. An S code specified in a machining program is assigned to common variable #147. - Repet...

  • Page 476

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 446 - 16.9.14 Subprogram Call Using a Specific Address By enabling subprograms to be called with a specific address in a parameter, a subprogram can be called each time the specific address is specified in the machining program. O0001 ; : B100. ; ...

  • Page 477

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 447 - - Correspondence between parameter numbers and program numbers and between the parameter numbers and common variables Parameter number Program number Common variable 6090 6091 O9004 O9005 #146 #147 - Repetition As with a simple call, a number o...

  • Page 478

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 448 - - Program that calls a macro program O0001; T01 M06; M03; : M05;.................... Changes #501. T02 M06; M03; : M05;.................... Changes #502. T03 M06; M03; : M05;.................... Changes #503. T04 M06; M03; : ...

  • Page 479

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 449 - 16.10 PROCESSING MACRO STATEMENTS For smooth machining, the CNC prereads the NC statement to be performed next. This operation is referred to as buffering. For example, in prereading due to AI contour control, up to 1000 blocks of NC statements ar...

  • Page 480

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 450 - N1 G01 G05.1Q1 X100.0 F100 ;Block being executed NC statement execution Macro statement execution N1N2 #1=100 ; N3 #2=200 ; N4 Y100.0 ; : N n Y150.0 ; N n+1 #3=300 ; N n+2 X200.0 ; : N n+1N4 N n+2N n Time N2N3N4 Block read into the buf...

  • Page 481

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 451 - - When the next block is not buffered (M codes that are not buffered, G31, etc.) N1 G31 X100.0 ; N2 #1=100 ; : Block being executed NC statement executionMacro statement executionBuffer N1N2Time CAUTION In case that you need to execute the...

  • Page 482

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 452 - Meaning Code Meaning Code [ Code set in parameter No. 6013 _ Code set in parameter No. 6018 ] Code set in parameter No. 6014 For O, the same code as for O indicating a program number is used. Set a hole pattern for each of *, =, #, [, ], ?, @, &...

  • Page 483

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 453 - Specifiable characters are as follows: • Letters (A to Z) • Numbers • Special characters (*, /, +, -, ?, @, &, _) NOTE 1 An asterisk (*) is output by a space code. 2 When using ?, @, &, and/or _, use the ISO code as the punch code...

  • Page 484

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 454 - Example DPRNT [ X#2 [53] Y#5 [53] T#30 [20] ] Variable value #2=128.47398 #5=-91.2 #30=123.456 are output as follows: (1) Parameter PRT (No.6001#1) = 0 X sp sp sp 128.474 Y- sp sp sp 91.200 T sp 023 LF D8 ...

  • Page 485

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 455 - NOTE If bit 3 (OFN) of parameter No. 6019 is 0, and any of PRNT0000.DAT to PRNT9999.DAT are not deleted from the external device, the following alarms are issued depending on the connected external device if the same file name exists the next ti...

  • Page 486

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 456 - - Operation in EDIT mode By setting bit 0 (NE8) of parameter No.3202 and bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No.3202 to 1, deletion and editing are disabled for custom macro programs and subprograms with program numbers 8000 to 8999 and 9000 to 9999. This pr...

  • Page 487

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 457 - Listed above are examples like adaptive control applications of the interruption type custom macro function. Interrupt signal(UINT) **Interrupt signal(UINT) *Interrupt signal(UINT) *M96 Pxxxxxxxx;Nxxxxxxxx ;M97 ;M99 (Pxxxxxxxx) ;O xxxxxxxx; Fig 1...

  • Page 488

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 458 - Interrupt signal (UINT) Effective interrupt input signal When UINT is kept on 10M96M97M96 The interrupt signal (UINT) becomes valid after M96 is specified. Even when the signal is input in M97 mode, it is ignored. When the signal input in M97 mod...

  • Page 489

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 459 - Set the M code to enable custom macro interrupts in parameters Nos.6033, and set the M code to disable custom macro interrupts in parameter 6034. When specifying that parameter-set M codes are not used, M96 and M97 are used as the custom macro con...

  • Page 490

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 460 - When an interrupt signal (UINT) is input, macro statements in the interrupt program are executed immediately unless an NC statement is encountered in the interrupt program. NC statements are not executed until the current block is completed. (ii) ...

  • Page 491

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 461 - T NOTE During execution of a program for cycle operations, interrupt type II is performed regardless of whether bit 2 (MIN) of parameter No. 6003 is set to 0 or 1. Cycle operations are available for the following functions: <1> Automatic re...

  • Page 492

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 462 - Interrupt signal (UINT)10Status-triggered schemeEdge-triggered schemeInterruptexecutionInterruptexecutionInterruptexecutionInterruptexecutionInterrupt execution Fig. 16.15 (d) Custom macro interrupt signal - Return from a custom macro interrupt T...

  • Page 493

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 463 - ΔΔΔΔ M96 Pxxxxxxxx ; xxxxxxxx ; Interrupt signal (UINT) Modify modal information (Without P specification)Modal information remains unchanged before and after the interrupt. M99 (Pxxxxxxxx) ; (With P specification) The new modal information m...

  • Page 494

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 464 - T System variable Modal information which was valid when a custom macro interrupt was generated#4401 : #4421 #4508 #4509 #4513 #4514 #4515 #4519 #4520 #4530 G code (group 01) : G code (group 21) E code F code M code Sequence number Program number...

  • Page 495

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 465 - M NOTE 1 Alarm PS1101 occurs in the following cases: <1> An interrupt is generated in the programmable mirror image (G51.1) mode and another G51.1 is specified in the interrupt program. <2> An interrupt is generated in the coordinate s...

  • Page 496

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 466 - 17 REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO Chapter 17, "REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO", consists of the following sections: 17.1 TYPES OF REAL TIME MACRO COMMANDS ..........................................................................468 17.2 VARIA...

  • Page 497

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 467 - → Real time macro command 3 The operation above is programmed using real time macro commands. Program O0001 ; G92 X0 ; //1 ZEDGE [#100101 GE 30. ] #IOG[99,5] = 1 ; //2 ZEDGE [#100101 GE 50.] ZDO ; G91 G00 Y100 ; ZEND ; //3 ZEDGE [#100...

  • Page 498

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 468 - Example // ZDO ; G90 G00 X100 ; ZEND ; (ZDO and ZEND are reserved words required for the axis control command of an RTM statement, and are detailed later.) The macro command of an RTM statement is a macro statement used with an RTM st...

  • Page 499

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 469 - - Start of a real time macro command An RTM command starts when the execution of the first following NC command starts. Example: When NC command (1) starts execution in the program below, macro commands (2) and (4) are executed in suc...

  • Page 500

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 470 - NOTE 2 If an RTM command is specified using, as a trigger, a block such as a block specifying NURBS interpolation or a T series multiple repetitive canned cycle that does not necessarily pass the start point or end point of the command, o...

  • Page 501

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 471 - #RV[0]=2 #RV[0]=3 So, the value of #RV[0] is 3. Example 2) Priority of modal RTM commands and a one-shot RTM command O0001 ; //3 #RV[0]=3 ; //1 #RV[0]=1 ; // #RV[0]=10 ; //5 #RV[0]=5 ; M02 ; When the program above is executed...

  • Page 502

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 472 - //1 ZEDGE [ #IOG[234.0] EQ 1 ] #RV[0]=1 ; //2 ZDO ; #RV[1]=1 ; #RV[2]=1 ; ZEND ; G04 P10 ; M30 ; - Number of real time macro commands A program can have multiple RTM commands coded. Up to six one-shot RTM commands can be specifie...

  • Page 503

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 473 - NOTE 5 When a function for reading multiple blocks in advance is used, up to three blocks among the blocks read in advance can trigger an RTM command. For example, if the blocks up to the block of (2) are read in advance during execution ...

  • Page 504

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 474 - The variables (system variables and RTM variables) dedicated to real time custom macros are the variables specific to the real time custom macro function. Those variables cannot be used with the custom macro function. NOTE Real time cus...

  • Page 505

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 475 - For the valid signal address range, see the specifications of the PMC as well. When writing to a signal, make the variable unprotected on the PMC signal protection screen (described later) beforehand. Specify an address by using m and ...

  • Page 506

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 476 - - Input/output A value set for PMC signal protection can be input/output. - Input/output format After punching PMC signal protection, one file(DIDOENBL.TXT) is created. Please execute input/output operation in EDIT mode. The output for...

  • Page 507

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 477 - Format #RV [ m ] Volatile RTM variable m: Volatile RTM variable number (0 to 99) #RVS [ n ] Nonvolatile RTM variable n: Nonvolatile RTM variable number (0 to 31) NOTE 1 RTM variables can be used with an RTM statement only. RTM variabl...

  • Page 508

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 478 - 17.2.2.1 System variables With real time custom macros, position-related information among the system variables of the custom macros can be handled. - Position information #100001 to #100182 (Attribute: Read only) Block end position #1...

  • Page 509

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 479 - NOTE The value of a variable with a number greater than the number of controlled axes is undefined. - Remaining travel distance #100801 to #100832 (Attribute: Read only) By reading the values of system variables #100801 to #100832, the...

  • Page 510

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 480 - Type of operation Operation Description (4) Function #i=SIN[#j] #i=COS[#j] #i=TAN[#j] #i=ASIN[#j] #i=ACOS[#j] #i=ATAN[#j] #i=ATAN[#j]/[#k] #i=ATAN[#j,#k] #i=SQRT[#j] #i=ABS[#j] #i=BIN[#j] #i=BCD[#j] #i=ROUND[#j] #i=FIX[#j] #i=FUP[#j] #i=L...

  • Page 511

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 481 - The timing chart of an RTM command using these reserved words is indicated below. (Multi-statement control ZDO...ZEND is excluded.) When the condition of a each reserved word is True, it shows ‘*’. When condition A makes transitions...

  • Page 512

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 482 - : ZEND ; If the workpiece coordinate on the second axis is equal to or less than 10, the rapid traverse override value is changed. // ZONCE [#100102 LE 10.] ZDO ; #IOG[14,0]=0 ; #IOG[14,1]=1 ; ZEND ; However, if <conditional-expre...

  • Page 513

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 483 - If <conditional-expression-1> specifies an axis control command, be sure to use ZDO...ZEND even when a single statement is used. Code the following by using ZDO...ZEND of multi-statement structure: // ZEDGE [<conditional-expressi...

  • Page 514

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 484 - The same <conditional-expression> and operators as for the ZONCE statement are used. While the F address 234.1 signal is 1, an incremental movement on the U-axis is repeatedly performed, and #RV[0] is incremented by 1 each time. //...

  • Page 515

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 485 - Processing 1. ZONCE, ZEDGE, ZWHILE, and ZDO...ZEND may be used any number times. // ZWHILE […] ZDO ; ZEND ; : Processing // ZONCE[…] ZDO ; ZEND ; : 2. One ZDO...ZEND range must not overlap another ZDO...ZEND range.Processing // ZONC...

  • Page 516

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 486 - O0001 ; G90 G00 X100 Z100; //1 ZWHILE[1] ZDO ; ZEDGE [#IOX[5,2] EQ 1 ] ZDO ; G91 G00 A20. ; ZEND ; ZEND ; //2 ZWHILE[1] ZDO ; ZEDGE [ #100101 LE 50.0 ] #IOY[2,3] = 1 ; ZEND ; #100=100 ; WHILE [ #100 GT 0 ]) DO1 G91 G01 Z-#100 F200. ;...

  • Page 517

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 487 - NOTE 4 On the other hand, a real time macro program called by real time macro calling makes a single block stop. - Call destination real time program In a called real time macro program, only an RTM statement can be coded. In a called ...

  • Page 518

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 488 - G91 G00 X30 ; (1) Axis control command of the RTM statement #RV[0] = 1 ; (2) Macro command of the RTM statement ZEND ; If an RTM command is executed in a custom macro WHILE DO to END loop, and the same RTM is looked ahead while the RTM ...

  • Page 519

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 489 - NOTE An axis for which bit 0 (XRT) of parameter No. 8011 is set to 1 is dedicated to real time custom macros, so that such an axis cannot be used with PMC axis control. - Relationship with PMC axis control Axis control based on an RTM ...

  • Page 520

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 490 - CAUTION With the G codes (inch input/metric input) of group 06, the same information as the modal information of an NC statement is used in an RTM statement. Do not change the modal information of group 06 with an NC statement in a bloc...

  • Page 521

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 491 - If an RTM command consists of multiple statements and an axis control command is coded in multiple blocks, only the block of the RTM statement that is currently executing an axis command can be brought to a single block stop by setting th...

  • Page 522

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 492 - Bit 0 (MLE) of parameter No. 8001 Bit 1 (MLS) of parameter No. 8006 - Dry run With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, whether to use the dry run signal (DRN) for an NC statement or the dry run signal (EDRN) for a PMC axis can be chose...

  • Page 523

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 493 - NOTE 3 An alarm is issued if, during execution of an RTM statement, an attempt is made to execute another RTM statement with the same ID. In the program below, for example, the RTM statement of (1) operates using the NC statement of (2) a...

  • Page 524

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 494 - NOTE Even if bit 4 (RF0) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 1, rapid traverse does not stop with a cutting feed override of 0%. - Feed with a specified feedrate (feed per minute) A movement is made at a feedrate specified in F on an axis ...

  • Page 525

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 495 - • Feedrate override With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, whether to use the feedrate override signal (*FV) for an NC statement or the feedrate override signal (*EFOV) dedicated to PMC axis control can be chosen. NOTE 1 The second f...

  • Page 526

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 496 - NOTE 1 Only one axis can be specified in one block. 2 The absolute command (G90) cannot be specified. 3 The block overlap function cannot be used. 4 Be sure to set the parameters below to 0. If a value other than 0 is set, the feedrate sp...

  • Page 527

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 497 - • Acceleration/deceleration time constant For an acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used for feed with a specified feedrate in an RTM statement when exponential acceleration/deceleration is used, whether to use the time cons...

  • Page 528

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 498 - Format // ZDO ; G90 G53 IP _ ; ZEND ; G90 : G code for absolute command IP _ : Position in machine coordinate system NOTE 1 Only one axis can be specified in one block. 2 The incremental command (G91) cannot be specified. 3 When usin...

  • Page 529

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 499 - - Axis removal Even when axes are removed, interlock is not applied to the axis being controlled by an RTM statement. - Stroke limit check before movement No stroke limit check before movement is made with a block in an RTM statement....

  • Page 530

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 500 - - Interrupt-type custom macro In an interrupt-type custom macro, no RTM command can be coded. - Macro executor In a macro executor, no RTM command can be coded. Moreover, no macro executor can be coded from an RTM command. In a series ...

  • Page 531

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 501 - Event NC command RTM command consisting of a macro command RTM command including an axis control command Single block (SBK signal) Operation stops when the command being executed ends. The RTM command is suspended when the NC command stop...

  • Page 532

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 502 - 18. PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) 18 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) Overview The values of parameters and pitch error compensation data can be entered in a program. This function is used for setting pitch error compensation data when attachments are chan...

  • Page 533

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 503 - 18.PROGRAMMABLEPARAMETER INPUT (G10)Nppxxxxxxx : Add a path number to the high-order 8th and 9th digits of a parameter number. For pp, set a path number, and for xxxxxxx, set a parameter number. If a path number is omitted or if 0 is set, writing to a parameter f...

  • Page 534

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 504 - 18. PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) - Writing to a parameter for another path Programmable parameter input (G10L52) enables writing to a parameter for another path by specifying that path number in either of the following ways: • Adding a path number to a p...

  • Page 535

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 505 - 18.PROGRAMMABLEPARAMETER INPUT (G10)3. Change the values for the Z-axis (3rd axis) and A-axis (4th axis) in axis type parameter No. 1322 (the coordinates of stored stroke limit 2 in the positive direction for each axis). (When the increment systems for the 3rd a...

  • Page 536

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 506 - 19 PATTERN DATA INPUT Chapter 19, "PATTERN DATA INPUT", consists of the following sections: 19.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................

  • Page 537

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 507 - (1) Pattern menu screen Fig. 19.2 (a) Pattern data menu screen (10.4-inch) Fig. 19.2 (b) Pattern data menu screen (15-inch)

  • Page 538

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 508 - (2) Custom macro screen The name of variable and comment can be displayed on the usual custom macro screen. The menu title and pattern name on the pattern menu screen and the variable name on the custom macro screen can be defined The posi...

  • Page 539

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 509 - Fig. 19.2 (e) Custom macro screen (15-inch)

  • Page 540

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 510 - 19.3 EXPLANATION OF OPERATION The following explains how to display the pattern menu screen. For 7.2-, 8.4-, and 10.4-inch LCDs 1 Press function key . 2 Press continuous menu key . 3 Press soft key [PATTERN MENU]. For a 15-inch LCD 1 Press ...

  • Page 541

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 511 - Fig. 19.3 (b) Pattern menu screen (15-inch) Select the pattern on this screen The following two methods are effective. • Selection by cursor Move the cursor to the pattern name with the cursor move keys , and press the soft key [SELECT]...

  • Page 542

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 512 - Custom macro variable screen The custom macro screen as Fig. 19.3 (c) or Fig. 19.3 (d) is displayed. Fig. 19.3 (c) Custom macro screen when the pattern data is input (10.4-inch) Fig. 19.3 (d) Custom macro screen when the pattern data is in...

  • Page 543

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 513 - NOTE 3 When bit 0 (POC) of parameter No.11318 is set to “1”, The variable number is three digit display. And the value of 12 digits or more is input, 11 digits from head of value are displayed. Example) Input: -123456789.123 → Displ...

  • Page 544

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 514 - 19.4 DEFINITION OF THE SCREEN The definition of the screen is performed by NC program. Program configuration This function is consist of one program for the definition of pattern menu screen and maximum ten programs for the definition of cus...

  • Page 545

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 515 - 19.4.1 Definition of the Pattern Menu Screen Menu title and pattern name are defined as follows. Menu title Pattern name Fig. 19.4.1 (a) Pattern menu screen Definition of menu title The character string displayed in the menu title o...

  • Page 546

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 516 - - Format G65 H91 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ; H91 : Specifies the pattern name P_ : Specifies the menu number of the pattern name The menu number = 1 to 10 Q_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of pattern name R_ : The code of 3rd and 4th charact...

  • Page 547

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 517 - 19.4.2 Definition of the Custom Macro Screen The title, variable name and comment are defined as follows. Macro variable nameTitle Comment Fig. 19.4.2 (a) Custom macro screen Definition of title The character string displayed in the t...

  • Page 548

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 518 - - Format G65 H93 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ; H93 : Specifies the variable name P_ : Specifies the variable number Specifies 100 to 199 or 500 to 999 Q_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of the variable name R_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characte...

  • Page 549

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 519 - Example The following is example of the custom macro screen. Fig. 19.4.2 (c) Custom macro screen (bit 0 (POC) of parameter No. 11318=0) Fig. 19.4.2 (d) Custom macro screen (bit 0 (POC) of parameter No. 11318=1) O9501; N1 G65 H92 P066079 Q...

  • Page 550

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 520 - 19.4.3 Setting the Character-codes The character cannot be used to specify the NC program. Therefore, the code corresponding to the character is specified. One character is consist of three figures in a half size letter and six figures in a ...

  • Page 551

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 521 - Character Code Comment Character Code Comment Z 090 [ 091 Left square bracket 0 048 ¥ 092 Yen sign 1 049 ] 093 Right square bracket 2 050 ^ 094 3 051 _ 095 Underscore 4 052 5 053 The characters and the codes of the katakana is...

  • Page 552

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 522 - さ ざ し じ す ず せ ぜ そ ぞ 002 040 002 042 002 044 002 046002 048002 050002 052002 054 002 056 002 058た だ ち ぢ っ つ づ て で と 002 060 002 062 002 064 002 066002 068002 070002 072002 074 002 076 002 078ど な に ...

  • Page 553

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 523 - 格 子 周 心 本 群 停 止 巾 微 004 040 004 042 004 044 004 046004 048004 050004 052004 054 004 056 004 058状 路 範 囲 倍 率 注 側 特 殊 004 060 004 062 004 064 004 066004 068004 070004 072004 074 004 076 004 078距 離 連 ...

  • Page 554

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 524 - 添 頭 同 導 道 熱 年 濃 箱 発 006 040 006 042 006 044 006 046006 048006 050006 052006 054 006 056 006 058抜 伴 必 百 複 物 文 聞 併 忘 006 060 006 062 006 064 006 066006 068006 070006 072006 074 006 076 006 078末 密 有 ...

  • Page 555

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 525 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS20 HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Chapter 20, "HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections: 20.1 AI CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION I AND AI CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION II (G05.1) ..................................

  • Page 556

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 526 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS G05 P10000 [R_] ; AI contour control mode on : G05 P0 ; AI contour control mode off R : Machining condition selecting level (1 to 10) NOTE 1 Always specify G05.1, G08, and G05 in an independent block. (Do not specify other G ...

  • Page 557

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 527 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS - Setting an acceleration A permissible acceleration for the linear acceleration/deceleration of each axis is set in parameter No.1660. For bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration, acceleration change time (B) (period of transition fr...

  • Page 558

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 528 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Speed control by look-aheadacceleration/deceleration beforeProgrammed speedN2N1FeedrateTimeN4N3N5 - Deceleration Deceleration starts in advance so that the feedrate programmed for a block is attained at the beginning of the bloc...

  • Page 559

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 529 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSLinear acceleration/deceleration not achieving specified acceleration/deceleration Specified feedrateT1Feedrate T1 T2 Time T1 : Time obtained from specified feedrate and specified acceleration (specified feedrate/acceleration (parame...

  • Page 560

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 530 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Specified tool pathTool path assumed whenAl contour control is notusedTool path assumed when Alcontour control is usedThe machining error is decreasedbecause of the deceleration withthe acceleration.The machining error is decrease...

  • Page 561

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 531 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS - Speed control based on the feedrate difference on each axis at a corner By using the speed control based on the feedrate difference on each axis at a corner, if a feedrate change occurs on an axis on each axis at a corner, the fee...

  • Page 562

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 532 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Deceleration to500 mm/minDeceleration to354 mm/min(Example)If parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 0 and thepermissible feedrate difference = 500 mm/min (on all axes) If "1" is set, the feedrate is determined not only w...

  • Page 563

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 533 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSIn actual machining, permissible error Δr is given, so the maximum permissible acceleration a (mm/sec2) in equation 1 is determined. When a specified feedrate causes the radial error from an arc having a programmed radius to exceed ...

  • Page 564

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 534 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS X-axisfeedrateN1N2YXN3N4N6N7N8Y-axisfeedrateTangentfeedrateN1N5N9N1N5N9N9N5 The method of determining the feedrate with the acceleration differs depending on the setting of bit 6 (FNW) of parameter No. 19500. If "0" is s...

  • Page 565

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 535 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS(Example) If a circular shape with a radius of 10 mm is specified with smallline blocksParameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 1,radius = 10 mm, permissible acceleration = 1000 mm/s2 (on all axes)The tangentfeedrate isconstant.Tangent f...

  • Page 566

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 536 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Tangential feedrateDeceleration with accelerationin ordinary mannerSmooth speed controlTimeCommand with large acceleration Smooth speed control obtains the acceleration by using the figure recognized from the preceding and follow...

  • Page 567

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 537 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSθ During descent on the Z-axis The descent angle θ during descent on the Z-axis (angle formed by the XY plane and the tool center path) is as shown in the figure. The descent angle is divided into four areas, and the override valu...

  • Page 568

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 538 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS CAUTION 4 Speed control with the cutting load is enabled for all interpolations in the AI contour control mode. This function, however, can be made valid only for linear interpolations by setting bit 4 (ZOL) of parameter No. 1950...

  • Page 569

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 539 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSExample O0010 … G5.1 Q1; G01 … X1.Y2.Z3.; M220; … M221; X2.Y2.Z4.; … X4.Y1.Z2.; G5.1 Q0; … M30; (Note The way to specify synchronous, composite, and superimposedcontrols differ from one machine tool builder to another. For...

  • Page 570

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 540 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Notes - About processing macro statements In AI contour control mode, the NC statements of multiple blocks are looked ahead. Macro statements such as arithmetic expressions and conditional branches are processed as soon as they a...

  • Page 571

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 541 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSFormat - Changing the smoothing level by a program The smoothing level can be switched on the machining level selection screen or machining quality level adjustment screen; it can also be changed by a program with the following form...

  • Page 572

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 542 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 20.4 JERK CONTROL 20.4.1 Speed Control with Change of Acceleration on Each Axis Overview In portions in which acceleration changes largely, such as a portion where a programmed figure changes from a straight line to curve, vibrati...

  • Page 573

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 543 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS22/1000smmrv = Y X Y-axis acceleration Acceleration TimeFrom straight line to arcSpecified feedrate: 6000 mm/min Acceleration change amount: 1000 mm/s2 Arc radius: 10 mm To suppress the change of acceleration to 300 mm/s2, set ...

  • Page 574

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 544 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS When linear interpolation is followed by circular interpolation, speed control is performed using the permissible acceleration change amount set in parameter No. 1788. Linear interpolation Circular interpolation For successive li...

  • Page 575

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 545 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS (Look-ahead bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation) (Look-ahead smooth bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation) TimeTangential feedrate Acceleration Jerk acceleration Jerk acceleration Accelera...

  • Page 576

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 546 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS In this case, the jerk change time is represented by the percentage set in parameter No. 1790 to the acceleration change time set in parameter No. 1672. - Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration When bell-shaped acceleration/de...

  • Page 577

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 547 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSTim eS pee dTim eAc c e le r a ti o nA c c el e r ati onan d+ m o v eDe c e le r a t io nand+ m o v eA c c / D e c p att er n c a n be c h a nge d in ea c h c on dition.A c c eler ati o nand- m o v eDe c e l e r a t io nand- m o v e ...

  • Page 578

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 548 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS - Setting acceleration pattern data Acceleration Speed FbFaAaP1 P2P3P4P5AbAcceleration pattern P0 Fig. 20.5 (c) Setting acceleration pattern Set the speed and the acceleration at each of the acceleration setting points P0 t...

  • Page 579

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 549 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSIf this function is enabled and parameter No.1671 for an axis are set to 0, the following values are assumed as the reference acceleration for that axis: 1000.0mm/sec2, 100.0inch/sec2, 100.0 deg/sec2 - Example of setting accelerat...

  • Page 580

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 550 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS The acceleration at maximum torque 90 (Nm) is, ]sec/[77170099.00.3216902mm=×××π The acceleration at torque 69 (Nm) in rapid traverse 3000 (min-1) is, ]sec/[59160099.00.3216692mm=×××π From the above data, the parameters r...

  • Page 581

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 551 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS Parameter No. Setting Unit Remarks Acceleration at P2 19547,19553 19559,19565 18712 0.01% At P2, set the same speed as that at P1. Acceleration at P3 to P4 19548 to 19549, 19554 to 19555, 19560 to 19561 19566 to 19567 0 0.01% 0 is s...

  • Page 582

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 552 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Maximum torque : 100(Nm) Speed 0 to 2000(min-1) Torque at rapid traverse : 79(Nm) Speed 3000(min-1) Minimum torque : 58(Nm) Speed 4000(min-1) In case of plus move (up) and acceleration Because torque of Gravity and frict...

  • Page 583

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 553 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSTorque at rapid traverse : 109(=79+20+10) (Nm) Speed 3000(min-1) Minimum torque : 88(=58+20+10) (Nm) Speed 4000(min-1) 05010015001000200030004000Speed(min-1)Torque(Nm)P0P1P5 Fig. 20.5 (i) Torque for Acc/Dec in case of + move an...

  • Page 584

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 554 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 05010015001000200030004000Speed(min-1)Torque(Nm)P0P1P5 Fig. 20.5 (k) Torque for Acc/Dec in case of - move and acceleration Parameter setting is as follows, Parameter No. Setting Unit Remarks Acceleration at P0 19551 11435 0.01% ...

  • Page 585

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 555 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS02040608010001000200030004000Speed(min-1)Torque(Nm)P0P1P5 Fig. 20.5 (m) Torque for Acc/Dec in case of - move and deceleration Parameter setting is as follows, Parameter No. Setting Unit Remarks Acceleration at P0 19563 9356 0.01% S...

  • Page 586

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 556 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS - Target axes Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration cannot be performed for a specific axis only. All axes operated by programmed commands are targeted for optimum torque acceleration/deceleration. This means that the PMC axes...

  • Page 587

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 557 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSNOTE 1 If an attempt is made to issue the function in the modes below, an alarm is issued. • Hypothetical axis interpolation (G07) • Cylindrical interpolation (G07.1) • Polar coordinate interpolation (G12.1) • Polar coordinat...

  • Page 588

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 558 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Data format for high-speed binary program operation Byte High-order byte Low-order byte 1st axis High-order byte Low-order byte 2nd axis : : High-order byte Low-order...

  • Page 589

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 559 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS20.8 OPTIMUM ACCELERATION/DECELERATION FOR RIGID TAPPING Overview This function can be used to flexibly set the acceleration/deceleration during cutting in rigid tapping according to the torque characteristics of a spindle motor and ...

  • Page 590

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 560 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Time Acceleration Real acceleration pattern Maximum acceleration line Asymmetrical inthe low-speedand high-speedparts Low-speed High-speed Spindle speed Spindle speed Fig. 20.8 (b) Acceleration/deceleration in which the maximum...

  • Page 591

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 561 - 21 AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS Chapter 21, "AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections: 21.1 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL...............................................................................................561...

  • Page 592

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 562 - 21.1.1 Axis Configuration for Axis Synchronous Control Explanation - Master axis and slave axis for axis synchronous control An axis used as the reference for axis synchronous control is referred to as a master axis (M-axis), and an axis...

  • Page 593

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 563 - - Setting of an axis name subscript A subscript can be attached to an axis name like X1, X2, XM, and XS. If the same axis name is used for multiple axes, and a unique subscript is assigned to each of those axes, the axes can be distingui...

  • Page 594

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 564 - At this time, synchronization error compensation, synchronization establishment, synchronization error check, and correction mode cannot be used. The mirror image set by bit 0 (MIR) of parameter No. 0012 cannot be applied to the slave axi...

  • Page 595

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 565 - K : Current synchronous error compensation gain for Er 1. When Er < B, compensation is not performed. (K = 0) 2. When B < Er < A Ks +K(Er - B)(Kd - Ks)=A - B Compensation is performed with the above gain: 3. When Er > A, co...

  • Page 596

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 566 - - Synchronous establishment based on manual reference position return operation When manual reference position return operation is performed along axes under axis synchronous control, the machine is placed at the reference position on t...

  • Page 597

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 567 - - One-direction synchronous establishment When synchronous error compensation is disabled, synchronous establishment can be performed by setting bit 0 (SSO) of parameter No. 8305 to 1 to move the machine in one direction along the master...

  • Page 598

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 568 - - Check made when synchronous error compensation is performed When synchronous error compensation is performed, a check considering a positional deviation is made. The actual machine position shift considering a servo positional deviatio...

  • Page 599

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 569 - 21.1.6 Methods of Alarm Recovery by Synchronous Error Check Explanation To recover from an alarm issued as a result of synchronous error check, two methods are available. One method uses the correction mode, and the other uses normal oper...

  • Page 600

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 570 - 21.1.7 Axis Synchronous Control Torque Difference Alarm Explanation If a movement made along the master axis differs from a movement made along the slave axis during axis synchronous control, the machine can be damaged. To prevent such da...

  • Page 601

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 571 - SA 1 0 Alarm detection function Enabled Setting of parameter No. 8327 (512 msec when this parameter is not set) Disabled Fig. 21.1.7 (b) Timing chart When the servo ready signal SA is set to 0, torque difference alarm detection is disa...

  • Page 602

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 572 - NOTE 5 When controlled axis removal is performed, the synchronization state is cancelled. When performing controlled axis removal, perform removal for the master axis and slave axis at the same time. 6 If a programmed command is specified...

  • Page 603

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 573 - 21.2 POLYGON TURNING (G50.2, G51.2) Polygon turning means machining a workpiece to a polygonal figure by rotating the workpiece and tool at a certain ratio. WorkpieceWorkpieceTool Fig. 21.2 (a) Polygon turning By changing conditions whic...

  • Page 604

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 574 - NOTE 1 Before polygon turning, reference position return operation on the Y-axis needs to be specified to determine the rotation start position of the tool. This reference position return operation is performed by detecting a deceleration...

  • Page 605

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 575 - Format G50.2 Polygon turning cancel G51.2 P_ Q_ ; P,Q: Rotation ratio of spindle and Y-axis Specify range: P: Integer from 1 to 999 Q: Integer from -999 to -1 or from 1 to 999 When Q is a positive value, Y-axis makes positive rotation...

  • Page 606

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 576 - (0, 0)αtβtAPStart pointBPt (Xt, Yt) Fig. 21.2 (c) Tool nose position In this case, the tool nose position Pt (Xt, Yt) after time t is expressed by equations 1 and 2: Xt=Acosαt-Bcos(β-α)t (Equation 1) Yt=Asinαt+Bsin(β-α)t (Equ...

  • Page 607

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 577 - If three tools are set at every 120°, the machining figure will be a hexagon as shown below. WARNING For the maximum rotation speed of the tool, see the instruction manual supplied with the machine. Do not specify a spindle speed hig...

  • Page 608

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 578 - 21.3 SYNCHRONOUS, COMPOSITE AND SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL BY PROGRAM COMMAND (G50.4, G51.4, G50.5, G51.5, G50.6, AND G51.6) Synchronous control, composite control, and superimposed control can be started or canceled using a program command ins...

  • Page 609

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 579 - Parameter setting examples for a 3-path system • Parameter No.12600 Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 X 101 201 301 Z 102 202 302 • Parameter No.8180 Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 X 0 0 0 Z 0 102 102 • Program example (M100 to M103 are synchronization ...

  • Page 610

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 580 - Parameter setting examples for a 3-path system • Parameter No.12600 Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 X 101 201 301 Z 102 202 302 • Parameter No.8183 Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 X 0 101 0 Z 0 102 0 • Program example (M100 to M103 are synchronization ...

  • Page 611

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 581 - • Program example (M100 to M103 are synchronization M codes.) Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 Operation N10 M100 P13 ; M100 P13 ; Synchronization between paths 1 and 3 N20 G51.6 P102 Q302 ; Start of Z1-Z3 superimposed control N30 M101 P13 ; M101 ...

  • Page 612

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 582 - Example Assume that axis A is the rotary axis and that the amount of movement per rotation is 360.000 (parameter No. 1260 = 360000). When the following program is executed using the roll-over function of the rotary axis, the axis moves as...

  • Page 613

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 583 - NOTE 1 This function can be used only when the corresponding option is provided. (When a machining center system is used, this function cannot be used together with the index table indexing function.) 2 This function is valid for a roll-o...

  • Page 614

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 584 - +Y (Angular axis)+Y' (Hypothetical axis)θYp tanθ (perpendicular axiscomponent produced bytravel along the angular axis)Xp and YpXa and YaActual tool travel+X (Perpendicular axis) Fig. 21.5 (b) - Feedrate When the Y-axis is an angular ...

  • Page 615

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 585 - - Manual reference position return operation A movement is made to the reference position (machine position) set in parameter No. 1240. By using bit 2 (AZR) of parameter No. 8200, whether to make a movement along the perpendicular axis ...

  • Page 616

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 586 - (2) If bit 0 (ARF) of parameter No. 8209 is 0 <1> Coordinates at P1 (Absolute coordinate) (Machine coordinate) X 0.000 X 0.000 Y 100.000 Y 115.470 <2> Coordinates at P0 (Absolute coordinate) (Machine coordinate) X...

  • Page 617

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 587 - - Commands for linear interpolation and linear interpolation type positioning (G01, G00) The tool moves to a specified position in the Cartesian coordinate system when the following is specified: (G90)G00X_Y_; (when the Y-axis is an ang...

  • Page 618

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 588 - - 3-dimensional coordinate conversion In the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode, angular coordinate system conversion is applied to the workpiece coordinate system that has undergone 3-dimensional coordinate conversion. - Stored...

  • Page 619

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 589 - This means that when a movement is made along the perpendicular axis by a movement along the angular axis alone: A signal valid for the Cartesian coordinate system is affected by a movement along the angular axis. A signal valid for the...

  • Page 620

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 590 - Output signal Signal name AddressClassificationRemarks In-position signal INPx F104 Angular Applied to each axis independently. Mirror image check signal MMIx F108 Angular Applied to each axis independently. Controlled axis removal in-pro...

  • Page 621

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 591 - Example) Path 1 Path 2 X1 (Cartesian axis) ←composite→ X2 (Cartesian axis) Y1 (angular axis) ←composite→ Y2 (angular axis) - Rigid tapping As a rigid tapping axis, no angular axis can be used. - Functions that cannot be used ...

  • Page 622

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 592 - • Return The tool returns to the retract position. • Repositioning The tool returns to the interrupted position. For the tool retract and recover operations, see “Tool retract and recover “ in the Part III. : Position at which...

  • Page 623

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 593 - Explanation - Retraction When the TOOL WITHDRAW switch on the machine operator's panel is turned on during automatic operation or in the automatic operation stop or hold state, the tool is retracted the length of the programmed retractio...

  • Page 624

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 594 - - Machine lock, mirror image, and scaling When withdrawing the tool manually in the tool withdrawal mode, never use the machine lock, mirror-image, or scaling function. - Reset Upon reset, the retraction data specified in G10.6 is clea...

  • Page 625

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 595 - 21.7 ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX 21.7.1 Electronic Gear Box Overview This function enables fabrication of high-precision gears, screws, and other components by rotating the workpiece in synchronization with a rotating tool or by moving the tool i...

  • Page 626

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 596 - Format Parameter EFX(No.7731#0)=1 Parameter EFX(No.7731#0)=0 Parameter HBR(No.7731#5)=1 Parameter HBR(No.7731#5)=0 Start of synchronization G81 T_ ( L_ ) ( Q_ P_ ) ; G81.4 R_ ( L_ ) ( Q_ P_ ) ; G81.4 T_ ( L_ ) ( Q_...

  • Page 627

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 597 - between T (number of teeth) and L (number of hob threads) is maintained. During synchronization, the synchronization relationship is maintained regardless of whether the operation is automatic or manual. Specify P and Q to use helical gea...

  • Page 628

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 598 - NOTE 1 If bit 0 (HBR) of parameter No. 7700 is set to 1, EGB synchronization will not be canceled due to a reset. Usually, set this parameter bit to 1. 2 In synchronous mode, it is not possible to specify G27, G28, G29, G30, G30.1, and G...

  • Page 629

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 599 - - Direction of helical gear compensation The direction depends on HDR, bit 2 of parameter No. 7700. When HDR is set to 1. +C C:+, Z:+, P:+ Compensation direction : + (a) -Z +Z +CC:+, Z:+, P:- Compensation direction : -(b) +CC:+, Z:-, P...

  • Page 630

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 600 - N0020 G28 G91 C0 ; Reference position return on the workpiece axis N0030 G81 T20 L1 ; Synchronous start on tool and workpiece axes (Rotation about the workpiece axis by 18° per rotation about the tool axis) N0040 S300 M03 ; R...

  • Page 631

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 601 - NOTE 1 During a retract operation, an interlock is effective to the retract axis. 2 During a retract operation, a machine lock is effective to the retract axis. 3 The retraction direction depends on the movement direction of the machine, ...

  • Page 632

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 602 - (4) The cutting helical gear is performed by specifying Q command (module or diametral pitch) and P command (gear helix angle) in G81 block. (5) The Spindle EGB synchronization is maintained regardless of whether the operation is automati...

  • Page 633

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 603 - Format Parameter EFX(No. 7731#0)=1 Parameter EFX (No. 7731#0)=0 Parameter HBR (No. 7731#5)=1 Parameter HBR (No. 7731#5)=0 Start of synchronization G81 T_ ( L_ ) ( Q_ P_ ) ; G81.4 R_ ( L_ ) ( Q_ P_ ) ; G81.4 T_ ( L_ )...

  • Page 634

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 604 - When the rotation of the tool axis is stopped, the workpiece axis stopped with keeping synchronization. Then the EGB synchronization is canceled by specifying G80. When the EGB synchronization is canceled, the EGB synchronization switch i...

  • Page 635

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 605 - NOTE 11 During synchronization, manual handle interruption can be performed on the slave and other axes. 12 In synchronization mode, no inch/metric conversion commands (G20 and G21) can be issued. 13 If bit 0 (EFX) of parameter No. 7731 i...

  • Page 636

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 606 - - Helical gear compensation For a helical gear, the workpiece axis is compensated for the movement along the Z-axis (axial feed axis) based on the torsion angle of the gear. Helical gear compensation is performed with the following formu...

  • Page 637

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 607 - - Synchronization coefficient A synchronization coefficient is internally represented using a fraction (K2/K1) to eliminate an error. The formula below is used for calculation. αβTLKK =t coefficienation Synchroniz12×= where L : Numb...

  • Page 638

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 608 - As Fig. 21.7.2 (c), when 360000 pulses (Number of pulse for one rotation of the master axis) are specified, the pulses for slave axis by EGB are equal to the value which is multiplied to the number of pulse for one rotation of the slave ...

  • Page 639

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 609 - Bit 0 (EFX) of parameter No. 7731=1 Bit 5 (HBR) of parameter No. 7731=1 Bit 6 (PHS) of parameter No. 7702=1 ・ Acceleration/deceleration plus automatic phase synchronization type G81.4 R _ L _ ; Synchronization start G80.4 ; Synchro...

  • Page 640

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 610 - - Acceleration/deceleration plus automatic phase synchronization type Automatic phase synchronizationSynchronization cancellation command Synchronization start commandWorkpiece-axis speed Synchronization state AccelerationDeceleration Sp...

  • Page 641

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 611 - NOTE 3 When a synchronization command is issued again in a synchronization state, automatic phase synchronization movement is as follows. Workpiece axis is moved to the position specified first in the G81R2 synchronization start command c...

  • Page 642

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 612 - Machining in the synchronous state G00 X_ ; Retract the workpiece from the tool. G80 R1 ; Cancel synchronization - Acceleration/deceleration plus automatic phase synchronization type M03 ; Clockwise spindle rotation command G00...

  • Page 643

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 613 - Explanation G31.8 is a one-shot G code. After the execution of G31.8, values of machine coordinate which is gotten at each time of skip signal input are set in custom macro variables. The numbers of variables are used from the top number ...

  • Page 644

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 614 - 21.7.5 Electronic Gear Box 2 Pair Overview This function enables machining of high-precision gears, screws, and other components by rotating the workpiece in synchronization with a rotating tool or by moving the tool in synchronization wi...

  • Page 645

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 615 - When j = 0, the specified command is regarded as being a command for the slave-axis speed, described below. In this case, if L is not specified, an alarm is output. 2 Slave-axis speed β0 L±l β : Slave-axis address l : Slave axis sp...

  • Page 646

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 616 - NOTE 7 If bit 0 (EFX) of parameter No. 7731 is 0, no canned cycle for drilling can be used. To use a canned cycle for drilling, set bit 0 (EFX) of parameter No. 7731 to 1. 8 If, during synchronization, G81.5 is issued again, alarm PS1595 ...

  • Page 647

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 617 - 21.7.5.2 Description of commands compatible with those for a hobbing machine (G80, G81) A command compatible with that for a hobbing machine can be used as a synchronization command. Usually, a hobbing machine performs machining by synchr...

  • Page 648

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 618 - During synchronization, the rotation about the tool and workpiece axes is controlled so that the relationship between T (number of teeth) and L (number of hob threads) is maintained. If, during synchronization, G81 is issued again without...

  • Page 649

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 619 - NOTE 11 Actual cutting feedrate display does not take synchronization pulses into consideration. 12 For an EGB slave axis, synchronous and composite control cannot be executed. 13 In EGB synchronization mode, AI contour control mode is te...

  • Page 650

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 620 - - Direction of helical gear compensation The direction depends on bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No. 7700. When HDR is set to 1. +C C:+, Z:+, P:+ Compensation direction : + (a) -Z +Z +CC:+, Z:+, P:- Compensation direction : -(b) +CC:+, Z:-, P...

  • Page 651

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 621 - Spindle amp.Motor Spindle (master axis) 1st axis X (omitted) 2nd axis Y (omitted) Tool axis 3rd axis C slave axis 4th axis dummy axis EGB - + + - K1: Sync coefficientK1 Error counter Sync switch Motor Detector Velocity/current controlSer...

  • Page 652

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 622 - (2) For a millimeter machine and inch input G81.5 T1 V1.0 ; Synchronization between the master axis and V-axis is started at the ratio of a 1.0 inch movement (25.4 mm) along the V-axis per rotation about the master axis. - When two g...

  • Page 653

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 623 - Limit switch 1Limit switch 2 V-axis motor U-axis V-axisRotary whetstone O9500 ; N01 G01 G91 U_ F100 ; Dressing axis approach N02 M03 S100 ; The M03 command causes the PMC to rotate the whetstone in the positive direction. In acco...

  • Page 654

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 624 - - Command specification for hobbing machines Based on the controlled axis configuration described in Fig. 21.7.5.3 (a), the sample program below sets the C-axis (in parameter 7710) for starting synchronization with the spindle according ...

  • Page 655

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 625 - V-axis least command increment : 0.001mm V-axis CMR : 5 Then, the C-axis detection unit is 0.0002 degree. The V-axis detection unit is 0.0002 mm. In this case, the synchronization ratio (Kn, Kd) is related with a command as indicated bel...

  • Page 656

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 626 - KnKd = 3263×572000×10 = 3263144000 In this case, an alarm is issued because Kd exceeds the specifiable range. (e) Command : G81.5 P10000 C-0.214 ; Operation : Synchronization between the spindle and C-axis is started at the ratio ...

  • Page 657

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 627 - - Example 2) Based on the controlled axis configuration described in Fig. 21.7.5.3 (a), suppose that the spindle and V-axis are as follows: Spindle pulse coder : 72000pulse/rev (4 pulses for one A/B phase cycle) C-axis least command incr...

  • Page 658

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 628 - U-axisSpindle Fig. 21.7.6 (a) Example of a machine having the U-axis U-axis Spindle motorU-axis motor Spindle Fig. 21.7.6 (b) Example of the structure of a machine having the U-axis In the example of the above structure, the tool ...

  • Page 659

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 629 - 21.8 TANDEM CONTROL When enough torque for driving a large table cannot be produced by only one motor, two motors can be used for movement along a single axis. Positioning is performed by the main motor only. The submotor is used only to ...

  • Page 660

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 630 - Control method B h l s B axis 0 deg kθ Servo motor Pivot axis Nut Fig. 21.9 (b) From Fig. 21.9 (b), the following expression holds: θcos222shshl−+=....................................(1) The rate of change of l in relation to θ i...

  • Page 661

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 631 - Example s=500mm h=300mm Pivot axis θ (radian)= α (deg) B l B axis 0 degk=-10 degreesServo motor Nut Fig. 21.9 (c) 0 1020 30 4060708090Angle of rotation axis α(deg) 50Gain multiplier 1.02.04.03.05.0θ-G diagram example Fig. 21.9 (d) ...

  • Page 662

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 632 - Parameter No. 14279 = 90.0 deg Gain multiplier Parameter No. 14280 = 614 (2.2) Parameter No. 14281 = 1382 (3.7) Parameter No. 14282 = 1843 (4.6) Parameter No. 14283 = 2099 (5.1) Parameter No. 14284 = 2150 (5.2) Parameter No. 14285 = 2150...

  • Page 663

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 633 - 22 5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION Chapter 22, "5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 22.1 TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL ..........................................................................................

  • Page 664

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 634 - X'Y'Z'BAX'Y'Z'Tool center point pathY'X'Z' Fig. 22.1 (b) Path of the tool center point When a coordinate system fixed on the table is used as the programming coordinate system, programming can be performed without worrying about the r...

  • Page 665

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 635 - By setting the relevant parameter, the workpiece coordinate system can also be employed as the programming coordinate system. In this case, as the table turns, the position and direction of the workpiece fixed on the table change with ...

  • Page 666

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 636 - <2> Table rotation type machine <3> Composite type machine<1> Tool rotation type machineXCBZYBCXZYBYXZC Fig. 22.1 (d) Three types of 5-axis machine Even if the rotary axis that controls the tool does not intersect...

  • Page 667

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 637 - (2) Type 2 The direction of the tool axis (I, J, K) at the block end point, as seen from the coordinate system fixed on the table, is specified, instead of the position of the rotary axes. The CNC calculates an end point of the rotar...

  • Page 668

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 638 - CAUTION 1 If one or two of the I, J, and K values are omitted, the omitted value or values are considered to be 0. 2 In a block in which I, J, and K are all omitted, the compensation vector of the preceding block is used. 3 This bloc...

  • Page 669

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 639 - Movement to the position specified by the G43.4 block does not constitute tool center point control. Only tool length compensation is performed. While performing interpolation for the rotary axes, the CNC controls the control points so...

  • Page 670

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 640 - While performing interpolation for the rotary axes, the CNC controls the control points so that the tool center point moves along an arc with respect to the table (workpiece). The end of the tool center point comes to the point specifi...

  • Page 671

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 641 - - Helical interpolation for tool center point control (type 1) G43.4 IP_ H ; Starts tool center point control (type 1). G02 I J K G17 IP α β γ F ; G03 R G02 I J K G18 IP α β γ F ; G03 R G0...

  • Page 672

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 642 - Bit 5 (HTG) of parameter No.1403 0 1 Tangential speed of the arc Synthetic speed of the linear axis speed and tangential speed While performing interpolation for the rotary axes, the CNC controls the control points so that the tool cen...

  • Page 673

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 643 - Movement to the position specified by the G43.5 block does not constitute tool center point control. Only tool length compensation is performed. Because the specified speed is the speed in the tangent direction of the arc, the speed of...

  • Page 674

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 644 - The cancellation block for tool center point control is the one that controls buffering. BControl point: Control target on the machine coordinate systemTool center point Tool offset value Fig. 22.1 (e) Control point and tool center po...

  • Page 675

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 645 - Example) To incline the tool by two degrees toward the proceeding direction at the time of machining, enter the following command: G43.5 I_ J_ K_ H_ Q2.0 Explanation - When a coordinate system fixed on the table is used as the prog...

  • Page 676

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 646 - Example of operation performed if bit 5 (INZ) of parameter No. 19754 is 0: Assume that the table rotation axis rotating about the Z-axis is the C-axis. If bit 5 (INZ) of parameter No. 19754 is 0, and th...

  • Page 677

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 647 - If bit 5 (INZ) of parameter No. 19754 is 1, the workpiece coordinate system is fixed on the table in the state in which the position of the table rotation axis is 0, regardless of the position of the table rotation axis at the start of...

  • Page 678

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 648 - - When the workpiece coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system If bit 5 (WKP) of parameter No. 19696 is 1, the workpiece coordinate system is the programming coordinate system. In this case, the programming coord...

  • Page 679

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 649 - • I, J, K commands the vector of the block start point to the center of the arc from the start point in the rotary axis position. • Note the following: <1> Only a table rotation axis normal to a selected plane can be rotated ...

  • Page 680

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 650 - : After the G43.4 command, the Z-X plane is selected using the G18 command and the C-axis is rotated during circular interpolation . → Alarm (violation of <2>) The same is also true when the G19 command is used. Example) : G...

  • Page 681

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 651 - Example) : G01 A90.; G43.4 H1 ; G01 C10. ; G17 G02 IP IR ; : : G01 A90.; G43.4 H1 ; G17 G02 IP IR C10.; : After the G43.4 command, the A-axis is moved and circular interpolation is performed using the G17 command (X-Y plane). → ...

  • Page 682

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 652 - Example) : G43.4 H1 ; G01 A10. (C10.) G18 G02 IP IR; : - Tool center point control command During tool center point control, the command specifies the location of each block end point as seen from the programming coordinate system....

  • Page 683

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 653 - - Rotary axis command If a command is specified during tool center point control that prohibits the tool center point from moving with respect to the workpiece, the maximum cutting speed (parameter No.1430) is assumed as the feedrate ...

  • Page 684

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 654 - If the tool center point does not move in relation to the workpiece, but movement is made along the rotation axis, the "movement distance of the tool center point" is the amount of travel along the rotation axis. In a tool ro...

  • Page 685

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 655 - - Tool retract and recover during tool center point control A tool retract and recover operation can be performed during tool center point control. A retract operation is performed in the tool axis direction by setting a tool axis dir...

  • Page 686

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 656 - Example) If tool center point control is specified (Bit 2 (AAI) of parameter No. 11260=1) : G43.4H507 ; Starts tool center point control and AI contour control mode : G49 ; Ends tool center point control and AI contour control...

  • Page 687

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 657 - Z X Machine coordinate system Control point Tool center point Tool length vectorTRC=1 TRC=0 Fig. 22.1 (h) Comparison of operations depending on the setting of bit 7 (TRC) of parameter No. 11260(tool rotation type) Tab...

  • Page 688

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 658 - Manual intervention during tool center point control - For a tool rotation type machine Manual absolute on (*ABSM=0) If an operation restart is performed after manual intervention in the manual absolute on state, the tool moves to ...

  • Page 689

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 659 - Manual absolute off (*ABSM=1) If an operation restart is performed after manual intervention in the manual absolute off state, the tool moves in the state in which the amount of manual intervention is retained in the "table co...

  • Page 690

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 660 - "Output judgment conditions" Tool rotation type or table rotation type machine <1> The "output angles" are represented by the computed rotary axis angle pair whose master axis (first rotary axis) moving angle ...

  • Page 691

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 661 - -360 × (N + 1) degrees θ1 - 360 × N-360 × N degreesθ2 - 360 × Nθ2 - 360 × (N + 1) θ1 - 360 × (N - 1)(*1) 0 degree360 degrees θ1θ2θ2 - 360 θ1 + 360(*2)360 × (N + 1) degreesθ1 + 360 × N360 × N degreesθ2 + 360 × N θ2 ...

  • Page 692

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 662 - X YZC-axis: 1st rotation axis (master) B-axis: 2nd rotation axis (l) Fig. 22.1 (j) BC type tool axis Z The following two pairs of "computed basic angles" exist that direct the tool axis toward the + X axis direction. (B 9...

  • Page 693

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 663 - XYZC Fig. 22.1 (k) BC type tool axis Z When the current rotary axis angles are (B 45 degrees; C 90 degrees), the "output angles" are (B 0 degree; C 90 degrees). - Angle of the rotary axis for type 2 (when the movement ran...

  • Page 694

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 664 - Composite type machine <1> Of the angle pairs whose master and slave axis angles are both within the specified movement range, the rotary axis angle pair whose table (second rotary axis) moving angle is smaller represents the &qu...

  • Page 695

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 665 - 360 × (N + 1) degrees360 × N degrees • Computed angle A Current position AMovement range A θ1 + 360 × N θ2 + 360 × N θ2 + 360 × (N - 1) θ1 + 360 × (N + 1) Fig. 22.1 (l) "Computed angle of rotary axis A and its curr...

  • Page 696

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 666 - In the case of a machine having two tool rotation axes, the table does not rotate with respect to the workpiece coordinate system even if the rotary axes move. Therefore, the programming coordinate system always matches the workpiece c...

  • Page 697

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 667 - X'Y'Z'CControl point path (of the machinecoordinate system)Tool center point path (of the programming coordinate system)BX'Y'Z'X'Y'Z' Fig. 22.1 (n) Example for a tool rotation type machine

  • Page 698

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 668 - - In the case of a table rotation type machine Explanations are given below assuming a machine configuration (trunnion) in which a rotation table that turns around the Y-axis is located above another table rotation axis that turns aro...

  • Page 699

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 669 - X'Y'Z'BAX'Y'Z'Y'X'Z'Tool center point path seen from the table-fixed coordinate systemXZ'YXZ'YXZ'YTool center point path taken whenthe programming coordinatesystem does not moveYXZ"YXZ"YXZ"Control point path (of the mach...

  • Page 700

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 670 - - In the case of a composite type machine Explanations are given below assuming a composite type machine configuration that has one table rotation axis (which turns around the X-axis) and one tool rotation axis (which turns around the...

  • Page 701

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 671 - X'Y'Z'BAX'Y'Z'X'Y'Z'X'Z'Y'X'Z'Y'X'Z'Y'Control point path (of themachine coordinate system)Tool center point path seen from the table-fixed coordinate systemTool center point path taken whenthe programming coordinatesystem does not move...

  • Page 702

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 672 - - When linear interpolation is performed during tool center point control Examples are given below in which each 100-mm-long side of an equilateral triangle is cut at B-axis angles of 0, 30 to 60, and 60 degrees, respectively. Exampl...

  • Page 703

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 673 - O400 (Sample Program4) ; N10 G55 ; Prepares the programming coordinate system. N20 G90 X50.0 Y-70.0 Z300.0 B0 C0 ; Moves to the initial position. N30 G01 G43.5 H01 Z20.0 F500. ; Starts tool center point control. Moves to the approachi...

  • Page 704

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 674 - The following figure illustrates the position of the workpiece, as well as the position of the tool head (relative to the workpiece), as seen from the table-fixed programming coordinate system in the +Z direction. • Behavior as see...

  • Page 705

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 675 - • Detailed diagram of each block Y"X"(C 0)(B 30.0)(B 0)Behavior of thetool center point Behavior of the control point (machine coordinate value) (B 30.0)C-axis rotates, with C being 120 degrees. (B 45.0)(C 0)(C 120.0)(B 3...

  • Page 706

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 676 - C-axis rotates, with C being 240 degrees. (C 120.0)(B 60.0) (B 60.0) (C 240.0)(C 360.0)(B 0)(C-axis rotates, with C being 360 degrees.) N80 block N90 block N100 block (C 240.0)(B 60.0)(B 60.0)Y"X"Y"X"X'Y'Y'X'X' X&qu...

  • Page 707

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 677 - - When circular interpolation is performed during tool center point control In this example, one of the three sides of an equilateral triangle, each being 100 mm long side, is specified as a straight line and the other two are specifi...

  • Page 708

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 678 - (X 50.0, Y -70.0, Z 300.0, B -90.0) (X 28.868, Y -50.0) (B -60.0)(B -60.0) (B -45.0) (X 28.868, Y 50.0) (X -57.735, Y 0.0) (C 0.0) (C 90.0) (C 150.0)(B -30.0)(B -30.0)(B -30.0) Y X (C 210.0)(C • Behavior as seen from the table-fixed...

  • Page 709

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 679 - XY [Up to N031] Y X Behavior of the tool center point B -60 Behavior of the control point (machine coordinate system) B -90 X Y [N032] B -45 C 90B -60 [N034] B -30 B -30 Y X[N033] B -45 B -30 C 150 Head path relative to the workpi...

  • Page 710

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 680 - - Inverse time feed Manual intervention cannot be performed while inverse time feed is specified during tool center point control. Do not perform manual intervention. - Hypothetical axis of a table rotation axis When a table rotatio...

  • Page 711

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 681 - - Scaling Do not apply scaling to a rotary axis. - Machine coordinate system command During tool center point control, the machine coordinate system command (G53) cannot be used. However, G53 can be specified singly to suppress look...

  • Page 712

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 682 - T - Feed per minute (G98 (G94)) - Feed per revolution (G99 (G95)) - Modal G codes that allow specification of tool center point control Tool center point control can be specified in the modal G code states listed below. Tool center...

  • Page 713

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 683 - 22.2 SMOOTH TCP 22.2.1 Smooth TCP Overview Tool center point control (referred to as TCP in the remainder of this manual) is a 5-axis machining function whereby the tool center point moves along a specified path even if the tool postur...

  • Page 714

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 684 - α, β : For an absolute command, the coordinates of the end point of the rotation axis For an incremental command, the amount of movement along the rotation axis H : Tool compensation number (M series) D : Tool compensation number(...

  • Page 715

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 685 - Fig. 22.2.1 (d) In case of unlimited compensation To avoid such large compensation, smooth TCP can limit the compensation for the rotation axis positions. Fig. 22.2.1 (e) In case of limited compe...

  • Page 716

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 686 - Fig. 22.2.1 (f) Compensation area for a tool head rotation type machine ±No. 10487±No. 10486

  • Page 717

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 687 - NOTE If the tool posture varies due to compensation with smooth TCP while a corner is being machined at the tool center, as in filleting, the finishing allowance may remain uncut at the corner. At such a location, set a small compensa...

  • Page 718

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 688 - The following is an example showing which blocks are compensated after smooth TCP starts. Comments in parentheses to the right of some of the blocks are the reasons why the blocks are not compensated. The other blocks enclosed in frame...

  • Page 719

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 689 - Other notes - Display of programs under execution In smooth TCP mode, the compensated program is displayed. - Original program Smooth TCP is not a function to directly edit the original program. Thus, smooth TCP does not change the co...

  • Page 720

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 690 - N040 G43.4 L0 H1 Z0; Normal TCP mode ON If address "L" is omitted, whether to turn on or off smooth TCP is decided with the setting of bit 0 (STC) of parameter No. 10485. Parameter setting Behavior Bit 0 (STC) of parameter N...

  • Page 721

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 691 - NOTE 3 If any of the following is specified in a G10.8L1 block, alarm PS0520, "ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10.8L1", occurs. - A command other than the above (except O and N commands) is specified. - P is specified together with α and...

  • Page 722

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 692 - G10.8 L1 P0; (One-shot G code Tolerances for the B- and C-axes are set to 0 degrees.) X_ C_; (Rotation axis compensation is temporarily halted.) X_ Y_ ; (Rotation axis compensation is temporarily halted.) Z_ B_ C_; (Rotation axis c...

  • Page 723

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 693 - B_ C_; (Block immediately before cancellation) G10.8 L1 B1.0 C0.5; (One-shot G code A tolerance of 1.0 degree is set for the B-axis, and a tolerance of 0.5 degree for the C-axis.) X_ C_; (Smooth TCP resumption block) X_ Y_ ; Z_ B...

  • Page 724

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 694 - - Programming coordinate system for a table rotation type/composite type machine Smooth TCP supports programs that use the table coordinate system as the programming coordinate system (bit 5 (WKP) of parameter No. 19696 = 0) on a machi...

  • Page 725

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 695 - 22.3 EXPANSION OF AXIS MOVE COMMAND IN TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL Overview This function makes it possible to specify commands for axes other than the five axes subject to tool center point control during tool center point control. Det...

  • Page 726

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 696 - NOTE 1 Circular interpolation cannot be performed on non 5-axis machining control axes. 2 If, in circular interpolation, the amount of movement on a 5-axis machining control axis is 0, the operation is as described below. • If an arc...

  • Page 727

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 697 - 22.4 TOOL POSTURE CONTROL Overview Under tool center point control, the tool tip moves along a specified path even when the tool direction relative to the workpiece changes. Usually, however, the two rotary axes are controlled independ...

  • Page 728

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 698 - H : Tool offset number Q : Tool tilted angle (degree) P : Tool posture control disabled (P0) or tool posture control enabled (P1) However, bit 0 (TPC) of setting parameter No. 19604 can be used to select the behavior taken when the ad...

  • Page 729

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 699 - Tool posture control is enabled when P1 is specified or disabled when P0 is specified in the tool center point control start command (G43.4/G43.5) blocks. Bit 0 (TPC) of setting parameter No. 19604 can be used to select whether tool po...

  • Page 730

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 700 - • sα : Angle formed by the tool direction and the center direction at the block start point • sβ : Angle formed by the tool direction and the traveling direction at the block start point • eα : Angle formed by the tool directi...

  • Page 731

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 701 - Tool rotation type Table rotation typeComposite typeTool-side rotary axisWorkpiece-side rotary axis Fig. 22.4 (g) "Tool-side rotary axis" and "workpiece-side rotary axis" - Singular point, singular point posture...

  • Page 732

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 702 - - When the tool posture is close to a singular point posture When tool posture control is exercised on a machine that has a singular point, and the tool posture becomes close to a singular point posture during execution of a block, th...

  • Page 733

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 703 - Tool-side rotary axis: Turned reversely relative to the singular point angular displacement Example: When the end point angular displacement before a change is 60°, and the singular point angular displacement is 20°, the end point...

  • Page 734

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 704 - If either of the rotary axes exceeds the set operation range during program execution when tool posture control is enabled, alarm DS0029 is issued. If tool posture control is disabled, rotary axis operation range specification based on...

  • Page 735

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 705 - - When the tool posture directions at the start point and end point of a block match each other If, in positioning or linear interpolation, the tool posture directions at the start point and end point of a block match each other (eith...

  • Page 736

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 706 - 22.5 CUTTING POINT COMMAND M Overview While the operation of the tool tip center is specified with tool center point control, the operation of the cutting point can be specified with the cutting point command. With this function, a co...

  • Page 737

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 707 - G43.8 IP_ α_ β_ H_ D_ ,L2 I_ J_ K_; Turn cutting point command (type 1) mode ON IP_ α_ β_ ,L2I_ J_ K_; : G49 ; Turn cutting point command mode OFF G43.9 IP_ H_ D_ ,L2 I_ J_ K _; Turn cutting point command (type 2) mode ON IP_ ...

  • Page 738

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 708 - Tool length offset The direction is the tool axis direction (specified by (α,β) or (I, J, K)). The length is the tool length (specified by H). Tool offset Tool radius offset Corner-R offset The direction is perpendicular to the cutt...

  • Page 739

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 709 - Less than parameter No. 11262 Control pointCutting point Workpiece Control point Cutting point Workpiece Greater than parameter No. 11262 Fig. 22.5 (c) Near-singular posture (right) : Cutting point vectorRegarded as a near-singula...

  • Page 740

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 710 - Interpolation path Cutting point path (Example) Fig. 22.5 (e) Example of acceleration/deceleration before look ahead interpolation In the case of the example in Fig. 22.5 (e), the feedrate is controlled so that the specified...

  • Page 741

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 711 - • Parallel axis control • Twin table control - Specifiable G codes The G codes that can be specified in cutting point command mode are as follows. Do not specify G codes other than these. • Positioning (G00) • Linear interpol...

  • Page 742

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 712 - 22.6 TILTED WORKING PLANE COMMAND 22.6.1 Tilted Working Plane Command Overview Programming for creating holes, pockets, and other figures in a datum plane tilted with respect to the workpiece would be easy if commands can be specified ...

  • Page 743

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 713 - This function regards the direction normal to the machining plane as the +Z-axis direction of the feature coordinate system. After the G53.1 command, the tool is controlled so that it remains perpendicular to the machining plane. Coord...

  • Page 744

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 714 - This function is applicable to the following machine configurations. (See Fig. 22.6 (d).) <1> Tool rotation type machine controlled with two tool rotation axes <2> Table rotation type machine controlled with two table rot...

  • Page 745

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 715 - Format - Tilted working plane command (G68.2) M G68.2 X x0 Y y0 Z z0 Iα Jβ Kγ ; Tilted working plane command G69 ; Cancels the tilted working plane command. X,Y,Z : Feature coordinate system origin The axes specified here are th...

  • Page 746

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 716 - γ zc yc xcx' y''γ Conversion from workpiece coordinate system X-Y-Z to coordinate system 1 X'-Y'-Z x z yx' y'α β X'z y''z'' y'β Conversion from coordinate system 1 X'-Y'-Z to coordinate system 2 X'-Y"-Z" Conversion fro...

  • Page 747

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 717 - Program coordinate systemMachine coordinate system G54 G55Program coordinate system ・Minimum command unit of rotation angles The minimum command unit of the rotation angles (I, J, K, and R) of the tilted working plane command is 0....

  • Page 748

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 718 - • Bit 2 (TFR) of parameter No. 11630 is set to 1 (minimum command unit of the rotation angles: 0.00001 degree): B axis: 0.0001 degree C axis: 0.0000 degree - Tool rotation type machine The following paragraphs describe several case...

  • Page 749

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 719 - Fig. 22.6 (f) shows the behavior of the machine when it runs sample program 1. N3 commandFeature coordinate system Xc-Yc-ZcXc Yc Zc• Sample program 1 (with axes crossing one another) Xc Yc ZcXc Yc ZcXc Yc ZcN4 command N5 command N6...

  • Page 750

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 720 - Operation description 2: When G43 (tool length compensation) is specified for a machine with no axis crossing Here is the case where no axis of the machine crosses any other axis. It is assumed that sample program 1 is used. In this ...

  • Page 751

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 721 - N3 command• Sample program 1 (no axis crossing)N4 commandN5 commandN6 commandWorkpiececoordinate systemX-Y-ZXYZControlpointXcYcZcZcFeature coordinatesystemXc-Yc-ZcXcYcXcYcZcXcYcZcAn intersection offset vectorbetween the tool axis an...

  • Page 752

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 722 - Operation description 3: When no G43 (tool length compensation) command is specified or if no G53.1 (tool axis direction control) command is specified Sample program 2 of O200 is equivalent to sample program 1 except that sample prog...

  • Page 753

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 723 - Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc N4 commandXc Yc Zc• Sample program 2 (with axes crossing one another)Yc N5 commandWorkpiece coordinate system X-Y-Z XYZ Control point Xc ZcN4 commandFeature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc Xc Yc Zc• ...

  • Page 754

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 724 - N4 commandFeature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc XcYc Zc• Sample program 3 (with axes crossing one another) N5 commandWorkpiece coordinate system X-Y-Z XYZ Control point XcYc ZcN4 commandZ Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc XcYc Zc• ...

  • Page 755

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 725 - - Composite type machine Basic operation This function is also available for a composite type machine in which the tool head rotates on the tool rotation axis and the table rotates on the table rotation axis. The feature coordinate s...

  • Page 756

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 726 - XYZXc'Yc'Zc'• G53.1 commandXYZXc'Yc'Zc'G01 Y10.0 F1000command after G53.1Second feature coordinatesystemXc'-Yc'-Zc'Second feature coordinatesystemXc'-Yc'-Zc' Fig. 22.6 (k) Resetting of the feature coordinate system - Rotation dire...

  • Page 757

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 727 - XYZAXcYcZcYcXc ZcCCW CWRotation to A-45.0CCWRotation to A45.0CCWYcXc ZcPositive rotation direction when parameter No.19684 = 0 Positive rotation direction when parameter No.19684 = 1 G53.1 command G53.1 command Fig. 22.6 (l) Rotation...

  • Page 758

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 728 - - Table rotation type machine Basic operation This function is also usable for a table rotation type machine with two table rotation axes. The feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc is set in the workpiece coordinate system based on the ...

  • Page 759

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 729 - • G53.1 commandG01 X10.0 F1000command after G53.1Yc'Xc'XYZZc'Yc'Xc'XYZZc'Second feature coordinatesystemXc'-Yc'-Zc'Second feature coordinatesystemXc'-Yc'-Zc' Fig. 22.6 (n) Resetting of the feature coordinate system - Angle of the ...

  • Page 760

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 730 - "Output judgment conditions" Tool rotation type or table rotation type machine <1> The "output angles" are represented by the computed rotary axis angle pair whose master axis (first rotary axis) moving angle ...

  • Page 761

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 731 - • Computed angle A -360 × (N + 1) degreesθ1 - 360 × N-360 × N degreesθ2 - 360 × N θ2 - 360 × (N + 1) θ1 - 360 × (N - 1) (*1) 0 degree 360 degreesθ2 - 360 θ1 θ2 θ1 + 360(*2) 360 × (N + 1) degreesθ1 + 360 × N 360 ×...

  • Page 762

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 732 - CAUTION 3 If the setting of the lower limit (parameters No. 19742 and No. 19744) is greater than that of the upper limit (parameters No. 19741 and No. 19743), alarm PS5459 is issued. 4 If there is no calculated angle that falls within...

  • Page 763

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 733 - When the slave axis angle is 0 degree, the direction of the tool axis becomes fixed regardless of the master axis angle. In that case, the master axis does not move from the current angle. An explanation is shown below using a machine...

  • Page 764

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 734 - 22.6.2 Tilted Working Plane Command by Tool Axis Direction Overview By specifying G68.3, a coordinate system (feature coordinate system) where the tool axis direction is the +Z-axis direction can be automatically specified. When a feat...

  • Page 765

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 735 - Coordinate system origin shift (xo,yo,zo)Workpiece coordinate system X-Y-Z Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc αXYZ ZcYcXc G68.3 command Explanation - Feature coordinate system By specifying G68.3, a feature coordinate system with ...

  • Page 766

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 736 - X-axis of feature coordinate system Y-axis of feature coordinate system Vertical axis direction: P Z-axis of feature coordinate system (Tool axis direction: T) XcYc Zc Determination of a feature coordinate system When the tool ...

  • Page 767

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 737 - Workpiece coordinate system X-Y-ZExample: When reference tool axis direction represents +Z-axis direction (with 3 set in parameter No. 19697) Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc X Y Z XcYcZc - Use in combination with tool length comp...

  • Page 768

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 738 - XcYc Zc XYZXYZXYZMachine operation by sample program 1N3 command N6 command N5 command N4 command Workpiece coorditate system X-Y-Z Workpiece coordinate system X-Y-Z Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc N3 block: Performs to...

  • Page 769

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 739 - The machine configuration is "AC type reference tool axis Z-axis". A: 2nd rotation axis (slave) C: 1st rotation axis (master)Control point Tool holder offset value = Parameter No. 19666 Tool length offset = H01 AC type to...

  • Page 770

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 740 - N3 command N4 commandN6 commandN5 commandX Y Z Machine operation by sample program 2 XcYc ZcXc Yc Zc Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc X Y Z XcYc Zc X Y Z XcYcZcX Y Z N3 block: Sets a feature coordinate system according t...

  • Page 771

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 741 - 22.6.3 Tilted Working Plane command with Guidance Overview With the conventional tilted working plane command, a tilted working plane can be specified based on Eulerian angle and tool axis direction. This function enables a tilted work...

  • Page 772

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 742 - Format Format G68.2 P1 Qq X_ Y_ Z_ Iα Jβ Kγ; Tilted working plane command G69 ; Cancel tilted working plane command (M series). G69.1; Cancel tilted working plane command (T series). Explanation of symbols Q : Order in which axes ...

  • Page 773

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 743 - Conversion from the workpiece coordinate system X-Y-Z to coordinate system 1 X’-Y’-Z’ x z yy’z’ α α x z yy’z’ x’’ z’’ y’’β β β γ x z yx’’ z’’ y’’γ γ xc yczc Conversion from coordinate s...

  • Page 774

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 744 - Example of a program G68.2 P1 Q123 X200.0 Y0 Z50.0 I30.0 J0 K90.0 ; G53.1 ; : 22.6.3.2 Tilted working plane command based on three points Overview With the tilted working plane command, a tilted working plane can be specified by spe...

  • Page 775

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 745 - Coordinate system origin shift XcYcZc Workpiece coordinate system X-Y-Z Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-ZcX Y ZαP1P3P2 CAUTION 1 Three G68.2P2 commands (Q1, Q2, and Q3) determine a tilted plane. If the G68.2P2 commands are interrup...

  • Page 776

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 746 - Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc Y X P1 P3 P2 Xc Yc (Yc1) Zc Z Workpiece coordinate system X-Y-Z β α Yc2 On the plane containing three points, there are two directions normal to Xc: Yc1 and Yc2. Angles α and β formed r...

  • Page 777

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 747 - Example of a program G68.2 P2 Q1 X200.0 Y0 Z50.0 ; G68.2 P2 Q2 X200.0 Y100.0 Z50.0 ; G68.2 P2 Q3 X26.795 Y0 Z150.0 ; G53.1 ; . . . 22.6.3.3 Tilted working plane command based on two vectors Overview With the tilted working plane com...

  • Page 778

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 748 - CAUTION 1 The two G68.2P3 commands (Q1 and Q2) determine a tilted plane. The G68.2P3 commands are interrupted, alarm PS5457 is issued. 2 If the angle between the two vectors is 5 degrees or more off the 90 degrees, alarm PS5457 is iss...

  • Page 779

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 749 - Example The example of a program when feature coordinate system like the figure below is used is shown below. XYZ 30°XcZcYc Workpiece coordinate system X-Y-ZFeature coordinate systemXc-Yc-Zc 200.050.0 First vector Second vector Ori...

  • Page 780

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 750 - Format Format G68.2 P4 X_ Y_ Z_ Iα Jβ Kγ; Tilted working plane command G69 ; Cancel tilted working plane command (M series). G69.1; Cancel tilted working plane command (T series). Explanation of symbols X_ Y_ Z_ : Origin of a fe...

  • Page 781

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 751 - X Y ZABYc γPlane P Zc Xc By the third command angle γ, the X-axis and Y-axis of the feature coordinate system are determined. NOTE When vector A and vector B are considered to be parallel with each other (when the angle formed by t...

  • Page 782

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 752 - Example of a program G68.2 P4 X200.0 Y0 Z50.0 I30.0 J0 K90.0 ; G53.1 ; : 22.6.3.5 Absolute multiple command By additionally specifying G68.2 in the tilted working plane command mode, a feature coordinate system produced by additiona...

  • Page 783

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 753 - N6 command XYZN4 command Machine operation by sample program 1 N7 command N5 command XYZXYZXcYcZcXYZFeature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc Xc YcZcXc YcZcXcYcZcG55 Machine origin N4 block: Rot...

  • Page 784

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 754 - Format The format of the tilted working plane command (G68.2) is applicable. Specify the origin of a feature coordinate system in the immediately preceding feature coordinate system. Specification method Incremental multiple command E...

  • Page 785

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 755 - N6 command XYZN4 command Machine operation by sample program 2 N7 command N5 command Xc1 Yc1Zc1XYZXYZXc2Yc2Zc2XYZFeature coordinate system Xc1-Yc1-Zc1 Feature coordinate system Xc2-Yc2-Zc2 Xc1 Yc1Zc1Xc2Yc2Zc2Xc1Yc1Zc1Xc1Yc1Z...

  • Page 786

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 756 - 22.6.4 Tool Center Point Retention Type Tool Axis Direction Control In tool axis direction control after the tilted working plane command, tool center point retention type tool axis direction control can be specified. In tool center po...

  • Page 787

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 757 - CAUTION 6 For the feedrate, the movement speed of the rotation axis is applied. During rapid traverse, it is regarded as the maximum rapid traverse rate, and as the specified speed during cutting feed. 7 Specify tool center point rete...

  • Page 788

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 758 - Z X Z’ Y’ Workpiece coordinate system 1st feature coordinate system Tool length vectorTool center point Control point Z’’ Y’’ 2nd feature coordinate system Table Fig. 22.6.4 (b) Operation of tool center point...

  • Page 789

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 759 - rr Control point Tool length vectorTool center point Rotation centerZ X Z’Y’Workpiece coordinate system Feature coordinate system r: Distance from the tool center point to the rotation center Fig. 22.6.4 (c) Operatio...

  • Page 790

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 760 - Restrictions - Basic restrictions The restrictions imposed on 3-dimensional coordinate conversion also apply to the tilted working plane command. - Increment system The same increment system must be used for the basic three axes use...

  • Page 791

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 761 - - Relationships with other modal commands G41, G42, and G40 (cutter compensation), G43, G49 (tool length compensation), G51.1 and G50.1 (programmable mirror image), and canned cycle commands must have nesting relationships with G68.2....

  • Page 792

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 762 - T • Coordinate system rotation cancel or 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode off (G69.1) • Feed per minute (G98 (G94)) • Feed per revolution (G99 (G94)) - Modal G codes that allow specification of a tilted working p...

  • Page 793

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 763 - 22.7 INCLINED ROTARY AXIS CONTROL Overview The conventional tilted working plane command / tool center point control function / 3-dimensional cutter compensation / 3-dimensional manual feed can be used only for those machines whose too...

  • Page 794

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 764 - B C YZXCB Fig. 22.7 (b) Tool rotation type machine An example of a table rotation type machine is explained below. (See Fig. 22.7 (c).) The machine shown in Fig. 22.7 (c) has rotary axis B (master) whose Y-axis is inclined at an angl...

  • Page 795

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 765 - BZYXABA Fig. 22.7 (d) Composite type machine Format and operation The operation of the tilted working plane command / tool center point control function / 3-dimensional cutter compensation / 3-dimensional manual feed during the inclin...

  • Page 796

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 766 - 22.8 3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION Overview For machines having multiple rotary axes for freely controlling the orientation of a tool axis, this function calculates a tool vector from the positions of these rotary axes. The functio...

  • Page 797

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 767 - The coordinate system in which to execute a program for 3-dimensional cutter compensation is called a programming coordinate system. If, in a 5-axis machine having a table rotation axis, 3-dimensional cutter compensation (tool side off...

  • Page 798

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 768 - 22.8.1 Cutter Compensation in Tool Rotation Type Machine Overview In a 5-axis machine having two tool rotation axes as shown in Fig. 22.8.1 (a), this function can perform cutter compensation. Shown below is a 5-axis machine that has to...

  • Page 799

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 769 - 22.8.1.1 Tool side offset Overview This type of cutter compensation performs 3-dimensional compensation in a plane (compensation plane) perpendicular to the tool vector. CompensationplaneYZXTool vectorCutter compensationamountTool cent...

  • Page 800

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 770 - The following are the notes on type 2. NOTE 1 If one or two of I, J, and K are omitted, the omitted ones of I, J, and K are assumed to be 0. 2 In a block in which all of I, J, and K are omitted, the values of I, J, and K in the previou...

  • Page 801

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 771 - - Operation at startup and cancellation <1> Type A The tool is moved in the same way as for cutter compensation as shown below. Tool G41.2 G40 : Tool center path: Programmed path Operation in linear interpolation : Tool...

  • Page 802

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 772 - <3> Type C When G41.2, G42.2, or G40 is specified as shown below, a linear block specifying movement by the amount of cutter compensation in the direction orthogonal to the movement direction of the block following startup or th...

  • Page 803

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 773 - : Tool center path : Programmed path Example <1>-1 Going outside of corner at acute angle Example <1>-2 Going inside of corner Linear block inserted Tool Tool Workpiece Workpiece : Tool compensation amount Nothing i...

  • Page 804

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 774 - <3> When a command that makes the tool retrace the path of the previous block is specified, the tool path can match the locus of the previous block by changing the G code to change the offset direction. If the G code is left unch...

  • Page 805

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 775 - Y Z VaVb46° 45° Va: Tool vector when A=-46 Vb: Tool vector when A=45 A: End point of N3 B: End point of N4 C: End point of N6 A B C Fig. 22.8.1.1 (k) Tool vector e3 e2 A’ C’ B’ V1V2A’: Point A projected onto the compe...

  • Page 806

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 776 - Ua: Vector AB Ub: Vector BC Va: Tool vector between A and B Vb: Tool vector between B and C Wa: Va × Ua Wb: Vb × Ub (Here, × represents an outer product operator.) Y Z VaVbA B C X WaWbUaUb Fig. 22.8.1.1 (m) Conceptual diagram A’:...

  • Page 807

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 777 - Example: N4 Y-200 Z-200 Q1 At B', a vector (V) perpendicular to A'B' is generated. e3 e2 A’ C’ B’ V Fig. 22.8.1.1 (o) Q1 command A perpendicular vector can also be generated by specifying G41.2 or G42.1 in the next block as ...

  • Page 808

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 778 - ZX Y Tool Tool axis Start pointEnd pointToolTool center path created in the compensation plane(Compensation plane = XY plane) Compensation vector created in the compensation plane Actual compensation vectorMove commandProjected Fig. ...

  • Page 809

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 779 - Composite type machine <1> The "output angles" are represented by the computed rotary axis angle pair whose table (second rotary axis) moving angle is smaller. ↓ ↓ When the table movi...

  • Page 810

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 780 - • Computed angle A-360 × (N + 1) degreesθ1 - 360 × N-360 × N degreesθ2 - 360 × Nθ2 - 360 × (N + 1)θ1 - 360 × (N - 1)(*1)0 degree360 degreesθ2 - 360θ1θ2θ1 + 360(*2)360 × (N + 1) degreesθ1 + 360 × N360 × N degreesθ2...

  • Page 811

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 781 - • BC type tool axis Z X YZC-axis: First rotation axis (master) B-axis: Second rotation axis (slave) Fig. 22.8.1.1 (u) BC type tool axis Z The following two pairs of "computed basic angles" exist that direct the tool axis...

  • Page 812

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 782 - • BC type tool axis Z XYZC Fig. 22.8.1.1 (v) BC type tool axis Z When the current rotary axis angles are (B 45 degrees; C 90 degrees), the "output angles" are (B 0 degree; C 90 degrees). - Angle of the rotary axis for t...

  • Page 813

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 783 - Composite type machine <1> Of the angle pairs whose master and slave axis angles are both within the specified movement range, the rotary axis angle pair whose table (second rotary axis) moving angle is smaller represents the &qu...

  • Page 814

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 784 - 360 × (N + 1) degrees360 × N degrees • Computed angle A Current position AMovement range A θ1 + 360 × N θ2 + 360 × N θ2 + 360 × (N - 1) θ1 + 360 × (N + 1) Fig. 22.8.1.1 (x) Computed angle of rotary axis A and its curren...

  • Page 815

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 785 - 22.8.1.2 Leading edge offset Overview Leading edge offset is a type of cutter compensation used when a workpiece is machined with the edge of a tool. The tool is automatically shifted by the amount of cutter compensation on the line wh...

  • Page 816

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 786 - <1> When the tool vector is inclined in the tool movement direction Tool Tool compensation vector (VT)VM G41.3(VC) G40 : Tool center path : Programmed path Fig. 22.8.1.2 (b) When the tool vector is inclined in the tool movem...

  • Page 817

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 787 - Tool center path (path after compensation)Programmed path VM1 VM2VT1VC1VC2 = VC3VT2VM4 There is one block that specifies no movement Fig. 22.8.1.2 (e) When there is one block that specifies no movement If block 3 specifies no moveme...

  • Page 818

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 788 - (2) If (180 - Δθ) ≤ θ ≤ 180, θ is regarded as 180°. θΔθ VTnV Mn+1 Fig. 22.8.1.2 (h) Determination of θ = 180° (3) If (90 − Δθ) ≤ θ ≤ (90 + Δθ), θ is regarded as 90°. θ Δθ V Tn V Mn+1 θΔθVTnVMn+1 Fig...

  • Page 819

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 789 - Tool center path (path after compensation) Programmed path VMVMVT1 VCVCVT2VMVT3VMVCVCVMVM6VT4VCVT5 Fig. 22.8.1.2 (l) When θ = 90° is determined 1 If the previous compensation vector (VCn-1) points in the same direction (-(VMn × V...

  • Page 820

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 790 - Programmed point (pivot point) WorkpieceTool center Tool sideDistance from programmed point(pivot point) to cutting point(parameter setting) Vector from programmed point (pivotpoint) to cutting point Cutting point Vector of three-dimen...

  • Page 821

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 791 - Cutter compensation vector (VD') is calculated on a compensation plane perpendicular tothe tool axis direction.The cutter compensation vector (VD') on the compensation plane is converted to theoriginal Cartesian coordinate system, and ...

  • Page 822

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 792 - 22.8.2 Cutter Compensation in Table Rotation Type Machine Overview Cutter compensation can be performed for a 5-axis machine having a rotary table as shown in Fig. 22.8.2 (a). Shown below is a 5-axis machine that has table rotation axi...

  • Page 823

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 793 - NOTE 1 In a table rotation type machine (parameter No. 19680 = 12), if an attempt is made to issue G41.4 or G42.4 with bit 1 (SPG) of parameter No. 19607 equal to 0, alarm PS0010 is generated. 2 In a table rotation type machine, if an ...

  • Page 824

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 794 - - Canceling the cutter compensation G40 IP_ ; G40: Cutter compensation cancellation (group 07) IP_: Value specified for axis movement - Selecting an offset plane When bit 1 (PTD) of parameter No. 19746 is 1, compensation is perform...

  • Page 825

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 795 - - Cutter compensation The function for 3-dimensional cutter compensation in a table rotation type machine basically performs operations in conformance with 3-dimensional cutter compensation in a tool rotation type machine. The operat...

  • Page 826

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 796 - Note, however, the distance to go is always that in the programming coordinate system. NOTE 1 If the 3-dimensional cutter compensation mode is entered when the table coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system, look...

  • Page 827

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 797 - 22.8.3 Cutter Compensation in Composite Type Machine Overview This function can perform 3-dimensional cutter compensation in a 5-axis machine having a rotary table and a tool axis as shown in Fig. 22.8.3 (a). Shown below is a 5-axis ma...

  • Page 828

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 798 - When bit 1 (SPG) of parameter No. 19607 is 1 G41.5 (or G42.5) IP_ D_ ; G41.5: Cutter compensation left (group 07) G42.5: Cutter compensation right (group 07) IP_: Value specified for axis moving as viewed from the programming coordina...

  • Page 829

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 799 - NOTE 5 They can be used only with the settings that select the table coordinate system as a programming coordinate system (bit 5 (WKP) of parameter No.19696 = 0 and bit 4 (TBP) of parameter No.19746 = 1). If an attempt is made to issue...

  • Page 830

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 800 - - Startup When 3-dimensional cutter compensation in a composite type machine (G41.2 or G42.2, G41.5 or G42.5, or a D code other than D0) is specified in the offset cancel mode, the CNC enters the offset mode. Startup is specified wit...

  • Page 831

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 801 - NOTE 1 If the 3-dimensional cutter compensation mode is entered when the table coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system, look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is automatically enabled. Be sure ...

  • Page 832

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 802 - 22.8.4 Interference Check and Interference Avoidance Overview By setting bit 1 (NI5) of parameter No. 19608 to 1, this function performs an interference check on the plane (compensation plane) perpendicular to the tool axis direction r...

  • Page 833

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 803 - Z Y X Z’Y’X’Z’’ Y’’X’’ Fig. 22.8.4 (c) Composite type - Interference avoidance V10 N10 N20 N30 N40N50V20 V30V40VaY X Compensation plane Machining program N10 X8.010 Y77.91 Z93.345 B21.02 C22.001 N20 X10.221 YY60.932...

  • Page 834

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 804 - NOTE Strictly speaking, if the tool axis direction at the N20 end point differs from the tool axis direction at the N50 start point, correct intersection point calculation is not possible. For this reason, the maximum permissible ang...

  • Page 835

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 805 - 22.8.5 Restrictions 22.8.5.1 Restrictions common to machine configurations - Corner rounding (G39) In the mode for 3-dimensional cutter compensation, G39 cannot be specified. Specifying G39 causes an alarm. - Reset Whenever a reset ...

  • Page 836

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 806 - • Wheel wear compensation G41 • Tool offset G45, G46, G47, G48 • Local coordinate system G52 • Machine coordinate system G53 • Workpiece coordinate system setting G54-G59, G54.1 • Rotary table dynamic fixture offset G54.2 ...

  • Page 837

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 807 - 22.8.5.2 Restriction on tool rotation type - Unavailable commands (leading edge offset) In the G41.3 mode, the following commands cannot be specified: - G functions of group 01 other than G00 and G01 - Use with tool center point con...

  • Page 838

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 808 - When the table coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system, the restrictions to apply will be explained below. - Type 2 When a type 2 command (G41.6/G42.6 command) is executed, the table coordinate system needs to ...

  • Page 839

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 809 - (Correct example) G90 G00 A0.0 G43.4 H1 G01 Z100.0 F1000. G41.2 D1 ← After G43.4 is specified, G41.2 is specified without A-axis movement. : (Wrong example) G90 G00 A0.0 G43.4 H1 G01 Z100.0 A30.0 F1000. G41.2 D1 ← After G4...

  • Page 840

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 810 - Modal G codes that allow specification of 3-dimensional cutter compensation When the table coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system, 3-dimensional cutter compensation can be specified in the modal G code states...

  • Page 841

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 811 - 22.8.6 Examples O100 is a sample program. This is an example in which each side of a square is cut at an angle of 30 degrees on the B-axis in a composite type machine. Programs 1 to 3 all perform the same machining. Program 1: Type 1 ...

  • Page 842

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 812 - By using type 2 as in program 3, the same program can be used with machines with different configurations, regardless of whether the machine configuration is the tool rotation type, table rotation type, or composite type. ...

  • Page 843

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 813 - Operation as viewed from the table coordinate system (X-100.0,Y-100.0)(B 30.0)(C 45.0)(C 135.0) (X-50.0,Y50.0)(X50.0,Y50.0)X'Y'(B 30.0) (B 30.0) (B 30.0)(C 225.0) (C 315.0) (X-100.0,Y-100.0) Fig. 22.8.6 (b) Illustrat...

  • Page 844

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 814 - Exploded view of each block Operation at control point (machine coordinate values) Block N70 (C 45.0)(C 135.0)(C 135.0)X'Y'Block N60 Y"X"Y"X"(C 225.0)X'Y'X'Y' : Table coo...

  • Page 845

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 815 - Block N90 X'Y'Block N80 Y"X"Y"X"X'Y'(C 225.0)(C 315.0)(C 315.0)(C 405.0) Fig. 22.8.6 (d) Exploded View of Each Block (2)

  • Page 846

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 816 - 22.9 EXPANSION OF THE WAY TO SET 5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PARAMETERS Overview By setting bit 7 (SPM) of parameter No. 19754 to 1, the parameters of the 5-axis machining functions can be set with reference to the machine coordinate of ...

  • Page 847

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 817 - If the workpiece offset value (C,B) is changed to (90,90), the machine configuration with the absolute coordinates of C0 B0 (machine coordinates: C90B90) (Fig. 22.9 (b)) changes as below. • Second rotation axis: About the -X-axis •...

  • Page 848

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 818 - Setting example (composite type) This function is explained below, using a composite type machine that looks like in Fig. 22.9 (e), below, when the machine coordinates are B0C0. (B-axis (first rotation axis): About the Y-axis, C-axis (...

  • Page 849

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 819 - 23.MUITI-PATH CONTROLFUNCTION23 MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION Chapter 23, "MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 23.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................

  • Page 850

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 820 - 23. MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION Example) For a system with four paths Program folder for path1Program folder for path2Program folder for path3Path 1programanalysisPath 2programanalysisPath 3programanalysisPath 1positioncontrolPath 2positioncontrolPath 3positionco...

  • Page 851

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 821 - 23.MUITI-PATH CONTROLFUNCTION - Waiting specified with binary values When bit 1 (MWP) of parameter No. 8103 is set to 0, the value specified at address P is assumed to be obtained using binary values. The following table lists the path numbers and corresponding ...

  • Page 852

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 822 - 23. MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION Path number Value (decimal number) Path number Value (decimal number) 1 1 6 6 2 2 7 7 3 3 8 8 4 4 9 9 5 5 10 0 To make all of paths 1, 2, and 3 wait for one another, the P value is a number consisting of 1, 2, and 3. Example) 123 ...

  • Page 853

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 823 - 23.MUITI-PATH CONTROLFUNCTIONO0300;G50 X Z ;G00 X Z T0303;M102 P7; ................. <2>O0100;G50 X Z ;G00 X Z T0101;M03 S1000;..M101 P3; .................. <1>G01 X Z F ;..M102 P7; .................. <2>M103 P7;...

  • Page 854

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 824 - 23. MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION O0300;G50 X Z ;G00 X Z T0303;M102 P123; ............. <2>O0100;G50 X Z ;G00 X Z T0101;M03 S1000;..M101 P12; ................ <1>G01 X Z F ;..M102 P123; .............. <2>M103 P123;...

  • Page 855

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 825 - 23.MUITI-PATH CONTROLFUNCTION23.3 COMMON MEMORY BETWEEN EACH PATH Overview In a multi-path system, this function enables data within the specified range to be accessed as data common to all paths. The data includes tool compensation memory and custom macro common...

  • Page 856

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 826 - 23. MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION NOTE 1 If the value of parameter No. 6036 or 6037 exceeds the maximum number of macro common variables, the maximum number of macro common variables is assumed. 2 Common variables #150 to #199, #150 to #499, and #600 to #999 are o...

  • Page 857

    B-63944EN/04 PROGRAMMING - 827 - 23.MUITI-PATH CONTROLFUNCTIONNOTE For the method of spindle command selection, refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool builder. 23.5 SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE/SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL Overview In multi-path control, the synchronous control function, composite ...

  • Page 858

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/04 - 828 - 23. MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION - Composite control • Exchanges the move commands for different axes of different path. Example) Exchanging the commands for the X1 and X2 axes (in the case of turning) → Upon the execution of a command programmed for path 1, ...

  • Page 859

    III. OPERATION

  • Page 860

  • Page 861

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 831 - 1 GENERAL Chapter 1, "GENERAL", consists of the following sections: 1.1 MANUAL OPERATION..................................................................................................................831 1.2 TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING - AUTOM...

  • Page 862

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 832 - - The tool movement by manual operation Using machine operator's panel switches, pushbuttons, or the manual handle, the tool can be moved along each axis. Tool WorkpieceMachine operator's panel Manual pulse generator Fig. 1.1 (b) The tool movement by ma...

  • Page 863

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 833 - Explanation - Memory operation After the program is once registered in memory of CNC, the machine can be run according to the program instructions. This operation is called memory operation. CNC MachineMemory Fig. 1.2 (b) Memory operation - MDI operati...

  • Page 864

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 834 - - Start and stop Pressing the cycle start pushbutton causes automatic operation to start. By pressing the feed hold or reset pushbutton, automatic operation pauses or stops. By specifying the program stop or program termination command in the program, th...

  • Page 865

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 835 - ToolTable Fig. 1.4.1 (a) Dry run - Feedrate override Check the program by changing the feedrate specified in the program. (See Section III-5.2.) ToolFeedrate specified by program :100 mm/min.Feedrate after feed rateoverride (20%) : 20 mm/min.Workpiece Fi...

  • Page 866

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 836 - 1.4.2 How to View the Position Display Change without Running the Machine Explanation - Machine Lock MDI XYZTool The tool remains stopped, and only thepositional displays of the axes change. Workpiece Fig. 1.4.2 (a) Machine Lock - Auxiliary function ...

  • Page 867

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 837 - Explanation - Offset value SettingDisplayScreen Keys MDI Geometry Wear compensation compensation Tool compensation number 1 12.3 25.0 Tool compensation number 2 20.0 40.0 Tool compensation number 3 CNC memory Fig. 1.6 (b) Displaying and Setting Offs...

  • Page 868

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 838 - SettingScreen Keys MDI DisplayingCNC MemoryProgram Automatic operation Movement of the machine Operational characteristics Setting data Inch/Metric switching Ì ÝSelection of I/O device Mirror image ON/OFF setting : : : Fig. 1.6 (d) Displaying and sett...

  • Page 869

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 839 - - Data protection key A key called the data protection key can be defined. It is used to prevent part programs, offset values, parameters, and setting data from being registered, modified, or deleted erroneously (See Chapter III-12). Program Offset value...

  • Page 870

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 840 - Fig. 1.7.1 (b) 1.7.2 Current Position Display The current position of the tool is displayed with the coordinate values. Moreover, the distance from the current position to a target point can be displayed as a remaining travel distance. (See Subsections ...

  • Page 871

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 841 - Fig. 1.7.2 (b) 1.7.3 Alarm Display When a trouble occurs during operation, error code and alarm message are displayed on the screen. (See Section III-7.1.) See APPENDIX G for the list of error codes and their meanings. Fig. 1.7.3 (a)

  • Page 872

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 842 - 1.7.4 Parts Count Display, Run Time Display The position display screen displays a run time, cycle time, and parts count. (See Subsection lll-12.3.3.) Fig. 1.7.4 (a) 1.8 ADJUSTMENT OF THE BRIGHTNESS OF THE MONOCHROME LCD The brightness of the monochrome ...

  • Page 873

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 843 - Fig. 1.8 (a) Adjustment of the brightness of the SETTING screen 3 Move the cursor to the CONTRAST item. 4 When soft key [(OPRT)] is pressed, soft keys [ON:1] and [OFF:0] are displayed. Each time soft key [ON:1] is pressed, the brightness of the screen...

  • Page 874

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 844 - 2 OPERATIONAL DEVICES As operational devices, setting and display devices attached to the CNC, and machine operator's panels are available. For machine operator's panels, refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool builder. Chapter 2, &qu...

  • Page 875

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 845 - 2.1.2 8.4" LCD CNC Display Panel 2.1.3 10.4" LCD CNC Display Panel

  • Page 876

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 846 - 2.1.4 12.1" LCD CNC Display Panel 2.1.5 15" LCD CNC Display Panel

  • Page 877

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 847 - 2.1.6 Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key) Unit with machining center system Reset keyHelp keyAddress/numeric keysEdit keysCancel (CAN) keyInput keyShift keyPage change keys(Page key)Cursor keysFunction keysAUX keyUppercase/lowercaseswitch keyCTRL keyAL...

  • Page 878

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 848 - 2.1.7 Standard MDI Unit (QWERTY Key) Address keys Reset key Help key Uppercase/lowercase switch key Shift key AUX key CTRL key ALT key TAB key Page change keys (Page key) Cursor keys Function keys Input key Cancel (CAN) key Edit keys Numeric ke...

  • Page 879

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 849 - Unit with lathe system Reset key Help key Shift key Page change keys (Page key) Cursor keys Function keys Edit keys Cancel (CAN) key Input key Address/numeric keys

  • Page 880

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 850 - 2.2 OPERATIONAL DEVICES Table 2.2 (a) Explanation of the MDI keyboard No. Name Explanation 1 RESET key Press this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an alarm, etc. 2 HELP key Press this key to use the help function when uncertain about the opera...

  • Page 881

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 851 - No. Name Explanation 11 Page change keys (Page keys) Two kinds of page change keys are described below. : This key is used to changeover the page on the screen in the forwarddirection. : This key is used to changeover the page on the screen i...

  • Page 882

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 852 - 2.3 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS The function keys are used to select the type of screen (function) to be displayed. When a soft key (section select soft key) is pressed immediately after a function key, the screen (section) corresponding to the...

  • Page 883

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 853 - • Chapter selection soft keys • Operation selection soft keys • Auxiliary menu of operation selection soft keys Depending on the state, the button images of the soft keys change. From the button images, which state the soft keys are assu...

  • Page 884

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 854 - Press this key to display the custom screen 1 (conversational macro screen or C language executor screen). Press this key to display the custom screen 2 (conversational macro screen or C language executor screen). 2.3.3 Soft Keys By...

  • Page 885

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 855 - (6) MONI Selects the screen for displaying the servo axis load meter, serial spindle load meter, and speedometer. (7) 3-D MANUAL Displays a handle pulse interrupt amount in 3-dimensional manual feed. Program screen The chapter selection soft k...

  • Page 886

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 856 - OFFSET SETTINGWORK (OPRT) Page 1 + (1) (2)(3)(4)(5) MACRO OPR TOOL MANAGER(OPRT) Page 2 + (6) (7)(8)(9)(10) OFST.2 W.SHFTGEOM.2 (OPRT) Page 3 + (11) (12)(13)(14)(15) PR-LV EXTEND OFFSET (OPRT) Page 4 + CHUCK TAIL LANG. PROTECTGUARD(OPRT) Pag...

  • Page 887

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 857 - No. Chapter menu Description (23) PROTECT Selects the screen for setting data protection. (24) GUARD Selects the screen for setting wrong operation prevention. (29) TOOL LIFE Selects the screen for operations and setting related to tool life ma...

  • Page 888

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 858 - FSSB PRMTUNP.MATEMGR. (OPRT) Page 6 + (26) (27)(28)(29)(30) EMBED PORT PCMCIALAN ETHNET BOARDPROFI MASTER(OPRT) Page 7 + (31) (32)(33)(34)(35) M CODE 3D ERRCOMP (OPRT) Page 8 + (36) (37)(38)(39)(40) (OPRT) Page 9 + (41) (42)(43)(4...

  • Page 889

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 859 - No. Chapter menu Description (28) PRMTUN Selects the screen for setting parameters necessary for start-up and tuning. (31) EMBED PORT Selects the screen for making settings related to the embedded Ethernet (embedded port). (32) PCMCIA LAN Sele...

  • Page 890

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 860 - When the dynamic graphic display function is enabled: DRAW PARAM PATH EXEC ANIME EXEC TOOL POS (OPRT) Page 1 (1) (2)(3)(4)(5) Table 2.3.3 (g) Graphic No. Chapter menu Description (1) DRAW PARAM Selects the screen for setting drawing parame...

  • Page 891

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 861 - 2.4 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICES External I/O devices such as a memory card are available. By using an external I/O device such as a memory card, the following data can be input or output: 1. Programs 2. Offset data 3. Parameters 4. Custom macro common...

  • Page 892

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 862 - I/O CHANNEL or foreground input Set channels to be used for data input/output. I/O CHANNEL (0 to 5) =0 : Channel 1 =1 : Channel 1 =2 : Channel 2 =3 : Channel 3 : : : Input/output to and from the memory card interface, etc. is also possible. ...

  • Page 893

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 863 - Fig. 2.5.1 (a) Position screen (for machining center system) 4 Check that the fan motor is rotating. WARNING Until the positional or alarm screen is displayed at the power on, do not touch them. Some keys are used for the maintenance or sp...

  • Page 894

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 864 - 3 MANUAL OPERATION MANUAL OPERATION are twelve kinds as follows : 3.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN .............................................................................864 3.2 JOG FEED (JOG) ..............................................

  • Page 895

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 865 - 3 Press the feed axis and direction selection switch corresponding to the axis and direction for reference position return. Continue pressing the switch until the tool returns to the reference position. The tool can be moved along three axes simul...

  • Page 896

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 866 - Manual operation is allowed for one axis at a time. 3 axes can be selected at a time by bit 0 (JAX) of parameter No.1002. While a switch is pressed, the toolmoves in the direction specified bythe switch. Z X Y Fig. 3.2 (a) Jog Feed (JOG) Proced...

  • Page 897

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 867 - - Rapid traverse prior to reference position return If reference position return is not performed after power-on, pushing rapid traverse button does not actuate the rapid traverse but the remains at the JOG feedrate. This function can be disabled...

  • Page 898

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 868 - 3.4 MANUAL HANDLE FEED In the handle mode, the tool can be minutely moved by rotating the manual pulse generator on the machine operator's panel. Select the axis along which the tool is to be moved with the handle feed axis selection switches. The...

  • Page 899

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 869 - - When manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is specified The amount of pulses exceeding the rapid traverse rate can be saved by CNC as B. And amount of pulses B will be output as pulses C. t Rapid traverse rate A: Amount of p...

  • Page 900

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 870 - - Upper feedrate limit in manual handle feed The upper feedrate limit depends on the input signal (maximum manual handle feedrate switch signal HNDLF) from the PMC as follows: • When HNDLF is set to 0, the feedrate is clamped to the manual rapi...

  • Page 901

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 871 - 3.5 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF Whether the distance the tool is moved by manual operation is added to the coordinates can be selected by turning the manual absolute switch on or off on the machine operator's panel. When the switch is turned on, th...

  • Page 902

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 872 - X YSwitch ONSwitch OFFManualoperation(100.0 , 100.0)(200.0 , 150.0)(120.0 , 200.0)(220.0 , 250.0) Fig. 3.5 (d) Manual operation after the end of block - Manual operation after a feed hold Coordinates when the feed hold button is pressed while b...

  • Page 903

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 873 - ProgramN1 G90 G01 X100. Y100. F500 ;N2 X200.0 ;N3 Y150.0 ; X YSwitch ONSwitch OFFManualoperation(100.0 , 100.0)(200.0 , 150.0)(200.0 , 100.0) N1 N2 N3 Fig. 3.5 (g) When a movement command in the next block is only one axis - When the next move b...

  • Page 904

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 874 - • Manual operation during cornering This is an example when manual operation is performed during cornering. VA2', VB1', and VB2' are vectors moved in parallel with VA2, VB1 and VB2 by the amount of manual movement. The new vectors are calcula...

  • Page 905

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 875 - 3.6 MANUAL LINEAR/CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION In manual handle feed or jog feed, the following types of feed operations are possible along with the conventional feed operation with simultaneous single-axis control (for X, Y, Z, or other axis). • Fe...

  • Page 906

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 876 - Explanations Procedure 1 For manual handle feed, select the manual handle feed mode. For jog feed, select the jog feed mode. 2 For manual handle feed, use the handle feed axis selection switch to select the feed axis (simultaneous 1-axis feed in t...

  • Page 907

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 877 - Y X Path of travel using the approach handle Path of travel using the guidance handle Specified straight line Tool Linear feed (3) Circular feed (simultaneous 2-axis control) A single manual handle operation can move the tool from the current ...

  • Page 908

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 878 - Refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder. - Jog feed In jog feed, the tool can be moved along a specified axis (X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, etc.), along a rotated straight line (linear feed), or along a circle (circular feed). (1) F...

  • Page 909

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 879 - - The amount of the shift for manual handle feed When this function is effective, parameters Nos. 12350 and 12351 used to determine the magnification of manual handle feed for each axis are invalid and the values of parameters Nos. 7113 and 7114...

  • Page 910

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 880 - Explanation - Manual rigid tapping Manual rigid tapping is enabled by bit 0 (HRG) of parameter No. 5203 to 1. - Cancellation of rigid mode To cancel rigid mode, specify G80 as same the normal rigid tapping. When the reset key is pressed, rigid ...

  • Page 911

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 881 - Limitation - Excessive error check In manual rigid tapping, only an excessive error during movement is checked. - Tool axis direction handle feed Tool axis direction handle feed is disabled. - Extraction override In manual rigid tapping, the ...

  • Page 912

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 882 - Procedure Manual numerical command Procedure 1 Press the jog switch (one of the mode selection switches). 2 Press function key . 3 Press soft key [JOG] on the screen. The following manual numerical command screen is displayed. Fig. 3.8 (a) Manual...

  • Page 913

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 883 - 4 Enter the required commands by using address keys and numeric keys on the MDI panel, then press soft key [INPUT] or the key to set the entered data. Fig. 3.8 (b) Example of inputting numerical value The following data can be set: 1. G00: Posi...

  • Page 914

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 884 - Explanation - Positioning An amount of travel is given as a numeric value, preceded by an address such as X, Y, or Z. This is always regarded as being an incremental command, regardless of whether G90 or G91 is specified. Manual rapid traverse se...

  • Page 915

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 885 - - 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position return (G30) The tool returns directly to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position without passing through any intermediate points, regardless of the specified amount of travel. To select a reference position,...

  • Page 916

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 886 - NOTE 1 B codes can be renamed "U," "V," "W," "A," or "C" by setting parameter No. 3460. If the new name is the same as an axis name address, "B" is used. Note that "U," "V,...

  • Page 917

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 887 - (4) When a reset or emergency stop is applied The M, S, T, and B functions remain effective even upon the occurrence of the above events, with the exception of (4). - Modal information Modal G codes and addresses used in automatic operation or M...

  • Page 918

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 888 - If the commands are executed for any such axis, a "THIS COMMAND CAN NOT EXECUTE" warning is generated. - Functions that cannot be used Commands cannot be specified for the following functions. • Extended axis name • Extended spindl...

  • Page 919

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 889 - 3.9 3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED This function enables the use of the following functions. • 3-dimensional manual feed - Tool axis direction handle feed/tool axis direction JOG feed/tool axis direction incremental feed - Tool axis right-angle dire...

  • Page 920

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 890 - No.19687=2 (the slave rotation axis (B-axis) is about the Y-axis) No.19697=3 (the reference tool axis direction is the Z-axis direction) No.19698=0 (angle RA when the reference tool axis direction is tilted) No.19699=0 (angle RB when the refer...

  • Page 921

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 891 - CB ZY X WorkpieceCBTool axis direction - Tool axis direction feed in the tilted working plane command mode If bit 0 (TWD) of parameter No. 12320 is set to 1, the feed direction of the tool axis direction feed in the tilted working plane command...

  • Page 922

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 892 - Feedrate The feedrate is the dry run rate (parameter No.1410). The manual feedrate override feature is available. If bit 2 (JFR) of parameter No. 12320 is set to 1, the feedrate of a rotation axis is the jog feedrate of the axis to be rotated ...

  • Page 923

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 893 - (Example) When the tool rotation axes are B-axis and C-axis and the tool axis direction is the Z-axis direction CB Z YX Tool axis right-angle direction 2 Tool axis direction B C Tool axis right-angle direction 1 Y XZBC - Latitude and longitude ...

  • Page 924

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 894 - Tool axis right-angle direction 1 (longitude direction): R1 Tool axis right-angle direction 2 (latitude direction): R2 Normal axis direction: PTool axis direction: T - Tool axis right-angle direction feed in the tilted working plane command mod...

  • Page 925

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 895 - <2> The tool axis right-angle direction feed mode signal (RGHTH) is set to "1" and the table base signal (TB_BASE) is set to "0". <3> The feed axis direction selection signal (+Jn, -Jn (where n = 1 to the number o...

  • Page 926

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 896 - B ZY X B B TableWorkpiece - Tool tip center rotation handle feed The tool tip center rotation handle feed is enabled when the following four conditions are satisfied: <1> Handle mode is selected. <2> The tool tip center rotation ...

  • Page 927

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 897 - Feedrate clamp The feedrate is clamped so that the synthetic speed of the linear axes (in the tangential direction) does not exceed the manual rapid traverse rate (parameter No.1424) (of any moving linear axis). The feedrate is also clamped so ...

  • Page 928

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 898 - BBZYXTable vertical direction - Table-based vertical direction feed in the tilted working plane command mode If bit 0 (TWD) of parameter No. 12320 is set to 1, the feed direction of the table-based vertical direction feed in the tilted working p...

  • Page 929

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 899 - If bit 2 (JFR) of parameter No. 12320 is set to 1, the feedrate is the jog feedrate (parameter No. 1423) for a driven feed axis direction selection signal. The manual feedrate override feature is available. Feedrate clamp The feedrate is clamp...

  • Page 930

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 900 - (Example) When the table rotation axis is the B-axis, and the table vertical direction is the Z-axis direction BZY X Table horizontal direction 2 Table horizontal direction 1 XYZBBTable vertical direction - Latitude and longitude directions Wh...

  • Page 931

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 901 - Table-based vertical direction: T Table-based horizontal direction 2 (latitude direction): R2 Table-based horizontal direction 1 (longitude direction): R1 Normal axis direction: P - Table-based horizontal direction feed in the tilted working pl...

  • Page 932

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 902 - • +J1 : Table horizontal direction 1 + • -J1 : Table horizontal direction 1 - • +J2 : Table horizontal direction 2 + • -J2 : Table horizontal direction 2 - Feedrate The feedrate is the dry run rate (parameter No.1410). The manual feedr...

  • Page 933

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 903 - 3.10.1 Procedure for Reference Position Establishment Procedure (1) Select the JOG mode, and set the manual reference position return selection signal ZRN to "1". (2) Set a direction selection signal(+J1,-J1,+J2,-J2,…) for a target ax...

  • Page 934

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 904 - 3.10.2 Reference Position Return (1) When the reference position is not established and the axis moved by turning the feed axis direction signal (+J1,-J1,+J2,-J2,...) to "1" in REF mode, the reference position establishment procedure is ...

  • Page 935

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 905 - If a parameter value for the master axis differs from the corresponding parameter value for the slave axis, alarm SV1051 is issued. NOTE When this function is used with axis synchronization control axes for which the operation mode is switched b...

  • Page 936

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 906 - 3.10.5 Axis Control by PMC In PMC axis control, if the reference position return command (axis control command code 05H) is issued for an axis having a distance coded linear scale, reference position return is performed according to the reference ...

  • Page 937

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 907 - (4) In this procedure, the axis does not stop until two, three or four reference marks are detected. If this procedure is started at the position near the scale end, CNC can not detect three or four reference marks and the axis does not stop until...

  • Page 938

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 908 - This function enables high-speed high-precision detection by using High-resolution serial output circuit. It is available that using maximum stroke 30 meters length. - Connection It is available under linear motor system and full closed system....

  • Page 939

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 909 - The timing chart for this procedures is given below. FL rate JOG ZRN +J1 Reference mark ZRF1 Feedrate - Procedure for reference position establishment through automatic operation If an automatic reference position return (G28) is specified befo...

  • Page 940

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 910 - • To the parameters, which relate to this function (except No.1883, No.1884), the same value must be set for the master axis and for the slave axis. • The linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial) should be applied for the mast...

  • Page 941

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 911 - CAUTION 3 On flexible synchronization control mode, reference position can't be established. 4 Straightness compensation function When the reference point establishment of moving axis is executed after the establishment of compensation axis, the...

  • Page 942

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 912 - - Backward movement The "backward movement " is that the program executed forward once is executed backward by turning a manual handle in the negative direction. The program can be executed backward only for the block executed forward. ...

  • Page 943

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 913 - The single block signal and the feed hold signal are effective in the checking mode. When the execution of a program is stopped by the single block stop or the feed hold stop, it is necessary to turn ST signal from "1" to "0" i...

  • Page 944

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 914 - - G-code If G-code that changes modal information is commanded in backward movement, the modal information of previous block is executed. Example) N1G99; N2G01X_F_; N3X_Z_; N4G98; ............................ backward movement starts from thi...

  • Page 945

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 915 - NOTE When setting the parameter RVN, backward movement prohibition is enabled except the M-code which was set in the grouping but backward movement can be enabled for the following M-code exceptionally. 1. Subprogram Call by M98/M99. 2. Subprog...

  • Page 946

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 916 - - S and T-code A modal value of the previous block is output. When movement command and S-code or T-code is commanded in the same block, the timing of the output of the S-code and T-code is different. Because, the timing where S-code and T-code a...

  • Page 947

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 917 - The timing of T-code output of N7 and N8 in O1000 shown in the example above is as follows. N6 N7 N8T33 output Forward movement : with T22 N6 N7N8T22 output Backward movement (When parameter STO is set to “0”) : N6 N7N8T33 outputBackward ...

  • Page 948

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 918 - • The block including backward movement prohibition G-code (which is not described in the paragraph "G-code") • The block which is executed while in modal including backward movement prohibition G-code (which is not described in the ...

  • Page 949

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 919 - Fig. 3.12 (b) " NO RVRS." status display Besides, when direction change prohibition signal MNCHG is set to "1" and the direction of program’s execution is changed by manual handle, this status display changes from "M.H...

  • Page 950

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 920 - Fig. 3.12 (c) "NO.CHAG." status display Limitation - Movement in automatic operation by DNC operation mode(RMT) In the automatic operation by DNC operation mode(RMT), the backward movement is prohibited though the forward movement is ...

  • Page 951

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 921 - [Forward movement](1)G53 X0 Z0(3) G0 U50 W50(2) G1 W100.M3 S100 F1.The block of (2) moves with M3 S100 F1.[Backward movement](1)G53 X0 Z0(3) G0 U50. W50.(2)G1 W100.M5 S0 F1.The block of (2) moves with M5 S0 F1. - Non linear interpolation type po...

  • Page 952

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 922 - - Multiple path simultaneous check in the multi-path system When using the manual handle retrace function at the same time in multiple paths, the timing of block operation may slightly differ between these paths due to the repetition of forward a...

  • Page 953

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 923 - - Multi Spindle During the backward movement, both TYPE-A and TYPE-B multi spindle control may not be operated exactly. - Path Table Operation In path table operation, the backward movement is prohibited. Furthermore, in forward movement, rega...

  • Page 954

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 924 - Notes NOTE 1 When a single auxiliary function is specified individually, carry out the regular auxiliary function completion sequence. Reverse movement becomes possible after moving to the next (or previous) block. 2 If a move command and an auxil...

  • Page 955

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 925 - Example) Re-forward movement of manual handle retrace in a 4-path system Path1 Path2 Path3 Path4 O1001 N1 G1 X5.0 F1 N2 X12.0 N3 X22.0 N4 X30.0 N5 X34.5 N6 X50.0 M30 O1001 N1 G1 Z6.0 F1 N2 G31 Z14.0 N3 Z28.0 N4 Z36.0 N5 Z50.0 M30 O1001 N1 G1 X7...

  • Page 956

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 926 - STEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Command state Forward Backward BackwardBackwardBackwardRe-forward Re-forward Re-forward Re-forwardExecution state in Path1 Forward Backward BackwardBackwardBackwardRe-forward Re-forward Re-forward Re-forwardExecution state ...

  • Page 957

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 927 - In this case, if bit 4 (HMP) of parameter No.6400 is set to 1 (if a path is prohibited from changing its movement direction, the other paths cannot also change their direction), the other paths cannot change their direction until path 1 passes by...

  • Page 958

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 928 - (2) Backward movement in rigid tapping is the same movement as in the case where bit 0 (HRA) of parameter No. 6403 is 0. - Thread cutting • When the bit 0 (HRA) of parameter No.6403 is set to 0 (Conventional specification) (1) When the threadi...

  • Page 959

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 929 - WARNING During the manual handle retrace, if a reset is made when a command by PMC axis control is not completed, the command by the program stops, but the command by PMC axis control continues. In this case, even if bit 1 (HRB) of parameter No....

  • Page 960

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 930 - WARNING In the threading and polygon machining between two spindles, the spindle operates at a speed of override 100% instead of the speed according to handle operation. Therefore, the workpiece cannot be actually machined. (Example) Treading d...

  • Page 961

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 931 - 4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION Programmed operation of a CNC machine tool is referred to as automatic operation. This chapter explains the following types of automatic operation: 4.1 MEMORY OPERATION ........................................................

  • Page 962

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 932 - Memory operation Procedure 1 Press the MEMORY mode selection switch. 2 Select a program from the registered programs. To do this, follow the steps below. 2-1 Press key to display the program screen. 2-2 Press address key. 2-3 Enter a progra...

  • Page 963

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 933 - - Program stop (M00) Memory operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is executed. When the program is stopped, all existing modal information remains unchanged as in single block operation. The memory operation can be restarted by pre...

  • Page 964

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 934 - 2 Press the key to select the program screen. The following screen appears: MDI program screen At this time, program number “O0000” is inserted automatically. 3 Prepare a program to be executed by an operation similar to normal program...

  • Page 965

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 935 - Explanation The previous explanation of how to execute and stop memory operation also applies to MDI operation, except that in MDI operation, M30 does not return control to the beginning of the program (M99 performs this function). - Erasing ...

  • Page 966

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 936 - - Absolute/incremental command When bit 4 (MAB) of parameter No. 3401 is set to 1, the absolute/incremental programming of MDI operation does not depend on G90/G91. In this case, the incremental programming is set when bit 5 (ABS) of parameter...

  • Page 967

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 937 - 2 Select the program to be executed. • Selecting a DNC operation file On the memory card (or floppy cassette) list screen, move the cursor to the file to be subjected to DNC operation and press "DNC SET" to select the file to be s...

  • Page 968

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 938 - Fig. 4.3 (b) PROGRAM CHECK screen NOTE 1 Before selecting a DNC operation file, be sure to release all schedule data. DNC operation and schedule operation cannot be specified at the same time. 2 A DNC operation file cannot be released during ...

  • Page 969

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 939 - 4.4 SCHEDULE OPERATION To perform schedule operation, select files (programs) registered in a memory card and specify the sequence of execution and the repetition count of each program. Schedule operation Procedure 1 Press the REMOTE switch on...

  • Page 970

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 940 - [FILE UP] Moves the file at the cursor position up one line and moves the replaced file down one line. [FILE DOWN] Moves the file at the cursor position down one line and moves the replaced file up one line. [DELETE] Deletes the file at the ...

  • Page 971

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 941 - - M code Even if a code other than M02 and M30 in the execution program is executed, the current count on the schedule execution status screen is not increased. - Floppy disk directory display during execution of a file During schedule ope...

  • Page 972

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 942 - 4.5 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198) During memory operation, you can call and execute a subprogram registered in an external device (such as a Memory Card, Handy File, or Data Server) connected to the CNC. Format M198 Pxxxxxxxx Lyyyyyyyy ; ...

  • Page 973

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 943 - External device name Number of characters Alarm issued if an item out of the range is specified Handy File 17 SR1079 FLOPPY CASSTTE 17 SR1079 Memory Card 12 SR1968 Data Server 32 PS0311 Example 1) If using a Data Server as the external device...

  • Page 974

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 944 - Example 3) M198 P0123 L3; This command specifies that the subprogram having external subprogram number O0123 is to be called three times repeatedly. The subprogram is called from the main program and executed as follows: Main program ...

  • Page 975

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 945 - NOTE 6 A subprogram registered in internal memory can be called from a subprogram called using an external device subprogram call. From the called subprogram in internal memory, another external device subprogram call cannot be performed. (An a...

  • Page 976

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 946 - Explanation - Interruption operation 1 When the handle interruption axis selection signal for a handle interruption axis is set to 1 in the automatic operation mode (manual data input, DNC operation, or memory operation) or in the memory editi...

  • Page 977

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 947 - (Machine coordinate system)(Workpiece coordinate system after interruption)(Workpiece coordinate system beforeinterruption) Path after interruptionProgrammed pathShift by manual handleinterruption 2 Even when manual handle interruption is perfo...

  • Page 978

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 948 - Interruption shifts the workpiece coordinate system from the machine coordinate system. (Machine zero point)Workpiececoordinate system before interruption Workpiece coordinate system after interruption Position before interruption Position afte...

  • Page 979

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 949 - 2 Press function key [HANDLE]. 3 Press function key [(OPRT)]. 4 To prepare for "Clearing all axes" or "Clearing any axis", press soft key [INTRPT CANCEL]. To prepare for "Clearing all axes" or "Clearing ...

  • Page 980

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 950 - (a) INPUT UNIT: Handle interruption move amount in input unit system Indicates the travel distance specified by handle interruption according to the least input increment. (b) OUTPUT UNIT : Handle interruption move amount in output unit s...

  • Page 981

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 951 - 4.6.1 Manual Interruption of 3-dimensional Coordinate System Conversion Overview When the manual pulse generator is rotated in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode, the travel distance specified by the manual pulse generator is superpos...

  • Page 982

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 952 - Note Handle interruption is disabled during execution of a G68 or G69 block. 4.7 MIRROR IMAGE During automatic operation, the mirror image function can be used for movement along an axis. To use this function, set the mirror image switch to O...

  • Page 983

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 953 - 2-4 Move the cursor to the mirror image setting position, then set the target axis to 1. 3 Enter an automatic operation mode (memory mode or MDI mode), then press the cycle start button to start automatic operation. Explanation • The mirror...

  • Page 984

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 954 - Procedure for program restart by specifying a sequence number Procedure 1 [P TYPE] 1 Retract the tool and replace it with a new one. When necessary, change the offset. (Go to step 2.) [Q TYPE] 1 When power is turned ON or emergency stop is r...

  • Page 985

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 955 - Procedure 2 [COMMON TO P TYPE / Q TYPE] 1 Turn the program restart switch on the machine operator's panel ON. 2 Press key to display the desired program. 3 Find the program head. Press key. 4 Enter the sequence number of the block to be resta...

  • Page 986

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 956 - With 15-inch or 10.4-inch LCD/MDI panel : Up to 30 M codes With 7.2/8.4-inch LCD/MDI panel : Up to 6 M codes T : Two most recently specified T codes S : Most recently specified S code B : Most recently specified B code Codes are displayed in ...

  • Page 987

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 957 - 5 The block number is searched for, and the program restart screen appears on the LCD display. Fig. 4.8 (b) Program restart screen DESTINATION shows the position at which machining is to restart. DISTANCE TO GO shows the distance from the c...

  • Page 988

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 958 - Outputting the M, S, T, and B codes for program restart After the block to be restarted is searched for, you can perform the following operations: 1 Before the tool is moved to the machining restart position <1> The most recently specif...

  • Page 989

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 959 - Fig. 4.8 (c) Program restart screen (outputting M, S, T, and B codes) 2 Before the tool reaches the machining restart position, pressing soft key [OVERSTORE] selects the over store mode. In the over store mode, data can be entered in the M, S...

  • Page 990

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 960 - 3 When values have been entered in the (OVERSTORE) section, pressing the cycle start switch outputs each code in the (OVERSTORE) section. The values in the (OVERSTORE) section are cleared. 4 To clear the values entered in the (OVERSTORE) sectio...

  • Page 991

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 961 - Press the soft key [(OPRT)], then press the continuous menu key. Soft key [SET MV.AX] appears. Fig. 4.8 (f) Program restart screen (movement axis setting) Key in the axis name of the axis to move, and press the soft key [SET MV.AX], and the ...

  • Page 992

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 962 - By pressing the soft key [CLEAR MV.AX], the axis that has been set as described above can be canceled. If the CNC mode is changed, the axis that has been set will be canceled (the axis name no longer flashes). After the completion of the movem...

  • Page 993

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 963 - - Storing / clearing the block number The block number is held in memory while no power is supplied. The number can be cleared by cycle start in the reset state. - Block number when a program is halted or stopped The program screen usually d...

  • Page 994

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 964 - (Example) C: master axis, A: slave axis O0002 ; N10 C0 A0 ; N20 M133 ; N30 C10. ; N40 C20. ; N50 M136 ; N60 G90 A20. ; N70 G91 A10. ; : Operating a program restart 1. Before starting a program restart, make sure that the flexible synchronous...

  • Page 995

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 965 - (Example) C: master axis, A: slave axis O0003 ; N10 A90. ; N20 C90. ; N30 C0 A0 ; N40 M133 ; N50 C10. ; N60 C20. ; N70 M136 ; N80 G90 A20. ; N90 G91 A10. ; : If N80 is specified as a restart block, alarm PS5378 is issued. If N90 is specified...

  • Page 996

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 966 - NOTE To use the Cs contour controlled axis coordinate establishment function, the reference position return must be performed on the Cs contour controlled axis at least once after the power is turned on. Program restart for 3-dimensional coord...

  • Page 997

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 967 - - Feed hold If a feed hold operation is performed during the search, the restart steps must be performed again from the beginning. - Manual absolute Every manual operation must be performed with the manual absolute mode turned on regardless ...

  • Page 998

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 968 - (3) If bit 7 (SQP) of parameter No. 13117 is 1, a P type restart is disabled. In this case, the soft key [P TYPE] no longer appears. If a P type program restart is not to be used, it is possible to disable the use of the P type by setting SQP t...

  • Page 999

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 969 - 4.8.1 Auxiliary Function Output in Program Restart Function Overview This function provides the following features for program restart: • M/S/T/B codes found during a search through a block to be restarted for operation are output to the prog...

  • Page 1000

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 970 - NOTE 1 Up to 50 M/S/T/B codes or macro call arguments can be output. 2 If there are no M/S/T/B codes to be output, the MDI program will be created. 3 The number of characters that can be output to the MDI program is 512 including the program n...

  • Page 1001

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 971 - Output of subprogram/custom macro call M codes In the output of M/S/T/B codes to the MDI program, subprogram and custom macro call M codes are also output. Together with M codes, their arguments are also output t...

  • Page 1002

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 972 - NOTE Conversion results are represented by 9-digit numbers, the decimal point, and the minus sign. If a result cannot be represented by 9 digits, alarm PS5373 (macro call argument conversion error) is issued. (Example) In the example below,...

  • Page 1003

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 973 - NOTE 1 If the movement order is changed on the program restart screen, the value of parameter No. 7310 is also changed. 2 If an attempt is made to set a "0" or a value exceeding the number of controlled axes for an input value, the wa...

  • Page 1004

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 974 - 4.9 TOOL RETRACT AND RECOVER The tool can be retracted from a workpiece to replace the tool, if damaged during machining, or to check the status of machining. Then, the tool can be returned to restart machining efficiently. Procedure for tool ...

  • Page 1005

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 975 - During retraction, the screen displays PTRR and STRT. • PTRR blinks in the field for indicating states such as the program editing status. • STRT is displayed in the automatic operation status field. • MTN is displayed in the field for...

  • Page 1006

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 976 - During return operation, the screen displays PTRR and MSTR. • PTRR blinks in the field for indicating states such as program editing status. • MSTR is displayed in the automatic operation status field. • MTN is displayed in the field fo...

  • Page 1007

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 977 - N30 Point APoint E - Retraction from the automatic operation hold or stop state When the single block switch is turned on during automatic operation, or the TOOL WITHDRAW switch is turned on after the automatic operation hold or stop state ...

  • Page 1008

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 978 - - Single block The single block switch is enabled during return operation. If the single block switch is turned off, continuous return operation is performed. If the single block switch is turned off, the tool stops at each memorized position....

  • Page 1009

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 979 - - Operation procedure 1 Specify a retraction axis and retraction distance in command “G10.6IP- -;”. O1234 G90G0X0Z0 ; S150 M03 ; N10 G91 G00 X-50. ; N20 G10.6 X40.0 ; N30 G33 Z-100. F2.0 ; N40 G00 X50. ; N50 Z100. ; M02; Retraction axis: ...

  • Page 1010

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 980 - (2) When the remaining travel distance for threading < retraction distance d ca b ARetraction position Retraction distance When the position where 45-degree chamfering by the retraction distance ends exceeds the threading end position (c),...

  • Page 1011

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 981 - 5 As repositioning, the tool returns to the position specified in the first block that does not specify threading. d c a b Retraction position Point E Repositioning N50 In this example, the repositioning position is point d. Automatic operatio...

  • Page 1012

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 982 - 4 During operation 4, 5, or 6, the tool continues the operation and stops at the initial point. When the TOOL WITHDRAW switch is turned on during operation 2 to 6, the tool does not move according to the retraction specified in G10.6. After the...

  • Page 1013

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 983 - 4.10 MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN Overview If you use feed hold to stop the tool from moving an axis during automatic operation and restarts the tool after manual intervention, for example, for checking a cutting surface, the tool can resume ...

  • Page 1014

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 984 - WARNING Manual intervention must be performed correctly with meticulous care, following the machining direction and the shape of the workpiece, not to damage the workpiece, machine, and/or tool. N2N1Point APoint B Return (Non-linear interpolat...

  • Page 1015

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 985 - If the return operation is started with the axis under PMC axis control being stopped after having completed the PMC axis control command, however, the return operation is performed by the amount of movement by PMC axis control. When PMC axis c...

  • Page 1016

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 986 - NOTE Under synchronous control, manual intervention and return can be performed for the slave axis only when bit 2 (PKUx) of parameter No. 8162 is 1 and the master axis is parking. 4.11 RETRACE M Overview The tool can retrace the path along ...

  • Page 1017

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 987 - Single block stop "REVERSE" switch = ON Cycle start Cycle start (start of forward execution)Start of reverse executionForward Reverse Fig. 4.11 (c) When method 3) is used, performing a cycle start operation starts reverse execution...

  • Page 1018

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 988 - When method 2) is used, performing a cycle start operation starts forward reexecution from the position at which a single block stop takes place. Cycle start (start of forward execution) Start of forward reexecution Forward Reverse Forward r...

  • Page 1019

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 989 - If reverse execution was performed after feed hold stop, forward reexecution ends when the feed hold stop position is reached, then forward execution is performed. Also if single block operation was performed, forward reexecution ends at the si...

  • Page 1020

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 990 - - Reset A reset operation (the reset button on the MDI panel, the external reset signal, or the reset & rewind signal) clears the blocks stored for reverse execution. - Feedrate A feedrate to be applied during reverse execution can be sp...

  • Page 1021

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 991 - • 3-dimensional circular interpolation (G02.4, G03.4) • NURBS interpolation (G06.2) • Cylindrical interpolation (G07.1,G107) • Polar coordinate interpolation (G12.1, G13.1,G112,G113) • Polar coordinate command (G16) • Functions rela...

  • Page 1022

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 992 - - Single block stop position A block that is internally generated by the control unit is also treated as one block during reverse execution. Path after compensation Programmed path <2>2 345 Fig. 4.11 (m) Path when cutter compensation is ...

  • Page 1023

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 993 - Forward Reverse reexecution executionForward execution(Actual path) Skip signal ON (G31) or automatic tool length measurement signal ON (G37) Signal not applied (G31)(Programmed path) Fig. 4.11 (o) - Setup of a coordinate system (G9...

  • Page 1024

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 994 - If the feedrate during reverse execution (parameter No. 1414) is not set (= 0), the same feedrate as applied during forward execution is used. - Maximum spindle speed clamp (G92Sxxxx) Clamping at a maximum spindle speed specified during rever...

  • Page 1025

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 995 - Warning WARNING 1 Auxiliary functions are output directly even during reverse execution and forward reexecution. Accordingly, the execution status of an auxiliary function during forward execution may be reversed during reverse execution. Exam...

  • Page 1026

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 996 - Active block cancel function Explanation Operation when operation restarts G90/G91 When the operation is restarted, the operation of the restart is decided depending on the command in the next block of the canceled block. When the next block i...

  • Page 1027

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 997 - Position where tool halts by signal inputTool path after cutter compensation Specified program N30 Specified program N20 Specified program N40 Fig. 4.12 (b) Tool radius / tool nose radius compensation Canned cycle for drilling When a block is...

  • Page 1028

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 998 - Position where tool halts by signal N10 N50N20 N30N40 Fig. 4.12 (d) Canned cycle for drilling 2 At the restart, the operation is executed from the next N30 block when the operation is canceled while executing in N20 cycle. At this time, beca...

  • Page 1029

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 999 - 5 TEST OPERATION The following functions are used to check before actual machining whether the machine operates as specified by the created program. 5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK..........................................................

  • Page 1030

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1000 - - Auxiliary function lock Press the auxiliary function lock switch on the operator's panel. M, S, T, and B codes are disabled and not executed. Refer to the appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for auxiliary function lock. Limi...

  • Page 1031

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1001 - - Override during thread During the threading process, the override setting is ignored; it is always regarded as 100% during the process. 5.3 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE An override of four steps (F0, 25%, 50%, and 100%) can be applied to the rapid t...

  • Page 1032

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1002 - Override Dwell time 25% 40.0 sec. 50% 20.0 sec. 75% 13.3 sec. 100% 10.0 sec. NOTE An override is disabled for dwell per revolution. - AUXILIARY functions (M/S/T/B) An override can be applied in the time from when M/S/T/B is sent until the FIN...

  • Page 1033

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1003 - 5.5 DRY RUN The tool is moved at the feedrate specified by a parameter regardless of the feedrate specified in the program. This function is used for checking the movement of the tool under the state that the workpiece is removed from the table. T...

  • Page 1034

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1004 - 5.6 SINGLE BLOCK Pressing the single block switch starts the single block mode. When the cycle start button is pressed in the single block mode, the tool stops after a single block in the program is executed. Check the program in the single block m...

  • Page 1035

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1005 - 5.7 HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK FUNCTION When the cycle start button is pressed with the high speed program check mode set to be enabled, the program syntax and stroke limit are checked without axis movement. A program check is performed at the maxim...

  • Page 1036

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1006 - NOTE 1 The execution time of dwell is the same as a normal operation. 2 The PS011 alarm occurs when there is no F command in a normal operation. However, it is executed at maximum speed without the alarm in the high speed program check mode even i...

  • Page 1037

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1007 - 6 SAFETY FUNCTIONS To immediately stop the machine for safety, press the Emergency stop button. To prevent the tool from exceeding the stroke ends, Overtravel check and Stored stroke check are available. This chapter describes emergency stop, ove...

  • Page 1038

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1008 - Explanation - Overtravel during automatic operation When the tool touches a limit switch along an axis during automatic operation, the tool is decelerated and stopped along all axes and an overtravel alarm is displayed. - Overtravel during man...

  • Page 1039

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1009 - • Stored stroke check 3: Inside When the tool moves into the forbidden area, an alarm is displayed and the tool is decelerated and stopped. When the tool enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool can be moved in the reverse di...

  • Page 1040

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1010 - When setting the area by parameters, points A and B in the Fig. 6.3 (c) must be set. X1>X2, Y1>Y2, Z1>Z2 A(X1, Y1, Z1) B(X2, Y2, Z2) Fig. 6.3 (c) Creating or changing the forbidden area using a parameters The values X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2,...

  • Page 1041

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1011 - • For lathe system The position of the tool after reference position return Forbitten area boundarybaBA Fig. 6.3 (d) Setting the forbidden area - Forbidden area overlapping Area can be set in piles. Setting the forbidden area overlapping Fig...

  • Page 1042

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1012 - Number Message Description OT0504 + OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 3) A movement in the positive direction exceeded stored stroke check 3.OT0505 - OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 3) A movement in the negative direction exceeded stored stroke check 3. 6.4 STROKE LIMIT CHECK B...

  • Page 1043

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1013 - WARNING Example 2) End pointEnd point Start point Immediately upon movement commencing from the start point, the tool is stopped to enable a stroke limit check before moving to be performed before movement. The tool is stopped at point a accord...

  • Page 1044

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1014 - - Polar coordinate interpolation mode In polar coordinate interpolation mode, no check is made. - 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion In 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode, no check is made. - PMC axis control No check is...

  • Page 1045

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1015 - Note NOTE If the parameters are rewritten so that the current position is included in a forbidden area during axis movement, the axis decelerates and stops, and an alarm is displayed. If an alarm occurs when the tool enters a forbidden area, the...

  • Page 1046

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1016 - 6.6.1.1 Input data range check This function allows an effective data range to be set and checks whether the input data is within the set range. Input data range check Explanation - Outline of the input data range check This function allows an ...

  • Page 1047

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1017 - Table 6.6.1.1 (b) List of messages displayed 2 Range check status Message Color Tool offset number overlap NG SETTING (OFFSET NUM OVERLAP) Red Workpiece coordinate system overlap NG SETTING (WORK COORD VAL OVERLAP) Red Invalid upper and lower lim...

  • Page 1048

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1018 - - Settings In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "INCREMENTAL INPUT" box to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the setting screen, how to set the function, and ot...

  • Page 1049

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1019 - 6.6.1.5 Confirmation of the deletion of all data This function displays the confirmation message "DELETE ALL DATA?" when you attempt to delete all data. Confirmation of the deletion of all data Explanation - Outline of the confirmatio...

  • Page 1050

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1020 - 6.6.2 Functions that are Used when the Program is Executed Overview The following functions are provided to prevent improper operations when the program is executed. • Display of updated modal information • Start check signal • Axis status ...

  • Page 1051

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1021 - Using this function in combination with the updated modal information display function described in the preceding subsection makes it easier to check the status of the block to be executed. - Settings This function does not require any setting ...

  • Page 1052

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1022 - 6.6.2.4 Confirmation of the start from a middle block This function displays a confirmation message when you attempt to execute a memory operation with the cursor placed on a block in the middle of the program. Confirmation of the start from a m...

  • Page 1053

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1023 - NOTE If bit 0 (MSC) of parameter No. 10335 for each path is 1, a cursor position check is not performed on the path on which memory operation is in progress. For example, in the case below, if a cycle start is executed on path 1, a cursor positi...

  • Page 1054

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1024 - 6.6.2.6 Maximum incremental value check This function checks the maximum incremental value specified for each axis by the NC command. Maximum incremental value check Explanation - Outline of the maximum incremental value check When the maximum ...

  • Page 1055

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1025 - Displaying and setting the operation confirmation function setting screen Procedure 1 Press the function key. 2 Press the continuous menu key at the right edge of the screen several times until the [GUARD] soft key is displayed. 3 Press the [GU...

  • Page 1056

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1026 - Displayed item Default Corresponding function ALL DATA DELETE ○ Confirmation of the deletion of all data INPUT IN SETTING Confirmation of a data update during the data setting process UPDATE MODAL HIGHLIGHT DISPLAY ○ Display of updated modal...

  • Page 1057

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1027 - 7 Press the MDI key, enter necessary data, and then press the [INPUT] soft key. If the set effective data range is invalid for any of the reasons listed below, the input data range check is not performed normally and the input data is rejected. ...

  • Page 1058

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1028 - Table 6.6.3.2 (c) Displayed item What to set FROM RANGE TO Specify a tool offset number range. LOW-LIMIT LENGTH UP-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for geometry length in connection with a specified tool offset number range. LOW-LIMI...

  • Page 1059

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1029 - In the case of this system, all the information needed to set an input data range cannot be displayed in a single screen page. Set the information while switching pages using the [SWITCH] soft key. The screen provides an indication that lets you ...

  • Page 1060

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1030 - Fig. 6.6.3.3 (a) Workpiece origin offset range setting screen 5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 6 Move the cursor to the item you want to set, by using the and keys, or , , , and keys. 7 Press the MDI key, enter necessary data, and then press...

  • Page 1061

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1031 - Table 6.6.3.3 (b) Displayed item What to set LOW-LIMIT AXIS NAME UP-LIMIT Specify a valid external workpiece origin offset value range on each axis. 6.6.3.4 Y-axis tool offset range setting screen T In the case of a lathe system, this screen dis...

  • Page 1062

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1032 - If the set effective data range is invalid for any of the reasons listed below, the input data range check is not performed normally and the input data is rejected. • There is a tool offset number overlap. • The upper and lower limit values a...

  • Page 1063

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1033 - 4 If any screen other than the workpiece shift range setting screen is displayed, press the [WORK SHIFT] soft key. The workpiece shift range setting screen is displayed. Fig. 6.6.3.5 (a) Workpiece shift range setting screen 5 Press the soft k...

  • Page 1064

    OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1034 - 7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS 7 ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS When an alarm occurs, the corresponding alarm screen appears to indicate the cause of the alarm. The causes of alarms are classified by error codes and number. Up to 60 previous alarms can ...

  • Page 1065

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION - 1035 - 7.ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS• All path screen Alarm information for all paths is displayed sequentially from path 1. Fig. 7.1 (b) All path screen - Displaying an alarm screen ALM is sometimes indicated in the bottom part of the screen display without...

  • Page 1066

    OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1036 - 7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS If the number of paths is 1, pressing the [ALARM] soft key displays the "DETAIL" screen, but the [ALARM] soft key indication remains unchanged. 4 You can change pages by using the page key. - Releasing alarm The c...

  • Page 1067

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION - 1037 - 7.ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS Fig. 7.2 (a) Alarm history screen 7.3 CHECKING BY DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY The system may sometimes seem to be at a halt, although no alarm has occurred. In this case, the system may be performing some processing. Diagnostic display...

  • Page 1068

    OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1038 - 7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS Fig. 7.3 (a) Diagnostic display

  • Page 1069

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION - 1039 - 7.ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS7.4 RETURN FROM THE ALARM SCREEN 7.4.1 Return from the Alarm Screen When alarms are cleared or function key is pressed on the alarm screen, the screen displayed before the alarm screen appears. To enable this function, set bit ...

  • Page 1070

    OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1040 - 7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS (Example) PROGRAM screen Function key ALARM screen Function key If function key is pressed when the alarm screen was displayed automatically due to occurrence of an alarm, the screen displayed before the alarm scree...

  • Page 1071

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION - 1041 - 7.ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONSAt this time, if a return from the alarm screen to the previous screen is performed in one path, the screen of the path in which a return was performed appears in the other path. (Example) Path 1 Path 2 ...

  • Page 1072

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1042 - 8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Information stored in external I/O devices can be read into the CNC, and information can be written into external I/O devices. External I/O devices include memory cards that can be mounted to the memory card interface located...

  • Page 1073

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1043 - The external I/O device set in NC parameter No. 0020 is selected. See the Table 8 (b) below for details. Table 8 (b) Correspondence between settings and input/output units Setting Description 0,1 RS-232-C serial port 1 2 RS-232-C serial port 2 ...

  • Page 1074

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1044 - 3 If a file with the same name exists on the memory card, soft keys [REWRITE] and [CAN] appear. Pressing the soft key [REWRITE] causes the file to be overwritten. Pressing the soft key [CAN] causes output to be canceled. Example) Output from th...

  • Page 1075

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1045 - Fig. 8.1 (f) Soft key display after [PUNCH] is pressed Fig. 8.1 (g) Soft key display after [EXEC] is pressed CAUTION Even if soft key [REWRITE] is pressed, warning message "OVER WRITE FAILED" is issued and output is canceled in t...

  • Page 1076

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1046 - 8.2 INPUT/OUTPUT ON EACH SCREEN This section explains how to input and output data of the following types to and from each operation screen: program, parameter, offset, pitch error compensation, 3-dimensional error compensation, macro variable, ...

  • Page 1077

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1047 - 8.2.1 Inputting and Outputting a Program 8.2.1.1 Inputting a program The following explains how to input a program from an external device to the memory of the CNC by using the program editing screen or program folder screen. Inputting a progra...

  • Page 1078

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1048 - 5 Press the continuous menu key until horizontal soft key [READ] appears. Press the horizontal soft key [READ]. 6 Type the name of the file that you want to input. Press the horizontal soft key [F SET]. To specify the program name to input, typ...

  • Page 1079

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1049 - NOTE Foreground folders are displayed on the program folder screen. For an explanation of foreground folders, see II-12.1.3, and for how to change foreground folders, see III-11.6 Table 8.2.1.2 (a) [F SET] [P SET] Output file name Output progr...

  • Page 1080

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1050 - 8.2.2 Inputting and Outputting Parameters 8.2.2.1 Inputting parameters Parameters are loaded into the memory of the CNC unit from an external device. The input format is the same as the output format. When a parameter is loaded which has the sam...

  • Page 1081

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1051 - 8 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 9 Press the horizontal soft key [READ]. 10 Type the name of the file that you want to input. If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “...

  • Page 1082

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1052 - Explanation - Suppressing output of parameters set to 0 When bit 1 (PRM) of parameter No. 0010 is set to 1, and soft key [EXEC] is pressed, the parameters in the Table 8.2.2.2 (a) are not output: Table 8.2.2.2 (a) Other than axis type Axis ty...

  • Page 1083

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1053 - 8.2.3.2 Outputting offset data All offset data is output in a defined output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device. Outputting offset data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the output device is ready ...

  • Page 1084

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1054 - % G10 G90 P01 R_ Q_ G10 G90 P02 R_ Q_ ... G10 G90 P_ R_ % Q_ : Virtual tool nose number (TIP). Not output when the virtual tool nose direction is not used. P_ : Tool offset number (1 to the number of tool compensation pairs) R_ : Tool compens...

  • Page 1085

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1055 - • If the cutting point command option is enabled % G10 G90 L10 P01 R_ Q_ G10 G90 L11 P01 R_ G10 G90 L12 P01 R_ G10 G90 L13 P01 R_ G10 G90 L110 P01 R_ G10 G90 L111 P01 R_ G10 G90 L10 P02 R_ Q_ ... G10 G90 L110 P01 R_ G10 G90 L111 P01 R_ % L10 ...

  • Page 1086

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1056 - T The tool compensation amount and tool nose radius compensation amount are output in the following format. % G10 P01 X_ Z_ R_ Q_ Y_ G10 P02 X_ Z_ R_ Q_ Y_ ... G10 P__ X_ Z_ R_ Q_ Y_ G10 P10001 X_ Z_ R_ Y_ G10 P10002 X_ Z_ R_ Y_ ... G10 P100__ X...

  • Page 1087

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1057 - 8.2.4 Inputting and Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data 8.2.4.1 Inputting pitch error compensation data Pitch error compensation data are loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the same as the output ...

  • Page 1088

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1058 - 7 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [PITCH ERROR] appears. Press the vertical soft key [PITCH ERROR]. 8 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 9 Press the horizontal ...

  • Page 1089

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1059 - 7 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. This starts outputting the pitch error compensation data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. To cancel the ...

  • Page 1090

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1060 - 8.2.5 Inputting and Outputting 3-dimensional Error Compensation Data 8.2.5.1 Inputting 3-dimensional error compensation data 3-dimensional error compensation data are loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is...

  • Page 1091

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1061 - 6 Press the function key . 7 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [3D ERR COMP] appears. Press the vertical soft key [3D ERR COMP]. 8 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency sto...

  • Page 1092

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1062 - 6 Type the file name that you want to output. If the file name is omitted, default file name “COMP3D.TXT” is assumed. 7 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. This starts outputting the 3-dimensional error compensation data, and “OUTPUT” ...

  • Page 1093

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1063 - - Input of compensation data using G10 Compensation data can be changed from a machining program, using the programmable parameter input function. The command format is as follows: % G10 L51 ; N_ P_ R_ ; N_ P_ R_ ; : G11 ; % G10 L51 : 3-dimen...

  • Page 1094

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1064 - Inputting custom macro common variables (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [MACRO] appears. Press t...

  • Page 1095

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1065 - 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [MACRO] appears. Press the vertical soft key [MACRO]. 4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 5 Press the horizontal soft key [PUN...

  • Page 1096

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1066 - 8.2.7 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System Data 8.2.7.1 Inputting workpiece coordinate system data Coordinate system variable data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the same as the...

  • Page 1097

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1067 - Outputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [WORK] appears. Press the so...

  • Page 1098

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1068 - 3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] appears. Press the soft key [OPERAT HISTRY]. 4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 6 Press the soft...

  • Page 1099

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1069 - Inputting operation history signal section data (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] ...

  • Page 1100

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1070 - 8 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. This starts outputting the operation history signal selection data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. To c...

  • Page 1101

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1071 - 8.2.9 Inputting and Outputting Tool Management Data NOTE 1 For multi-path systems, place all paths in the EDIT mode before performing input and output operations. 2 The format used is the same as the registration format of the G10 format. 8.2.9...

  • Page 1102

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1072 - 8 Type the name of the file that you want to input. If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “TOOL_MNG.TXT” is assumed. 9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. This starts reading the tool management data, and “INPUT” b...

  • Page 1103

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1073 - 9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. This starts outputting the tool management data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. To cancel the output, p...

  • Page 1104

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1074 - When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. To cancel the input of the program, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. NOTE When using oversize tool support of the tool management function, keep the following in mind. - ...

  • Page 1105

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1075 - 8.2.9.5 Inputting tool life status name data Tool life status name data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the same as the output format. When tool life status name data with a data number correspon...

  • Page 1106

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1076 - 4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 5 Press the soft key [PUNCH]. 6 Press the soft key [STATUS]. 7 Type the file name that you want to output. If the file name is omitted, default file name “STATUS.TXT” is assumed. 8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. T...

  • Page 1107

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1077 - Inputting name data of customize data (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. Pr...

  • Page 1108

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1078 - 9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. This starts outputting the name data of customize data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. To cancel the ou...

  • Page 1109

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1079 - 8.2.9.10 Outputting customize data displayed as tool management data Customize data displayed as tool management data is output from the memory of the CNC to an external device in the output format. Outputting customize data displayed as tool m...

  • Page 1110

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1080 - Inputting spindle waiting position name data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen, magazine screen, or each tool data sc...

  • Page 1111

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1081 - 8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. This starts outputting the spindle waiting position name data display, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. To cancel th...

  • Page 1112

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1082 - 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. Press the vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 4 Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE], [EACH TOOL], or [TOOL]. 5 Press the EDIT s...

  • Page 1113

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1083 - 9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. This starts outputting the decimal point position data of customize data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears...

  • Page 1114

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1084 - 9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. This starts reading the tool geometry data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. To cancel the input of the pro...

  • Page 1115

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1085 - 8.3 INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN Just by using the ALL IO screen, you can input and output programs, parameters, offset data, pitch error compensation data, macro variables, workpiece coordinate system data, operation history data, and tool...

  • Page 1116

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1086 - 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press the soft key [N READ]. 5 Set the name of the file that you want to input. Type a file name, and press the soft key [F...

  • Page 1117

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1087 - Outputting a program (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [PROGRAM] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Pr...

  • Page 1118

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1088 - Table 8.3.1 (d) [F SET] [P SET] Output file name Output program BLANK BLANK or (O-9999) ALL-PROG.TXT All programs in the foreground folders displayed in the program folder BLANK INPUT Program name set with [P SET] Program in the NC that is set ...

  • Page 1119

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1089 - 6 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 7 Press the horizontal soft key [N READ]. 8 Set the name of the file that you want to input. Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. I...

  • Page 1120

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1090 - 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press the soft key [N READ]. 5 Set the name of the file that you want to input. Type a file name, and press the soft key [F...

  • Page 1121

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1091 - When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 8.3.4 Inputting/Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data Pitch error compensation data can be input and output usin...

  • Page 1122

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1092 - 9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. This starts reading the pitch error compensation data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. To cancel the input...

  • Page 1123

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1093 - 5 Set the name of the file that you want to input. Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “MACRO.TXT” is assumed. 6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. This starts reading the cus...

  • Page 1124

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1094 - 8.3.6 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System Data Workpiece coordinates system data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. Inputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Pres...

  • Page 1125

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1095 - Outputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [WORK] appears. Press vertical soft key [WORK]. 2 Press the EDIT switch on t...

  • Page 1126

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1096 - 6 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. This starts outputting the operation history data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. To cancel the output,...

  • Page 1127

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1097 - 5 Set the file name to be output. Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. If the output file name is omitted, default output file name “TOOL_MNG.TXT” is assumed. 6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. This starts outputting the tool managem...

  • Page 1128

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1098 - Outputting magazine data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [MAGAZINE] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press the soft key [PUNCH]...

  • Page 1129

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1099 - 4 Set the name of the file that you want to input. Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “STATUS.TXT” is assumed. 5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. This...

  • Page 1130

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1100 - Inputting name data of customize data (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [CUSTOM] appears. Press the vertical soft key [CUSTOM]. 2 Press the EDIT switch on...

  • Page 1131

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1101 - A file starts with % or LF, followed by the actual data. A file always ends with %. In a read operation, data between the first % and the next LF is skipped. Each block ends with an LF, not a semicolon (;). • LF: 0A (hexadecimal) of ASCII code...

  • Page 1132

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1102 - Fig. 8.4.1 (a) Embedded Ethernet host file list screen NOTE 1 When using the FTP file transfer function, check that the valid device is the embedded Ethernet port. The two conditions below determine a connection destination on the host file l...

  • Page 1133

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1103 - 4 Press the horizontal soft key [EMB ETHER], and the EMBEDDED ETHERNET HOST FILE LIST screen appears. Fig. 8.4.1 (b) Embedded Ethernet host file list screen NOTE 1 When using the FTP file transfer function, check that the valid device is the e...

  • Page 1134

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1104 - REGISTERED PROGRAM The number of files registered in the work folder of the connected host is displayed. Up to 8 digits can be displayed. CURRENT FOLDER The current folder name of the connected host is displayed. If the folder-path is long comp...

  • Page 1135

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1105 - 5 Position the cursor on the file to input, and press [F GET] or type the file name to input. Press the soft key [F SET]. If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “ALL-PROG.TXT” is assumed. 6 Type the program name, and pres...

  • Page 1136

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1106 - Procedure 1 Display the EMBEDDED ETHERNET HOST FILE LIST screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [PUNCH] appears. Press the soft key [PUNC...

  • Page 1137

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1107 - Table 8.4.1 (d) [F SET] [P SET] Output file name Output program BLANK BLANK or (O-9999) ALL-PROG.TXT All programs in the foreground folders displayed in the program folder BLANK INPUT Program name set with [P SET] Program in the NC that is set w...

  • Page 1138

    9.CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1108 - 9 CREATING PROGRAMS This chapter explains how to create programs by MDI of the CNC. This chapter also explains automatic insertion of sequence numbers and how to create programs in TEACH IN mode. Creation/registration Program creation Editin...

  • Page 1139

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 9.CREATING PROGRAMS - 1109 - Explanation - Comments in a program Comments can be written in a program using the control in/out codes. Example) O0001 (TEST PROGRAM) ; M08 (COOLANT ON) ; • When the key is pressed after the control-out code "(", comments, and ...

  • Page 1140

    9.CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1110 - 10 In the example above, if N12 is not necessary in the next block, pressing the key after N12 is displayed deletes N12. If wishing to insert N100, not N12, into the next block, type N100 immediately after N12 is displayed, and press . This ...

  • Page 1141

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 9.CREATING PROGRAMS - 1111 - Fig. 9.3 (a) Program screen in the TEACH IN JOG mode Inputting the coordinates of the current position You can use the following procedure to insert the coordinate of the current position along each axis in the absolute coordinate system: 1 S...

  • Page 1142

    9.CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1112 - O1234 This operation input program number O1234 in memory. Next, press the following keys: An EOB (;) is entered after program number O1234. 5 Enter the P0 machine position for data of the first block as follows: G92XY Z This operation r...

  • Page 1143

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1113 - 10 EDITING PROGRAMS This chapter describes how to edit programs registered in the CNC. Editing includes the insertion, modification, and deletion of words. Editing also includes deletion of the entire program and automatic insertion of sequence ...

  • Page 1144

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1114 - 7 Press the soft key [EDIT ENABLE]. 8 Press the soft key [END]. CAUTION 1 After completing editing, set the edit disable attribute as necessary. 2 To set the edit disable attribute, follow the same procedure as for removing the attribute. In t...

  • Page 1145

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1115 - 10.2.1 Word Search A word can be searched for by merely moving the cursor through the text (scanning), by word search, or by address search. Procedure for scanning a program 1 Press the cursor key . The cursor moves forward word by word; the c...

  • Page 1146

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1116 - 4 Pressing soft key [↓ SEARCH] starts searching forward from the cursor position. Pressing [↑ SEARCH] starts searching backward. 5 To search for the same word successively, press [↓ SEARCH] or [↑ SEARCH]. Procedure for searching an addr...

  • Page 1147

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1117 - 10.2.3 Inserting a Word Procedure for inserting a word 1 Search for or scan the word immediately before a word to be inserted. 2 Key in an address to be inserted. 3 Key in data. 4 Press the key. Example of Inserting T15 1 Search for or scan Z1...

  • Page 1148

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1118 - 3 Press the key. T15 is changed to M15. 10.2.5 Deleting a Word Procedure for deleting a word 1 Search for or scan a word to be deleted. 2 Press the key. Example of deleting X100.0 1 Search for or scan X100.0. X100.0 is searched for/scan...

  • Page 1149

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1119 - 10.3 DELETING BLOCKS A block or blocks can be deleted in a program. 10.3.1 Deleting a Block The portion from the current word position to the next EOB is deleted. The cursor is then placed in the word next to the deleted EOB. Procedure for del...

  • Page 1150

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1120 - N01234 is searched for/scanned. 2 Press . 3 Press the editing key . Blocks from N01234 to the EOB of a block which is two blocks ahead are deleted. 10.4 PROGRAM SEARCH When memory holds multiple programs, a program can be searched for....

  • Page 1151

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1121 - • When the signal on the machine tool side represents 00, program number search operation is not performed. • If the program corresponding to a signal on the machine tool side is not registered, alarm DS0059 is raised. Method 4 When bit 4 ...

  • Page 1152

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1122 - 4 Press address key . 5 Key in a sequence number to be searched for. 6 Press soft key [N SRH]. 7 Upon completion of search operation, the sequence number searched for is displayed in the upper-right corner of the screen. If the specified sequen...

  • Page 1153

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1123 - 4 Key in a desired program number. 5 Press the editing key . The program with the entered program number is deleted. 10.6.2 Deleting All Programs All programs in the folder containing the program currently being edited can be deleted. Procedur...

  • Page 1154

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1124 - - Abbreviations of custom macro word When a custom macro word is altered or inserted, the first two characters or more can replace the entire word. Namely, WHILE → WH GOTO → GO XOR → XO AND → AN SIN → SI ASIN → AS COS → CO ACOS...

  • Page 1155

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1125 - • Character string + ↑ (search): Typing the character string to search for and pressing the ↑ key searches for the character string. This search is made through the edit-enabled area. If attempted at the beginning of the edit-enabled block...

  • Page 1156

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1126 - Explanation - Setting parameter PASSWD The locked state is set when a value is set in the parameter PASSWD. However, note that parameter PASSWD can be set only when the locked state is not set (when PASSWD = 0, or PASSWD = KEYWD). If an attempt...

  • Page 1157

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1127 - 10.10 EDITING PROGRAM CHARACTERS This section describes how to edit programs registered in the CNC. Editing operations include character insertion, modification, deletion, and replacement. While program word editing is performed by recognizing p...

  • Page 1158

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1128 - - Line number The number of lines are counted starting with the starting line of a program, which is counted as the first line. Even when a line wraps around to the next and subsequent lines, these lines are counted as a single line. - Clipbo...

  • Page 1159

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1129 - When the cursor is placed at 6, and X is entered, the following results: 12345X7890 - Restrictions on editing O numbers and file names cannot be edited. EOR (%) cannot be deleted. - Line editing and automatic saving When a line is edited,...

  • Page 1160

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1130 - - Character keys Characters are entered using these keys. 10.10.2 Input Mode Input modes include insert mode and overwrite mode. Changing input mode To switch between the input modes, use soft key [INPUT MODE]. Pressing soft key [INPUT MODE] ...

  • Page 1161

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1131 - If a search character string is input, but no replacement character string is input, the former character string will be deleted. To cancel the replacement, press soft key [CANCEL]. 3 Replacement operations Replacement operations include an o...

  • Page 1162

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1132 - To cancel the copying, press soft key [CANCEL]. 10.10.8 Cut A selected character string can be deleted. When deleted, the character string is copied to the clipboard. Cut Procedure 1 Move the cursor to the beginning of the character string to...

  • Page 1163

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1133 - To cancel the creation of a new program, press soft key [CANCEL]. 10.10.12 Line Search The cursor can be moved to a specified line. The cursor can be moved to a line with a specified line number, to the first line of the program, and to the la...

  • Page 1164

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1134 - Fig. 10.11 (a) 3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Move the cursor to a folder that contains the program that you want to copy or move, and press key. 5 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [SELECT START] appears. Press the soft key [S...

  • Page 1165

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1135 - A program can be neither copied nor moved to the same folder as the selected folder. When only one program is selected, and a program name is already entered, however, the program can be copied or moved within the same folder. NOTE Once a copy...

  • Page 1166

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1136 - 6 Press soft key [SELECT START]. 7 Use the cursor keys as appropriate to position the cursor on the desired file. 8 Press soft key [SELECT] to select the file. 9 Use the + cursor key combination, select the other folder display. 10 To select a ...

  • Page 1167

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1137 - - Overwriting files When copying or moving is attempted, if a file with the same name exists in the destination folder, message "REWRITE: File name" flashes below the key-in buffer. If the file with the same name is to be overwritten,...

  • Page 1168

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1138 - If an attempt is made to select a folder as an object to copy or move, warning "DISABLE TO SELECT" is issued. Note NOTE Once a copy or move operation starts, it cannot be canceled. Thus, check the files and folder subject to the oper...

  • Page 1169

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1139 - NOTE 1 For security, the values set for PASSWORD and KEY are not displayed. For the same reason, PASSWORD, MINIMUM, and MAXIMUM can be specified only when no password is set or the program memory is unlocked. Set a password, taking great care to...

  • Page 1170

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1140 - Locked/unlocked Results Password not set The program is output in a normal way. Inputting an un-encrypted program Locked/unlocked Results Locked When the program to be read is outside the security range, it is input normally. When the progra...

  • Page 1171

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1141 - - Editing and deleting programs When the program memory is locked, the programs within the security range cannot be edited or deleted. When the program memory is locked, an attempt to delete all programs results in only those programs outside t...

  • Page 1172

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1142 - Fig. 10.13 (a) Simultaneous editing of multi-path programs screen (10.4-inch LCD) Fig. 10.13 (b) Simultaneous editing of multi-path programs screen (15-inch LCD) Target of editing

  • Page 1173

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1143 - Fig. 10.13 (c) Simultaneous editing of multi-path programs screen (7.2-inch LCD) - Modes When the paths to be displayed simultaneously are in either EDIT or MEM mode, the multi-path programs are displayed simultaneously on the program screen....

  • Page 1174

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1144 - Table 10.13 (a) LCD size Maximum number of paths that can be subject to editing simultaneously 7.2, 8.4, or 10.4-inch 3 15-inch 4 - Conditions under which simultaneous editing is not usable Simultaneous editing of multi-path programs is disab...

  • Page 1175

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1145 - This function provides the simultaneous scroll mode in which all programs being edited simultaneously are scrolled and the single scroll mode in which only the program to be edited is scrolled. It is possible to switch between these modes easily...

  • Page 1176

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1146 - Fig. 10.14 (f) Multi-path editing screen Procedure for switching to the single scroll mode The procedure for switching to the single scroll mode is as described below. 1 Press function key . 2 Press soft key [PROGRAM] to display the program ed...

  • Page 1177

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1147 - NOTE A waiting M code is not ignored due to the waiting ignore signal. Example: The cursor cannot be moved in the down direction if pressing the cursor key causes the system to enter the scroll waiting state. The cursor can move in the up d...

  • Page 1178

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1148 - 図10.14 (i) All programs displayed simultaneously are in the scroll waiting state Release of scroll waiting If, in the scroll waiting state, the cursor for the program for another path is moved to the beginning or end of the program, a confir...

  • Page 1179

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1149 - [PREVI SYNC] Searches for a waiting M-code in the up direction, starting at the cursor position in the program to be edited. The cursors of the paths specified for waiting move to the same waiting M-code. [NEXT SYNC] Searches for a waiting M-co...

  • Page 1180

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1150 - 11 PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Program management functions are classified into the following two types: • Functions for folders • Functions for programs Functions for folders include creation, deletion, change of names and attributes, and so on. ...

  • Page 1181

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1151 - 11.1.1 Selecting a Memory Card Program as a Device Overview By selecting a memory card including a program storage file (named "FANUCPRG.BIN") as a device, memory operation can be performed with the program in the program storage fil...

  • Page 1182

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1152 - NOTE 4 When the main program is a memory card program, the main program enters the unselected state by a removal operation. Explanation - About operation A memory card program can be selected as a main program to perform memory operation. Me...

  • Page 1183

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1153 - NOTE For a memory card program, subprogram call using M code/S code/T code/particular addresses/the second auxiliary function or macro call using G code/M code can be specified. However, a program on the CNC_MEM device (CNC program storage m...

  • Page 1184

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1154 - CAUTION 4 There are cases in which when a memory card is replaced with another, the CNC cannot detect the replacement. Thus, it is risky to replace a memory card without performing a "removal" operation, and this should never be at...

  • Page 1185

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1155 - NOTE 1 Each folder name must be unique within the same folder. 2 Each time a folder is created, the number of programs that can be registered decreases by one. 3 Depending on the operation status and protection status, a folder cannot sometime...

  • Page 1186

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1156 - NOTE 1 Depending on the operation status and protection status, the attribute of a folder cannot sometimes be changed. 2 When the edit disable attribute is set for a folder, editing of folders and files in that folder is disabled. 3 When the e...

  • Page 1187

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1157 - Use the cursor keys and to move among folders. After selecting the folder, press the key. 5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 6 • To select the foreground, press the soft key [FORE CHANGE]. • To select the background, press the soft key [B...

  • Page 1188

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1158 - 11.8 DELETING A FILE This section explains the procedure for deleting a file. Procedure for deleting a file 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the soft key [FOLDER]. 4 Move to the folder containing the file that you want t...

  • Page 1189

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1159 - • To set encoding, press the soft key [ENCODESET]. • To cancel encoding, press the soft key [ENCODE RESET]. • To change the change protection level, type a change protection level, then press the soft key [CHANGELEVEL]. • To change the...

  • Page 1190

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1160 - 5 Select the file of the program that you want to make compact. To select a file, use the cursor keys and . 6 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 7 Press the soft key [PROGRMCNDENS]. NOTE 1 Depending on the operation status and protection status, ...

  • Page 1191

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1161 - 8 Display the folder to which the program is to be copied or moved. Move the cursor to the folder (indicated by <FOLDER>) on the screen and press to move to the folder. 9 Press soft key [COPY] in the folder to which the selected program...

  • Page 1192

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1162 - 12 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA To operate a CNC machine tool, various data must be set on the MDI panel for the CNC. The operator can monitor the state of operation with data displayed during operation. This chapter describes how to d...

  • Page 1193

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1163 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) ABS REL ALL HNDL (OPRT)Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Position display inthe workpiece coordinate system ⇒ See III-12.1.1Position display i...

  • Page 1194

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1164 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 15-inch display unit) Page 1 (1) ALL ⇒Overall position display ⇒ See III-12.1.10 Actual feedrate display ⇒ See III-12.1.12 Display of run time and parts count ⇒ S...

  • Page 1195

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1165 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) PROGRAM FOLDERNEXT CHECK (OPRT) Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Editing programs⇒ See III-10 Current block display screen ⇒ See III-12.2.5...

  • Page 1196

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1166 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 15-inch display unit) Page 1 (1) PROGRM⇒Editing Programs ⇒ See III-10 (2) FOLDER Program folder screen ⇒ See III-12.2.13 (3) CHECK ⇒Program check sc...

  • Page 1197

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1167 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) OFFSETSETTIN G WORK (OPRT) Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Setting and displaying the tool offset value ⇒ See III-2.1.1*1Displaying and en...

  • Page 1198

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1168 - PR-LV EXTENDOFFSET (OPRT) Page 4 +(16) (17) (18) (19) (20) MACHINLEVEL QUALTYSELECTor or Precision level selection⇒ See III-12.3.12Setting the 4th/5th axis offset ⇒ See III-2.1.8*1 Machining level selection⇒ See ...

  • Page 1199

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1169 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 15-inch display unit) Page 1 Page 2 (1) OFFSET ⇒ Setting and displaying the tool offset value ⇒ See III-2.1.1 *1 (8) 2ND GEOM ⇒ Setting tool compensation/second geo...

  • Page 1200

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1170 - Page 3 (15) PRECI LEVEL MACHINLEVEL QUALTYSELECT⇒Precision level selection ⇒ See III-12.3.29 Machining level selection ⇒ See III-12.3.30 Machining quality level selection ⇒ See III-12.3.31 (16) TOOL LIFE ...

  • Page 1201

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1171 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) PARAMETER DIAGNO SIS SERVO GUIDE SYSTEM (OPRT) Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Displaying and setting parameters ⇒ See III-12.4.1Checking by...

  • Page 1202

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1172 - COLORPERIODMAINTEMAINTE INFO WAVE DIAG (OPRT) Page 5 +(21) (22) (23) (24) (25) Color setting screen ⇒ See III-12.4.9 FSSB PARAM TUNING P.MATE MGR. (OPRT) Page 6 +(26) (27) (28) (29) (30) FSSB data display and se...

  • Page 1203

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1173 - (OPRT) Page 9 +(41) (42) (43) (44) (45) DUAL CHECKR.TIMEMACRO (OPRT) Page 10 +(46) (47) (48) (49) (50) Dual Check Safety diagnosis data ⇒ Dual Check Safety CONNECTION MANUAL (B-64003EN) Real time custom ma...

  • Page 1204

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1174 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 15-inch display unit) Page 1 Page 2 (1) PARAME TER ⇒ Displaying and setting parameters⇒ See III-12.4.13 (8) PMC MAINTE (2) DIAGNO SIS ⇒ Checking by s...

  • Page 1205

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1175 - Page 3 Page 4 (15) FSSB ⇒ FSSB data display and setting screen ⇒ See Maintenance Manual (22) M CODE GROUP ⇒ M code grouping function ⇒ See II-11.3 (16) MCHN TUNING ⇒ Mac...

  • Page 1206

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1176 - Page 5 Page 6 (29) P.MATE MGR. (36) (30) SYSTEM (37) DEVNET MASTER (31) REMOTE DIAG (38) FL-net (32) DUAL CHECK ⇒ Dual Check Safety diagnosis data ⇒ See Dual Check Safety CO...

  • Page 1207

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1177 - 12.1 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY Section 12.1, "SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ", consists of the following subsections: ------ Screens of a 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit ------ 12.1.1 Position Display in the Wor...

  • Page 1208

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1178 - Display procedure for the current position screen in the workpiece coordinate Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press soft key [ABSOLUTE]. Fig. 12.1.1 (a) Current position (absolute) screen (M series)(10.4-inch) Fig. 12.1.1 (b) ...

  • Page 1209

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1179 - T Bit 1 (DAP) parameter No. 3129 and bit 7 (DAC) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to select whether the displayed values include tool offset and tool nose radius compensation. 12.1.2 Position Display in the Relative Coordinate Syste...

  • Page 1210

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1180 - Fig. 12.1.2 (b) Current position (relative) screen (T series) (10.4-inch) See Explanation for the procedure for setting the coordinates. Explanation - Setting the relative coordinates The current position of the tool in the relati...

  • Page 1211

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1181 - T Bit 3 (PPD) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to specify whether the position indication values in the absolute coordinate system are preset as those in the relative coordinate system during coordinate system setting or manual refer...

  • Page 1212

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1182 - Fig. 12.1.3 (b) Current position (overall) screen (T series) (10.4-inch) Explanation - Coordinate display The current positions of the tool in the following coordinate systems are displayed at the same time: • Current position in...

  • Page 1213

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1183 - 3 Enter the axis name (, , ...) and . 4 Press soft key [PRESET]. Explanation - Operation mode This function can be executed when the reset state or automatic operation stop state is entered, regardless of the operation mode. - P...

  • Page 1214

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1184 - Fig. 12.1.5 (b) Current position (absolute) screen (T series) (10.4-inch) The actual feedrate is displayed in units of millimeter/min or inch/min (depending on the specified least input increment) under the display of the current po...

  • Page 1215

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1185 - Procedure for displaying run time and parts count on the current position display screen Procedure 1 Press the function key to display a current position display screen. At the location indicated by , a run time and parts count are d...

  • Page 1216

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1186 - - RUN TIME Indicates the total run time during automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time. - CYCLE TIME Indicates the run time of one automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time. This is automaticall...

  • Page 1217

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1187 - 12.1.8 Operating Monitor Display The load meter for a servo axis can be displayed. Also, the load meter and speed meter for a serial spindle can be displayed. To enable this function, bit 5 (OPM) of parameter No. 3111 must be set to 1...

  • Page 1218

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1188 - Explanation - Display of the servo axes Servo axis load meters as many as the maximum number of controlled axes of the path can be displayed. One screen displays load meters for up to five axes at a time. By pressing the soft key [MO...

  • Page 1219

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1189 - 12.1.9 Display of 3-dimensional Manual Feed (Tool Tip Coordinates, Number of Pulses, Machine Axis Move Amount) The absolute coordinates of the tool tip, the number of pulses, and a machine axis move amount based on 3-dimensional manua...

  • Page 1220

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1190 - R2 The amount of travel in the second axis direction in tool axis right-angle direction handle feed, tool axis right-angle direction jog feed, or tool axis normal direction incremental feed is displayed. The unit is the least input ...

  • Page 1221

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1191 - - F (feedrate) • When bit 3 (CFD) of parameter No. 13113 is set to 0 The composite feedrate at a control point on a linear axis or rotary axis is displayed. • When bit 3 (CFD) of parameter No. 13113 is set to 1 The feedrate of ...

  • Page 1222

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1192 - Fig. 12.1.10 (a) Current position screen (M series) (15-inch) Fig. 12.1.10 (b) Current position screen (T series) (15-inch) Explanation - Coordinate display The current positions of the tool in the following coordinate systems ar...

  • Page 1223

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1193 - - Machine coordinate system The least command increment is used as the unit for values displayed in the machine coordinate system. However, the least input increment can be used by setting bit 0 (MCN) of parameter No. 3104. - Setti...

  • Page 1224

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1194 - Procedure for the workpiece coordinate system preset Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press vertical soft key [ALL]. 3 Enter the axis name (, , ...) and . 4 Press soft key [PRESET]. Explanation - Operation mode This function ca...

  • Page 1225

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1195 - Fig. 12.1.12 (b) Current position screen (T series) (15-inch) The actual feedrate is displayed in units of millimeter/min or inch/min (depending on the specified least input increment) under the display of the current position. Ex...

  • Page 1226

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1196 - Procedure for displaying run time and parts count on the current position display screen Procedure 1 Press the function key to display a current position display screen. At the location indicated by , a run time and parts count are d...

  • Page 1227

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1197 - - RUN TIME Indicates the total run time during automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time. - CYCLE TIME Indicates the run time of one automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time. This is automaticall...

  • Page 1228

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1198 - 12.1.15 Operating Monitor Display (15-inch Display Unit) The load meter for each servo axis can be displayed. Also, the load meter and speed meter for a serial spindle can be displayed. To enable this function, bit 5 (OPM) of paramete...

  • Page 1229

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1199 - Explanation - Display of the servo axes Servo axis load meters as many as the maximum number of controlled axes of the path can be displayed. One screen displays load meters for up to five axes at a time. By pressing the vertical sof...

  • Page 1230

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1200 - 12.1.16 Display of 3-dimensional Manual Feed (Tool Tip Coordinates, Number of Pulses, Machine Axis Move Amount) (15-inch Display Unit) The absolute coordinates of the tool tip, the number of pulses, and a machine axis move amount base...

  • Page 1231

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1201 - The unit is the least input increment of the axis in the second axis direction normal to the direction specified by parameter No. 19697. - Tool tip center (number of pulses) C1 The angular displacement in tool tip center rotation ...

  • Page 1232

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1202 - • When bit 3 (CFD) of parameter No. 13113 is set to 1 The feedrate of the tool tip is displayed. Operation The display of the number of pulses can be cleared to 0 with horizontal soft keys. 1 Select the horizontal soft key corres...

  • Page 1233

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1203 - 12.2 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY Section 12.2, "SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ", consists of the following subsections: ――――― Screens of a 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit 12.2.1 Program Contents Display....

  • Page 1234

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1204 - Fig. 12.2.1 (a) Screen for displaying the program being executed (10.4-inch) 12.2.1.1 Displaying the executed block Overview When the program being executed is displayed, one executed block can be displayed. This function can be en...

  • Page 1235

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1205 - Fig. 12.2.1.1 (b) Screen for displaying the program being executed (MDI mode) Fig. 12.2.1.1 (c) Screen for displaying the program being executed (MEM mode) Explanation - Program look-ahead When an automatic operation cycle starts...

  • Page 1236

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1206 - 12.2.1.2 Text Display Overview Setting bit 1 (APD) of parameter No. 11350 can select whether to display the contents of the running NC program in the look-ahead or text mode. In the look-ahead mode (APD = 0): Displays look-ahead bloc...

  • Page 1237

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1207 - 12.2.2 Editing a Program A program can be edited in the EDIT mode. Two modes of editing are available. One mode is word editing, which performs word-by-word editing. The other is character editing, which performs character-by-charact...

  • Page 1238

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1208 - Fig. 12.2.2 (b) Program character editing screen (10.4-inch) Switching between program editing modes You can switch between word editing and character editing with soft keys. Procedure 1 Press function key to display the program s...

  • Page 1239

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1209 - Fig. 12.2.3 (a) MDI operation program screen (10.4-inch) 12.2.4 Program Folder Screen A list of programs registered in the program memory is displayed. For the program folder screen, see Chapter III-11, “PROGRAM MANAGEMENT”. Di...

  • Page 1240

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1210 - 12.2.4.1 Split display on the program folder screen Overview On the program folder screen, the folder information display can be split into two folder information views, upper and lower, as shown in the Fig. 12.2.4.1 (a). This functio...

  • Page 1241

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1211 - Procedure <1> Change to a destination folder on the Data Server. <2> Change to a folder on the CNC_MEM that contains a file you want to copy. <3> Select the file. <4> Copy the file. Procedure for switching...

  • Page 1242

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1212 - 4 Press soft key [MULTI LIST]. The folder information display is split into two folder views, upper and lower, which show the same folder information. Immediately after the splitting, the upper folder view becomes active for operatio...

  • Page 1243

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1213 - NOTE 1 In step 1, even if you press MDI key and cursor key when the upper folder view is active for file operations, the lower folder view becomes active for file operations. 2 In step 2, even if you press MDI key and cursor key w...

  • Page 1244

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1214 - • CNC MEM • MEM CARD(binary format) • Data Server For other types, the same device cannot be selected for display in the folder views at the same time. If any other type of device is selected when split display starts, the uppe...

  • Page 1245

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1215 - 2 Press chapter selection soft key [CHECK]. The program currently being executed, current position of the tool, and modal data are displayed. Fig. 12.2.6 (a) Program check screen (10.4-inch) Explanation - Program display The prog...

  • Page 1246

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1216 - - Program selected in the foreground If the program selected in the foreground is specified as a program to be edited in the background, background editing is started in the read-only mode. The text at an arbitrary position of the pr...

  • Page 1247

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1217 - displayed. In addition, the current input mode (INSERT MODE or OVERWRITE MODE) is displayed at the upper right of the screen for character editing. The status line of the program being edited is displayed in reverse video. Fig. 12.2...

  • Page 1248

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1218 - Explanation When a program name is input in the key-in buffer, background editing for the program starts. When the specified program is not found, a new program is created and background editing starts. When background editing is star...

  • Page 1249

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1219 - - Ending editing of all programs 1 Press function key . 2 Press soft key [PROGRAM]. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then soft key [BG ALL END]. To return to ordinary foreground editing, end all background editing. If at least one progr...

  • Page 1250

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1220 - 4 When the key is pressed or, M02 or M30 is executed, the machining time count operation stops. When the machining time display screen is selected, the program number of the stopped main program and its machining time are displayed. ...

  • Page 1251

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1221 - Procedure for inserting the machining time on the program screen Procedure You can display the machining time of a program as a comment of the program. The procedure is shown below: 1 To insert the calculated machining time of a prog...

  • Page 1252

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1222 - Press soft key [INSERT TIME]. Fig. 12.2.8 (c) Program screen (10.4-inch) 4 If a comment is written in the block containing the program number of a program of which machining time is to be inserted, the machining time is inserted a...

  • Page 1253

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1223 - Press soft key [INSERT TIME]. Fig. 12.2.8 (d) Program screen (10.4-inch) Display on the program folder screen The machining time of a program inserted in the program as a comment is displayed after the existing comment of the prog...

  • Page 1254

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1224 - Fig. 12.2.8 (e) Program folder screen (10.4-inch) Explanation - Machining time The machining time is counted from the initial start after a reset in the memory operation mode to the next reset. If a reset is not performed during op...

  • Page 1255

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1225 - - Correcting the machining time If an incorrect machining time is calculated (such as when a reset is made during the execution of a program), reexecute the program to calculate the correct machining time. The same program number may...

  • Page 1256

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1226 - 2 When two or more machining times are stamped The first machining time is displayed. Fig. 12.2.8 (g) When two or more machining times are stamped (10.4-inch) 3 When the format of an inserted machining time is not “hhhHmmMssS...

  • Page 1257

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1227 - Fig. 12.2.8 (h) When the format of an inserted machining time is not “hhhHmmMssS” (H following a 3-digit number, M following a 2-digit number, and S following a 2-digit number, in this order) (10.4-inch) 12.2.9 Screen for Assi...

  • Page 1258

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1228 - Creation of a new block The following describes the procedure for creating a tilted working plane command block on guidance screens and for inserting the block to a program being edited on a program editing screen. 1 On a program edi...

  • Page 1259

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1229 - 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press continuous menu key several times, and then press soft key [GUIDANCE]. The command type selection screen is displayed. 5 Select a command type with any of the cursor keys, and then press soft ke...

  • Page 1260

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1230 - 8 Press soft key [YES]. This takes you back to the program editing screen, where the new block is inserted after the block at the cursor position. Modification to an existing block The following describes the procedure for replaci...

  • Page 1261

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1231 - 4 Press continuous menu key several times, and then press soft key [GUIDANCE TWP]. The tilted working plane data setting screen is displayed. 5 Enter command data for setting items to be modified. 6 Press soft key [ALTER]. 7 Pr...

  • Page 1262

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1232 - Guidance screen cancellation Pressing soft key [CANCEL] on a guidance screen takes you back to the program editing screen. At this time, the data that has been set on the guidance screen is discarded. NOTE 1 In addition to the above ...

  • Page 1263

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1233 - When a block of a tool axis direction control command exists immediately after the tilted working plane command, the command data for the block is also shown. The tilted working plane command in the block at the cursor position on th...

  • Page 1264

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1234 - NOTE If the warning "PROGRAM READ FAILED" appears when the command type selection screen is displayed, the operation cannot be continued. (Soft keys other than [CANCEL] are not displayed.) Press soft key [CANCEL] to return ...

  • Page 1265

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1235 - Command data input • Item for which to enter a value Press cursor key or to move the cursor to an item you want to set. Enter a value, and then press the key or soft key [INPUT]. Example) When the origin of a feature coordina...

  • Page 1266

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1236 - Example) G00 X0.; When the guidance screen is displayed and the 3-point specification is selected as a command type for block insertion, a created block is inserted after the block at the cursor position. G00 X0.; G68.2 P2 Q0... G68.2...

  • Page 1267

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1237 - Warning Description “WRITE PROTECT” • A block insertion or replacement operation was performed when the editing or display was prohibited for a program to be edited. • A block insertion or replacement operation was performed w...

  • Page 1268

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1238 - • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of whether tilted working plane command mode is set. Incremental: It is assumed that values of specified data are ...

  • Page 1269

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1239 - • Order of Rotation Select an order in which the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis are rotated in a workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type). The selectable r...

  • Page 1270

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1240 - Fig. 12.2.9.3 (c) Tilted working plane data setting screen- 3 points specification(10.4-inch) • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of whether tilted w...

  • Page 1271

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1241 - G68.2 / G68.4(2 vectors specification) Fig. 12.2.9.3 (d) Tilted working plane data setting screen-2 vectors specification(10.4-inch) • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinat...

  • Page 1272

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1242 - G68.2 / G68.4(Projection angle) Fig. 12.2.9.3 (e) Tilted working plane data setting screen-Projection angle(10.4-inch) • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regar...

  • Page 1273

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1243 - G68.3(Tool Axis Direction) Fig. 12.2.9.3 (f) Tilted working plane data setting screen-Tool Axis Direction(10.4-inch) (When "No" is selected in "Origin command of Feature Coordinate") Fig. 12.2.9.3 (g) Tilted wor...

  • Page 1274

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1244 - • Rotation Angle about the Z-axis in F-Coordinate Specify an angle of rotation around the Z-axis of a feature coordinate system. The direction of rotation angle R is positive when a rotation is made clockwise as viewed in the Z-axi...

  • Page 1275

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1245 - Fig. 12.2.10 (a) Screen for displaying the program being executed (15-inch) 12.2.10.1 Displaying the executed block For an explanation of how to display the executed block, see Subsection 12.2.1.1, "Displaying the executed bloc...

  • Page 1276

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1246 - Fig. 12.2.11 (a) Program word editing screen (15-inch) - Character editing Program editing operations and cursor movements are performed on a character-by-character basis as with a general text editor. Text is input directly to the...

  • Page 1277

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1247 - 4 Pressing horizontal soft key [CHANGE EDITOR] switches the editing mode between word editing and character editing. 12.2.12 Program Screen for MDI Operation (15-inch Display Unit) During MDI operation or editing of an MDI operation ...

  • Page 1278

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1248 - Fig. 12.2.13 (a) Program folder screen (15-inch) 12.2.13.1 Split display on the program folder screen Overview On the program folder screen, the folder information display can be split into two folder information views, upper and lo...

  • Page 1279

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1249 - <3><4><2><1> Procedure <1> Change to a destination folder on the Data Server. <2> Change to a folder on the CNC_MEM that contains a file you want to copy. <3> Select the file. <4> ...

  • Page 1280

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1250 - Fig. 12.2.13.1 (b) Program folder screen normal screen)(15-inch) 4 Press horizontal soft key [MULTI LIST]. The folder information display is split into two folder views, upper and lower, which show the same folder information. Imme...

  • Page 1281

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1251 - Procedure for switching between active folder views for file operations on the split display On the split folder display, you can switch between active folder views for file operations as described below. In the active folder view for...

  • Page 1282

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1252 - Fig. 12.2.13.1 (d) Program folder screen (normal screen)(15-inch) You should see the device information on the normal screen. Limitation - Device that can be selected in both views at the same time on the split display The same de...

  • Page 1283

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1253 - Fig. 12.2.14 (a) Next block display screen (15-inch) 12.2.15 Program Check Screen (15-inch Display Unit) Displays the program currently being executed, current position of the tool, and modal data. Procedure for displaying the prog...

  • Page 1284

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1254 - Explanation - Program display The program currently being executed is displayed. The block being executed is displayed in reverse video. - Current position display The current position in the relative coordinate system, workpiece c...

  • Page 1285

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1255 - - Word editing Fig. 12.2.16 (a) shows background word editing performed simultaneously for two programs (right and left programs). On the status line at the top of the window for each program, the program name and “BG-EDIT” (indi...

  • Page 1286

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1256 - - Editing status The following items are displayed on the status line and program editing area according to the background editing status. Editing status Displayed items No program selected (BG-EDIT) “NO PROGRAM” is displayed in...

  • Page 1287

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1257 - Background editing operation - Editing operation The same editing operations as performed in the foreground can be performed. - Switching from a program to another for editing To switch from a program to another for editing when ed...

  • Page 1288

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1258 - Fig. 12.2.17 (a) Machining time display screen (15-inch) - Calculating the machining time 1 Select the memory operation mode, then press the key. 2 Select the program screen, then select a program of which machining time you want ...

  • Page 1289

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1259 - Fig. 12.2.17 (b) Stamping the machining time (15-inch) Procedure for inserting the machining time on the program screen Procedure You can display the machining time of a program as a comment of the program. The procedure is shown ...

  • Page 1290

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1260 - 3 For example, the machining time of O0100 is displayed on the machining time display screen. Press continuous menu key until horizontal soft key [INSERT TIME] appears. When horizontal soft key [INSERT TIME] is pressed, the start of ...

  • Page 1291

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1261 - Press soft key [INSERT TIME]. Fig. 12.2.17 (d) Program screen (15-inch) Display on the program folder screen The machining time of a program inserted in the program as a comment is displayed after the existing comment of the progr...

  • Page 1292

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1262 - Fig. 12.2.17 (e) Program folder screen (15-inch) Explanation - Machining time The machining time is counted from the initial start after a reset in the memory operation mode to the next reset. If a reset is not performed during ope...

  • Page 1293

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1263 - - Correcting the machining time If an incorrect machining time is calculated (such as when a reset is made during the execution of a program), reexecute the program to calculate the correct machining time. The same program number may...

  • Page 1294

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1264 - 2 When two or more machining times are stamped The first machining time is displayed. Fig. 12.2.17 (g) When two or more machining times are stamped (15-inch)

  • Page 1295

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1265 - 3 When the format of an inserted machining time is not “hhhHmmMssS” (H following a 3-digit number, M following a 2-digit number, and S following a 2-digit number, in this order) The machining time display field is left blank. ...

  • Page 1296

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1266 - The created block is reflected as a new insertion to a program being edited or as a modification to an existing block. This function can be enabled by setting bit 1 (GGD) of parameter No. 11304 to 1. Creation of a new block The follo...

  • Page 1297

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1267 - Note that a block created on the guidance screens is inserted after the block at the cursor position. (If the block at the cursor position includes a tilted working plane command, the existing block is modified. See "Modificatio...

  • Page 1298

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1268 - 7 Press horizontal soft key [YES]. This takes you back to the program editing screen, where the new block is inserted after the block at the cursor position. Modification to an existing block The following describes the procedure...

  • Page 1299

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1269 - 3 Press continuous menu key several times, and then press horizontal soft key [GUIDANCE TWP]. The tilted working plane data setting screen is displayed. 4 Enter command data for setting items to be modified. 5 Press horizontal soft...

  • Page 1300

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1270 - NOTE 1 In addition to the above operation, the following operations also cancel a guidance screen. The data that has been set on the guidance screen is discarded. • When bit 7 (CPG) of parameter No. 11302 is 1 (setting for automatic...

  • Page 1301

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1271 - NOTE If the CNC is in the reset state or emergency stop state when horizontal soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] is pressed on the foreground editing screen or MDI editing screen, the warning "PROGRAM READ FAILED" appears, and the ope...

  • Page 1302

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1272 - NOTE If the warning "PROGRAM READ FAILED" appears when the command type selection screen is displayed, the operation cannot be continued. (Horizontal soft keys other than [CANCEL] are not displayed.) Press horizontal soft k...

  • Page 1303

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1273 - Command data input • Item for which to enter a value Press cursor key or to move the cursor to an item you want to set. Enter a value, and then press the key or horizontal soft key [INPUT]. Example) When the origin of a fea...

  • Page 1304

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1274 - ↓Example) G00 X0.; When the guidance screen is displayed and the 3-point specification is selected as a command type for block insertion, a created block is inserted after the block at the cursor position. G00 X0.; G68.2 P2 Q0... G6...

  • Page 1305

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1275 - Warning Description “WRITE PROTECT” • A block insertion or replacement operation was performed when the editing or display was prohibited for a program to be edited. • A block insertion or replacement operation was performed w...

  • Page 1306

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1276 - • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of whether tilted working plane command mode is set. Incremental: It is assumed that values of specified data are ...

  • Page 1307

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1277 - • Order of Rotation Select an order in which the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis are rotated in a workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type). The selectable r...

  • Page 1308

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1278 - Fig. 12.2.18.3 (c) Tilted working plane data setting screen- 3 points specification(15-inch) • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of whether tilted wo...

  • Page 1309

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1279 - G68.2 / G68.4(2 vectors specification) Fig. 12.2.18.3 (d) Tilted working plane data setting screen-2 vectors specification(15-inch) • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate ...

  • Page 1310

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1280 - G68.2 / G68.4(Projection angle) Fig. 12.2.18.3 (e) Tilted working plane data setting screen-Projection angle(15-inch) • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regard...

  • Page 1311

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1281 - G68.3(Tool Axis Direction) Fig. 12.2.18.3 (f) Tilted working plane data setting screen-Tool Axis Direction(15-inch) (When "No" is selected in "Origin command of Feature Coordinate") Fig. 12.2.18.3 (g) Tilted wor...

  • Page 1312

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1282 - • Rotation Angle about the Z-axis in F-Coordinate Specify an angle of rotation around the Z-axis of a feature coordinate system. The direction of rotation angle R is positive when a rotation is made clockwise as viewed in the Z-axi...

  • Page 1313

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1283 - 12.3 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY Section 12.3, “SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY “, consists of the following subsections: ――――― Screens of a 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit 12.3.1 Displaying and Entering Setting ...

  • Page 1314

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1284 - Screens of a 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit Press function key to display or set tool compensation values and other data. This section describes how to display or set the following data: 1. Tool compensation value 2. Settings 3. Sequ...

  • Page 1315

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1285 - Fig. 12.3.1 (a) SETTING (HANDY) screen (10.4-inch) Fig. 12.3.1 (b) SETTING (MIRROR IMAGE) screen (10.4-inch) 4 Move the cursor to the item to be changed by pressing cursor keys . 5 Enter a new value and press soft key [INPUT]. E...

  • Page 1316

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1286 - 1 : Perform TV check - PUNCH CODE Setting code when data is output through reader/puncher interface. 0 : EIA code output 1 : ISO code output - INPUT UNIT Setting a program input unit, inch or metric system 0 : Metric 1 : Inch - ...

  • Page 1317

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1287 - 2 Press function key . 3 Press chapter selection soft key [SETTING]. 4 Press page key or several times until the following screen is displayed. Fig. 12.3.2 (a) SETTING (HANDY) screen (10.4-inch) 5 Enter in (PROGRAM NO.) for SEQUE...

  • Page 1318

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1288 - - When the same sequence number is found several times in the program If the predetermined sequence number appears twice or more in a program, the execution of the program stops after the block in which the predetermined sequence num...

  • Page 1319

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1289 - Explanation - PARTS TOTAL This value is incremented by one when M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed. This value cannot be set on this screen. Set the value in parameter No. 6712. - PARTS REQUIRED It i...

  • Page 1320

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1290 - - Time settings Neither negative value nor the value exceeding the value in the following table can be set. Table 12.3.3 (a) Item Maximum value Item Maximum value Year 2096 Hour 23 Month 12 Minute 59 Day 31 Second 59 12.3.4 Displayi...

  • Page 1321

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1291 - 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to change other offset values. 8 Turn on the data protection key to disable writing. 12.3.5 Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Measured This function is used to compensate for the difference between ...

  • Page 1322

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1292 - Fig. 12.3.5 (a) WORK COORDINATES screen (10.4-inch) 6 Position the cursor to the workpiece origin offset value to be set. 7 Press the address key for the axis along which the offset is to be set (Y-axis in this example). 8 Enter the...

  • Page 1323

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1293 - Fig. 12.3.6 (a) CUSTOM MACRO screen (10.4-inch) 3 Move the cursor to the variable number to set using either of the following methods: • Enter the variable number and press soft key [NO.SRH]. • Move the cursor to the variable nu...

  • Page 1324

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1294 - Temporary RTM variables are cleared to 0 when the power is turned off. System variables (DI/DO variables) dedicated to real time custom macros are used to read and write PMC interface signals. Data can be read and written in bit and b...

  • Page 1325

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1295 - Fig. 12.3.7 (b) BYTE SELECT screen (10.4-inch) 4 Move the cursor to the number of a DI/DO variable you want to set using either of the following methods: • Enter the number and press soft key [NO. SRH]. • Move the cursor to a de...

  • Page 1326

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1296 - Fig. 12.3.8 (a) Page 1 of Software Operator’s Panel screen (without the manual handle feed function) (10.4-inch) Fig. 12.3.8 (b) Page 1 of Software Operator’s Panel screen (with the manual handle feed function) (10.4-inch)

  • Page 1327

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1297 - Fig. 12.3.8 (c) Page 2 of Software Operator’s Panel screen (10.4-inch) 4 Move the cursor to the desired switch by pressing cursor key or . 5 Push the cursor key or to match the mark to an arbitrary position and set the desired...

  • Page 1328

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1298 - - Jog feed and arrow keys The feed axis and direction corresponding to the arrow keys can be set with parameters Nos. 7210 to 7217. - General purpose switches For the meanings of these switches, refer to the manual issued by machin...

  • Page 1329

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1299 - 6 To end the edit operation, press soft key [EXIT]. This returns the screen display to the conventional tool management screen. Explanation - Another method Magazine data can be input/output also by using external I/O devices. See I...

  • Page 1330

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1300 - Fig. 12.3.9.2 (a) Tool management data screen (10.4-inch) 4 By using the page keys, cursor keys, and soft keys [←] and [→], move the cursor to the position of the tool information of the tool number for which you want to set or ...

  • Page 1331

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1301 - 8 When soft key [CHECK] is pressed, if there are tools with the same number but with different count types (count and time), the cursor moves to the tool type number of the smallest tool management number in the tool type numbers and ...

  • Page 1332

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1302 - NOTE 1 The tool types and data access information vary depending on the specifications defined by the machine tool builder. 2 The same type of tools must have the same life count type. L-COUNT : The number of use times/use period of...

  • Page 1333

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1303 - • Tool offset information Fig. 12.3.9.2 (e) Tool management data tool offset screen (10.4-inch) H : Tool length compensation number (for machining center systems only). A value from 0 to 999 can be set. D : Cutter compensation n...

  • Page 1334

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1304 - CUSTOM1 to 4 : Customize information. Any value from -99,999,999 to 99,999,999 can be set. CUSTOM5 to 20 : Customize information. These items are displayed only when customize data extension option (5 to 20) of the tool management fun...

  • Page 1335

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1305 - Fig. 12.3.9.3 (a) Each tool data screen (10.4-inch) Explanation - Header The following four data items are displayed: NO., TYPE NO., MG, and POT. When the data table of a tool extends over two or more pages, the same header is disp...

  • Page 1336

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1306 - Moves the cursor left on the screen. When the cursor is on the left column of the data table, it moves to the right column on the row immediately above. When the cursor is on the first data item, it moves to the last data item. Move...

  • Page 1337

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1307 - 12.3.9.4 Displaying the total life of tools of the same type Total life data screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press chapter selection soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. Alternatively, press key several times until the tool managemen...

  • Page 1338

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1308 - Displayed information S-NO. : Sequential number of each tool type TYPE NO. : Tool type number T-REM-LIFE : Total of remaining life values of tools with the same tool type number T-L-COUNT : Total of used counts/times of tools with the...

  • Page 1339

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1309 - NOTE 2 When the power is turned on, data of the count counting type is displayed in ascending order of tool type numbers. When the display type is changed or data is sorted in a different order, the status is kept. 3 If soft key [DETA...

  • Page 1340

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1310 - Key operations - MDI key operations Displays the previous page. Displays the next page. Moves the cursor up on the screen. The cursor moves to the last data item on that page. Moves the cursor down on the screen. The cursor moves...

  • Page 1341

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1311 - Fig. 12.3.9.5 (a) Tool geometry data screen (10.4-inch) - Displayed item NO. : Tool geometry number Up to 20 numbers can be displayed. LEFT : Sets the number of pots on the left of the reference pot that are to be occupied. A v...

  • Page 1342

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1312 - Soft key [PUNCH] Punches data related to the tool management functions. This key is available only in the standard mode. Put the NC in the EDIT mode. In the management data edit mode, the following key operations are available in a...

  • Page 1343

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1313 - Fig. 12.3.9.5 (c) Magazine management table (10.4-inch) If a tool to be registered for a magazine is determined to interfere with another tool, the warning message “TOOL INTERFERENCE CHECK ERROR:xxxx,xxxx” is displayed. xxxx ind...

  • Page 1344

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1314 - EMPTY-SRCH : Searches for the pot nearest to the current position. - Tool management screen You can use bit 2 of tool information to switch between a oversize tool and normal tool. For a oversize tool, set a tool geometry number fit...

  • Page 1345

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1315 - Displaying and setting the display language Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press the continuous menu key several times. 3 Press soft key [LANGUAGE] to display the language screen. Fig. 12.3.10 (a) LANGUAGE screen (10.4-inch) 4 ...

  • Page 1346

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1316 - 17. Russian 18. Turkish Among the languages listed above, English and other usable languages are displayed on the screen as a list of switchable languages. Limitation - Language parameter modification on the parameter screen Which ...

  • Page 1347

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1317 - 4 Key in the password for an operation level to be set/modified, then press soft key [INPUT PASSWD]. 5 To return the operation level to 0, 1, 2, or 3, press soft key [CANCEL PASSWD]. Explanation - Operation level setting To select o...

  • Page 1348

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1318 - Fig. 12.3.11.2 (a) PASSWORD CHANGE screen (10.4-inch) 5 Key in an operation level whose password is to be modified, then press soft key [INPUT]. 6 Key in the current password for the operation level whose password is to be modified,...

  • Page 1349

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1319 - The change protection level and output protection level of each data item are displayed. The change protection level and output protection level of each data item can be changed. Confirmation based on protection level setting Procedu...

  • Page 1350

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1320 - Table 12.3.11.3 (a) Protection level of each type of data Initial protection level Type of data Change Output Custom macro variable data <CUSTOM MACRO> (including variable data dedicated to the macro executor) 0 0 Periodical mai...

  • Page 1351

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1321 - NOTE 7 The type of tool offset data put in effect varies depending on the tool compensation value memory used. 8 To change the protection level for each part program, do so on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen rather than on the PROTECT LEVEL...

  • Page 1352

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1322 - 8 Key in a new desired level, then press soft key [CHANGE LEVEL]. 9 To change the output protection level, key in a new desired level, then press soft key [OUT LEVEL]. Explanation The change protection level (0 to 7) and output prote...

  • Page 1353

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1323 - Fig. 12.3.12 (b) Precision level selection screen (10.4-inch) 4 To change the precision level, key in a desired precision level (1 to 10), then press the key on the MDI panel. 5 When the precision level is changed, a RMS value is o...

  • Page 1354

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1324 - 2 Press function key . 3 Press soft key [PRECI LEVEL]. 4 Press soft key [SMOOTH LEVEL]. Fig. 12.3.13.1 (b) Smoothing level selection screen (10.4inch) 5 To change the smoothing level, key in a desired smoothing level (1 to 10), th...

  • Page 1355

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1325 - Fig. 12.3.14 (a) Quality level selection (1) New level mark Yellow square: Indicates the setting to be selected. (Cursor position) (2) Current level mark Red circle: Indicates the current setting. (3) Smoothing level Vertical axi...

  • Page 1356

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1326 - 5 Press soft key [APPLY] or MDI key to set the level. (The current level mark moves to the position of the new level mark.) Whether to enable or disable MDI key operation can be switched by setting the relevant parameter. 6 The set p...

  • Page 1357

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1327 - Overview ENDEDIT List screen Tool life management (list screen) Displayed items: - NEXT GROUP - SELECTED GROUP - GROUP NO. - LIFE - TOOL MANAGEMENT STATUS - GROUP TO BE CHANGE Functions: - Searching for groups - Clearing execu...

  • Page 1358

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1328 - If the ATC type is in use (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1) • The D code is displayed on the group editing screen. • If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1) and bit 5 (TGN) o...

  • Page 1359

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1329 - NOTE If arbitrary group numbers are enabled, NEXT GROUP, USING GROUP, and SELECTED GROUP are each represented with an arbitrary group number rather than the tool group number. - Contents of (B) (B) displays the set life value, the ...

  • Page 1360

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1330 - M • The tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1). • Arbitrary group numbers are enabled (bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 = 1). T • The current tool change type is ATC (bit 3 (TCT) of p...

  • Page 1361

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1331 - NOTE Setting bit 4 (GRS) of parameter No. 6800 to 1 enables execution data for all registered tool groups to be cleared. - Selecting tool groups Tool groups can be selected using the following methods. Method 1 1 Enter a tool group...

  • Page 1362

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1332 - (A) (B) Fig. 12.3.15.2 (a) Displaying tool life management (group editing screen) (10.4-inch) NOTE If no tool is registered with a tool group, none of a life count type, a life value, and a tool life counter value is displayed for...

  • Page 1363

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1333 - T-CODE : Tool number M H-CODE : Tool length compensation specification code D-CODE : Cutter compensation specification code T H-CODE : No display. D-CODE : Tool offset value specification code if ATC type is in use (bit 3 (TCT) of ...

  • Page 1364

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1334 - ATC type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1) OPTION GROUP : Arbitrary group number (if bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 = 1) REST COUNT : Remaining set value used until a new tool is selected (if bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 680...

  • Page 1365

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1335 - NOTE 3 The following editing operations may reset the tool change signal to “0”. - Adding tool numbers, leading to tools whose life has not expired being set in the tool group of interest. - Selecting tool clear. Procedure - Set...

  • Page 1366

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1336 - (Example) Adding tool number 1550 between numbers 1 and 2 (for the M series) 1 Move the cursor to the data for number 1, enter “1550”, and press [INSERT]. 2 The entered T code 1550 is inserted in the position of number 2. The ...

  • Page 1367

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1337 - Method 1 1 Enter a tool group number from the keypad. 2 Press soft key [NO.SRH]. NOTE If arbitrary group numbers are enabled, a tool group is selected by searching for an arbitrary group number rather than the tool group number. Me...

  • Page 1368

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1338 - Rotation axis names specified in parameters Nos. 19681 and 19686 are displayed in the axis name fields. Table rotation axis positions 1 and 2 are specified for rotation axes. No position must be specified for axes (including virtual a...

  • Page 1369

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1339 - Fig. 12.3.17 (a) Pattern menu screen (10.4-inch) On this screen, a pattern to be used can be selected. The following two methods can be used to select patterns. • Using the cursor 1 Move the cursor to a pattern name you want to s...

  • Page 1370

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1340 - 3 After entering all necessary data, select the MEMORY mode and press the cycle start button. Machining begins. Explanation - Explanations about the pattern menu screen HOLE PATTERN An arbitrary character string consisting of 12...

  • Page 1371

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1341 - Fig. 12.3.18 (a) Tool offset screen (10.4-inch display unit) Fig. 12.3.18 (b) Tool offset screen (10.4-inch display unit) X : Set the X-axis tool offset value. Z/LENGTH : Set the Z-axis tool offset value or tool length compensatio...

  • Page 1372

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1342 - setting and press soft key [+INPUT]. Alternatively, enter a new offset value and press soft key [INPUT]. Explanation - Decimal point programming The offset value can be entered with a decimal point. - Another setting method The to...

  • Page 1373

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1343 - Screens of a 15-inch display unit 12.3.19 Displaying and Entering Setting Data (15-inch Display Unit) Data such as the TV check flag and punch code is set on the setting data screen. On this screen, the operator can also enable/disab...

  • Page 1374

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1344 - Fig. 12.3.19 (b) SETTING (MIRROR IMAGE) screen (15-inch) 4 Move the cursor to the item to be changed by pressing cursor keys . 5 Enter a new value and press horizontal soft key [INPUT]. Explanation - PARAMETER WRITE Setting wheth...

  • Page 1375

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1345 - - SEQUENCE NO. Setting of whether to perform automatic insertion of the sequence number or not at program edit in the EDIT mode. 0 : Does not perform automatic sequence number insertion. 1 : Perform automatic sequence number insertio...

  • Page 1376

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1346 - Fig. 12.3.20 (a) SETTING (HANDY) screen (15-inch) 5 Enter in (PROGRAM NO.) for SEQUENCE STOP the number (1 to 99999999) of the program containing the sequence number with which operation stops. 6 Enter in (SEQUENCE NO.) for SEQUENCE...

  • Page 1377

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1347 - 12.3.21 Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time (15-inch Display Unit) Various run times, the total number of machined parts, number of parts required, and number of machined parts can be displayed. This data can be se...

  • Page 1378

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1348 - - PARTS COUNT This value is incremented by one when M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed. The value can also be set by parameter No. 6711. In general, this value is reset when it reaches the number of pa...

  • Page 1379

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1349 - 12.3.22 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value (15-inch Display Unit) Displays the workpiece origin offset for each workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59, G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P48 and G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P300) and exter...

  • Page 1380

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1350 - 12.3.23 Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Measured (15-inch Display Unit) This function is used to compensate for the difference between the programmed workpiece coordinate system and the actual workpiece coordinate system...

  • Page 1381

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1351 - Fig. 12.3.23 (b) WORK COORDINATES screen (15-inch) 6 Position the cursor to the workpiece origin offset value to be set. 7 Press the address key for the axis along which the offset is to be set (Y-axis in this example). 8 Enter the ...

  • Page 1382

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1352 - Fig. 12.3.24 (a) CUSTOM MACRO screen (15-inch) 3 Move the cursor to the variable number to set using either of the following methods: • Enter the variable number and press horizontal soft key [NO.SRH]. • Move the cursor to the v...

  • Page 1383

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1353 - The values of permanent RTM variables are kept stored after the power is turned off. Temporary RTM variables are cleared to 0 when the power is turned off. System variables (DI/DO variables) dedicated to real time custom macros are u...

  • Page 1384

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1354 - Fig. 12.3.25 (b) BYTE SELECT screen (15-inch) 4 Move the cursor to the number of a DI/DO variable you want to set using either of the following methods: • Enter the number and press horizontal soft key [NO. SRH]. • Move the curs...

  • Page 1385

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1355 - Fig. 12.3.26 (a) Without the manual handle feed function (15-inch) Fig. 12.3.26 (b) With the manual handle feed function (15-inch)

  • Page 1386

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1356 - Fig. 12.3.26 (c) (15-inch) 4 Move the cursor to the desired switch by pressing cursor key or . 5 Push the cursor key or to match the mark to an arbitrary position and set the desired condition. 6 Press one of the following arrow...

  • Page 1387

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1357 - - Jog feed and arrow keys The feed axis and direction corresponding to the arrow keys can be set with parameters (Nos. 7210 to 7217). - General purpose switches For the meanings of these switches, refer to the manual issued by mach...

  • Page 1388

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1358 - 5 To set the tool management data number of a pot, type the tool management data number, then press MDI key . To delete the tool management data number set for a pot, follow the steps below. <1> Press horizontal soft key [ERASE...

  • Page 1389

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1359 - Fig. 12.3.27.2 (a) Tool management data screen (15-inch) 4 By using the page keys, cursor keys, and horizontal soft keys [←] and [→], move the cursor to the position of the tool information of the tool number for which you want ...

  • Page 1390

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1360 - 7 To end the edit operation, press horizontal soft key [EXIT]. This returns the screen display to the conventional tool management screen. Fig. 12.3.27.2 (b) Tool management data screen (check function) (15-inch) 8 When horizontal ...

  • Page 1391

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1361 - - Displayed information • Life information Fig. 12.3.27.2 (c) Tool management data life status screen(15-inch) NO. : Tool management data numbers are displayed. These numbers can be displayed but cannot be set. The tool managemen...

  • Page 1392

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1362 - One of the four states, including invalid (0), present (1, 2), not present (3), and broken (4), is indicated. The numbers in parentheses are data values used when these states are input in MDI. • Spindle speed/feedrate Fig. 12.3...

  • Page 1393

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1363 - D : Cutter compensation number (for machining center systems only). A value from 0 to 999 can be set. TG : Tool geometry compensation number (for lathe systems only). A value from 0 to 999 can be set. TW : Tool wear compensation n...

  • Page 1394

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1364 - When cutting is performed for 10 minutes with an override of 0.1, one minute is counted in the tool life counter. - Tool management extension function When tool management extension functions are enabled, you can use the following ...

  • Page 1395

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1365 - Explanation - Header The following four data items are displayed: NO., TYPE NO., MG, and POT. When the data table of a tool extends over two or more pages, the same header is displayed on these pages. - Data table The data table sh...

  • Page 1396

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1366 - Horizontal soft key [NEXT.TOOL] Proceeds to the next tool management number. Horizontal soft key [READ] Reads data related to the tool management function. Can be used only in the standard mode. Requires placing the NC in the EDIT...

  • Page 1397

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1367 - 3 Press vertical soft key [TOTAL LIFE]. The total life data screen appears. 4 Using horizontal soft key [CHANGE] can switch total tool life data displays between specification by count and specification by duration. Fig. 12.3.27.4 (...

  • Page 1398

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1368 - Either of the two states (UNDONE and DONE) is displayed. NUM : Number of tools with the same tool type number When bit 3 (ETE) of parameter No. 13200 is set to 0 and bit 2 (TRT) of parameter No. 13200 is set to 1, the tool life arr...

  • Page 1399

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1369 - Fig. 12.3.27.4 (c) Detailed life data screen (15-inch) - Displayed information TYPE NO. : Tool type number ORDER : Sequential number in ascending order of remaining life times or the order in which the customize data is set. NO. :...

  • Page 1400

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1370 - Closes the detailed life data screen and returns to the total life data screen. NOTE When horizontal soft key [CLOSE] is pressed and the total life data screen is displayed again, the cursor on the total life screen data is positio...

  • Page 1401

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1371 - Key operations - Operations in the standard mode MDI key operations Numeral keys Inputs a numeric value. Moves the cursor up on the screen. Moves the cursor down on the screen. Moves the cursor left on the screen. Moves ...

  • Page 1402

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1372 - Fig. 12.3.27.5 (b) Example of setting data on the tool geometry data screen (15-inch) - Display of occupied pots in the magazine management table Each pot occupied by a tool stored in another pot is indicated with an asterisk (*). ...

  • Page 1403

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1373 - Fig. 12.3.27.5 (d) Searching for an empty pot for a oversize tool (15-inch) Enter the tool geometry number in the key-in buffer and press a search horizontal soft key. The cursor moves to an empty pot fit for the geometry. EMPTY-SRC...

  • Page 1404

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1374 - Fig. 12.3.27.5 (f) Tool geometry number (15-inch)

  • Page 1405

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1375 - 12.3.28 Displaying and Switching the Display Language (15-inch Display Unit) The language used for display can be switched to another language. A display language can be set using a parameter. However, by modifying the setting of the ...

  • Page 1406

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1376 - 9. Spanish 10. Dutch 11. Danish 12. Portuguese 13. Polish 14. Hungarian 15. Swedish 16. Czech 17. Russian 18. Turkish Among the languages listed above, English and other usable languages are displayed on the screen as a list of switch...

  • Page 1407

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1377 - Fig. 12.3.29.1 (a) Operation level setting screen (15-inch) 4 Key in the password for an operation level to be set/modified, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT PASSWD]. 5 To return the operation level to 0, 1, 2, or 3, press hori...

  • Page 1408

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1378 - Displaying and setting the password modification screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times to display soft key [PROTECT]. 3 Press vertical soft key [PROTECT]. 4 Press vertical soft ke...

  • Page 1409

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1379 - NOTE 3 Whether a password can be changed at the current operation level is determined as follows: • Password of an operation level higher than the current operation level Cannot be changed. • Password of the current operation lev...

  • Page 1410

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1380 - NOTE When the protection level of PMC data is set, soft key [SWITCH PMC] is used to switch between PMC paths to be set, for multi-path PMC. Explanation When the protection level of a data item is higher than the current operation le...

  • Page 1411

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1381 - Initial protection level Type of data Change Output PMC memory 0 0 NOTE 1 For some types of data, the output function is not provided. 2 When the protection level of data is higher than the current operation level, the protection lev...

  • Page 1412

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1382 - Fig. 12.3.29.4 (a) Program directory screen (15-inch) 3 Press horizontal soft key [DETAIL ON] to switch to detail displays. 4 Move the cursor to a desired program. 5 Press the continuous menu key to display horizontal soft key [CHA...

  • Page 1413

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1383 - Value RMS value 1 10 Precision level (RMS value: Root-Mean-Square value) Fig. 12.3.30 (a) Image of "level" Procedure for precision level selection 1 Select the MDI mode. 2 Press function ke...

  • Page 1414

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1384 - 12.3.31 Machining Level Selection (15-inch Display Unit) 12.3.31.1 Smoothing Level Selection An intermediate smoothing level between the parameters for smoothing level 1 and the parameters for smoothing level 10 set on the machining p...

  • Page 1415

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1385 - 7 If there is an axis in addition to the currently displayed axes, press page key or several times to display the screen for the axis. 12.3.31.2 Precision level selection For details of precision level selection, See Subsection 12....

  • Page 1416

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1386 - Fig. 12.3.32 (b) Machining quality level selection screen (15-inch) 4 Use cursor keys to move the new level mark and select the level. (The new level mark moves.) 5 Press soft key [APPLY] or MDI key to set the level. (The current l...

  • Page 1417

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1387 - Overview END EDIT List screen Tool life management (list screen) Displayed items: - NEXT GROUP - USING GROUP - SELECTED GROUP - COUNT OVERRIDE - GROUP NO. - COUNT TYPE - LIFE - LIFE COUNT - TOOL MANAGEMENT STATUS - REGISTERED...

  • Page 1418

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1388 - • Neither the H code nor the D code is used; neither is displayed. • No arbitrary group can be used; no arbitrary group is displayed. If the ATC type is in use (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1) • The D code is displayed on...

  • Page 1419

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1389 - NOTE If arbitrary group numbers are enabled, NEXT GROUP, USING GROUP, and SELECTED GROUP are each represented with an arbitrary group number rather than the tool group number. - Contents of (B) (B) displays the set life value, the c...

  • Page 1420

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1390 - M • The tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1). • Arbitrary group numbers are enabled (bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 = 1). T • The current tool change type is ATC (bit 3 (TCT) of...

  • Page 1421

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1391 - 3 Press horizontal soft key [EXEC]. NOTE Setting bit 4 (GRS) of parameter No. 6800 to 1 enables execution data for all registered tool groups to be cleared. - Selecting tool groups Tool groups can be selected using the following ...

  • Page 1422

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1392 - (A) (B) Fig. 12.3.33.2 (a) Displaying tool life management (group editing screen) (15-inch) NOTE If no tool is registered with a tool group, none of a life count type, a life value, and a tool life counter value is displayed for t...

  • Page 1423

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1393 - T-CODE : Tool number M H-CODE : Tool length compensation specification code D-CODE : Cutter compensation specification code T H-CODE : No display. D-CODE : Tool offset value specification code if ATC type is in use (bit 3 (TCT) o...

  • Page 1424

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1394 - REST COUNT : Remaining set value used until a new tool is selected (if bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 6802 = 1) ATC type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1) OPTION GROUP : Arbitrary group number (if bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 680...

  • Page 1425

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1395 - NOTE 2 The following editing operations may set the tool change signal to “1”. - Selecting tool skip for the last tool. - Deleting tool numbers, resulting in any tool other than those whose life has expired or who have been skippe...

  • Page 1426

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1396 - - Adding tool numbers Tool numbers can be added to a tool group as follows: 1 Select the MDI mode. 2 Place the cursor on the tool data (T code, H code, or D code) just before a tool number to be added. 3 Enter the tool number from th...

  • Page 1427

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1397 - 3 Press horizontal soft key [STATE]. 4 Press horizontal soft key [CLEAR]. - Selecting a tool group A tool group can be selected as follows: Method 1 1 Enter a tool group number from the keypad. 2 Press horizontal soft key [NO.SRH]...

  • Page 1428

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1398 - 12.3.34 Displaying and Setting Workpiece Setting Error Compensation Data (15-inch Display Unit) An amount of error used in workpiece setting error compensation can be set on the workpiece setting error screen. The workpiece setting er...

  • Page 1429

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1399 - • After a workpiece setting error number you want to display is entered, pressing horizontal soft key [NO.SRH] causes a setting screen for the target workpiece setting error to appear. • After a number is entered, pressing horizon...

  • Page 1430

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1400 - 1 Move the cursor to a pattern name you want to select, using cursor key or , and then press soft key [SELECT] or . • Specifying a pattern number 1 Enter a number displayed at the left side of a pattern name, and press soft key [SE...

  • Page 1431

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1401 - The comment text consists of nine 12-character blocks, or the comment can be up to 12 lines (10.4-inch display) or 8 lines (7.2 or 8.4-inch display) with one block counted as one line. Machine tool builders should program variable ...

  • Page 1432

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1402 - 12.3.36 Built-in 3D Interference Check On the setting screens of the built-in 3D interference check function, the following operations can be performed: • Sets each target figure for interference check. • Checks the current settin...

  • Page 1433

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1403 - 12.3.36.1 Monitor menu screen Screen configuration On the monitor menu screen, select a tool, tool holder, or object to display information related to the selected item. The following information is displayed according to the type of ...

  • Page 1434

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1404 - NOTE Set the names of tools, tool holders, and objects which are to interfere with a tool on the relevant setting screen described later. Operation On the monitor menu screen, the following soft keys are available to perform operati...

  • Page 1435

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1405 - 3 Press soft key [EXEC]. Pressing soft key [EXEC] determines the change of the drawing coordinate system. To cancel the change of the drawing coordinate system, press soft key [CANCEL]. The shape for check returns to the state present...

  • Page 1436

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1406 - Operation On the tool monitor screen, the following soft keys are available to perform operation: [MENU] Displays the monitor menu screen. [UPDATE] Updates the display of the shape for check. [ROTATION] Rotates the shape for chec...

  • Page 1437

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1407 - Fig. 12.3.36.3 (b) Object monitor screen (15-inch) Operation On the tool holder and object monitor screen, the following soft keys are available to perform operation: [MENU] Displays the monitor menu screen. [UPDATE] Updates the di...

  • Page 1438

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1408 - Fig. 12.3.36.4 (a) Figure setting menu screen (10.4 -inch) Fig. 12.3.36.4 (b) Figure setting menu screen (15 -inch) The maximum number of objects that can be set is 3 in 1-path control or 6 in multi-path control. The maximum numbe...

  • Page 1439

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1409 - In a multi-path system, not data for each path, but data common to the system is set. Data may be set for any path. The following explanations of screens are common to objects 1 to 6 and tool holders 1 to 4. 12.3.36.5 Object figure ...

  • Page 1440

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1410 - Fig. 12.3.36.5 (b) Object figure setting screen (15-inch) In the above setting example, figure 1 consists of three rectangular parallelepipeds (Figure element 1 = Shape number 10, Figure element 2 = Shape number 11, and Figure eleme...

  • Page 1441

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1411 - Pressing soft key [ROTATION] causes soft keys for rotation operation to appear. Fig. 12.3.36.5 (c) Soft keys for rotation operation Soft key [↑] Rotates the shape for check upward. Soft key [↓] Rotates the shape for check downw...

  • Page 1442

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1412 - Procedure for editing shape data To edit shape data, use the following procedure: Move the cursor to the SHAPE NO. field for a figure element you want to edit. Press soft key [EDIT]. Pressing soft key [EDIT] causes the setting scree...

  • Page 1443

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1413 - NOTE Set this item only for a tool having no chip. • Reference angle 1(master rotation axis): Angle of the master rotation axis to be assumed for the measurement of each figure when the tool holder rotates as the rotation axis is ...

  • Page 1444

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1414 - Fig. 12.3.36.6 (a) Tool holder figure setting screen (10.4-inch) Fig. 12.3.36.6 (b) Tool holder figure setting screen (15-inch) The number of figures that can be defined for tool holders is as follows: Up to 120 in a 1-path system...

  • Page 1445

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1415 - CAUTION The setting you make is not updated until you turn the power off, then on again, or set the 3D interference check-related change signal TDICHG <G519.4> to 1. Shape type display To the right of each shape number, the i...

  • Page 1446

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1416 - Procedure for changing the shape type To change the shape type of set shape data, use the following procedure: Move the cursor to the SHAPE NO. field for the figure element of which shape type you want to change. Press soft key [SH...

  • Page 1447

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1417 - Fig. 12.3.36.7 (a) Rectangular parallelepiped setting screen (10.4-inch) Fig. 12.3.36.7 (b) Rectangular parallelepiped setting screen (15-inch) Operation On the rectangular parallelepiped setting screen, the following soft keys ar...

  • Page 1448

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1418 - Fig. 12.3.36.7 (c) Soft keys for rotation operation Soft key [↑] Rotates the shape for check upward. Soft key [↓] Rotates the shape for check downward. Soft key [←] Rotates the shape for check to left. Soft key [→] Rotates ...

  • Page 1449

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1419 - Fig. 12.3.36.8 (b) Cylinder setting screen (15-inch) Operation On the cylinder setting screen, the following soft keys are available to perform operation: [SHAPE LIST] Displays the shape number list screen. [FIGURE] Returns to the...

  • Page 1450

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1420 - Fig. 12.3.36.9 (b) Plane setting screen (15-inch) Operation On the plane setting screen, the following soft keys are available to perform operation: [SHAPE LIST] Displays the shape number list screen. [FIGURE] Returns to the figur...

  • Page 1451

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1421 - Fig. 12.3.36.10 (a) Shape number list screen (10.4-inch) Fig. 12.3.36.10 (b) Shape number list screen (15-inch) Moving the cursor on a shape number and pressing soft key [EDIT] causes the setting screen for the relevant shape to a...

  • Page 1452

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1422 - Operation On the shape number list screen, the following soft keys are available to perform operation: [EDIT] Edits shape data for the shape number selected by the cursor. [NO.SRH] Searches for a shape number input in the key-in buff...

  • Page 1453

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1423 - Move the cursor to the shape number of which data you want to edit. Press soft key [EDIT]. Pressing soft key [EDIT] causes the setting screen for the set shape type to appear. When no shape type is set, the rectangular parallelepipe...

  • Page 1454

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1424 - Fig. 12.3.36.11 (b) Interference check valid figure selection screen (15-inch) In the setting example shown in Fig. 12.3.36.11 (a) and Fig. 12.3.36.11 (b), 3D interference check is made for the object having figure number 1. Interfe...

  • Page 1455

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1425 - Set the axis number of the axis parallel to the X-, Y-, or Z-axis in the reference coordinate system as the axis number of each of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd linear axes along which to move the target item. When the relevant moving axis i...

  • Page 1456

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1426 - Fig. 12.3.36.12 (b) Moving axis setting screen (15-inch)

  • Page 1457

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1427 - NOTE 1 Set the direction of the rotation center axis of the rotation axis. 1: On X-axis 2: On Y-axis 3: On Z-axis 4: On an axis tilted a certain angle from the X-axis from the positive X-axis to positive Y-axis 5: On an axis tilted a ...

  • Page 1458

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1428 - 12.3.36.13 Setting screens On setting screens, set the following items: • Names of tools, tool holders, and objects • Number of displayed shapes • Whether to display or hide the figure setting screen and moving axis setting scre...

  • Page 1459

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1429 - In a combined system in multi-path control, the default names of the machine control type for each path are used for tools and tool holders. For objects, however, when the M series is set in all paths, the default names for the M seri...

  • Page 1460

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1430 - Fig. 12.3.36.14 (b) Name setting screen (15-inch) 12.3.36.15 Display setting screen Define the items displayed on the 3D interference check function setting screens. Set the following items: • Number of shapes: Set a numeric value...

  • Page 1461

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1431 - Fig. 12.3.36.15 (b) Display setting screen (15-inch) When the display of a figure setting screen is set to "NO", the figure setting screen, moving axis setting screen, and interference check valid figure selection screen ...

  • Page 1462

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1432 - Fig. 12.3.36.16 (a) Drawing coordinate system setting screen (10.4-inch) Fig. 12.3.36.16 (b) Drawing coordinate system setting screen (15-inch) An asterisk (*) is displayed to the left of the currently set item. The figure of the ...

  • Page 1463

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1433 - The drawing coordinate system specified on this screen is also used after the restart. 12.3.36.17 Inputting and Outputting 3D Interference Check Data All data set on the 3D interference check screens can be input and output. The sett...

  • Page 1464

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1434 - Fig. 12.3.36.17 (b) Setting input/output screen (15-inch) Inputting 3D interference check data 3D interference check data are loaded into the memory of the CNC from a memory card. The input format is the same as the output format. W...

  • Page 1465

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1435 - 5 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 6 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 7 Press soft key [PUNCH]. 8 Type the file name that you want to output. If the file name is omitted, default file name...

  • Page 1466

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1436 - S_ : Unit of numeric value 0 : Machine unit 1 : Input unit (5) Figure information (for tool holders only) G10 L35 P2 Q_ N_ X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ S_ ; Q_ : Tool holder number (1 to 4) N_ : Figure number (1 to 120) X_ Y_ Z_ : X, Y, and Z c...

  • Page 1467

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1437 - S_ : Numerical unit 0 : Machine unit 1 : Input unit • For plane definition information (T3) G10 L36 N_ T3 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ S_ ; N_ : Figure number (1 to 150) T3 : T3 indicates that a plane is defined for the shape number (N_). X_ ...

  • Page 1468

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1438 - Example % G10 L31 P1 Q5 N4 S1 ; G10 L31 P1 Q5 N4 S2 ; : G10 L32 P51 ; : 12.3.37 Setting and Displaying Data When the Tool Offset for Milling and Turning Function Is Enabled (15-inch Display Unit) The tool ...

  • Page 1469

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1439 - Fig. 12.3.37 (b) Tool offset screen (15-inch display unit) X : Set the X-axis tool offset value. Z/LENGTH : Set the Z-axis tool offset value or tool length compensation value. Y : Set the Y-axis tool offset value. NOSE R/RAD : Set t...

  • Page 1470

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1440 - The input of the tool offset values in any specified range from the MDI can be disabled by setting the number of the first target tool offset value in parameter No. 3294 and the number of target tool offset values starting from the fi...

  • Page 1471

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1441 - 12.4 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters must be set to determine the specifications and functions of the machine in order to fully utilize the characteristics of the servo motor or ot...

  • Page 1472

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1442 - Screens of a 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit 12.4.1 Displaying and Setting Parameters When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters are set to determine the specifications and functions of the machine in order to fully utilize th...

  • Page 1473

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1443 - Fig. 12.4.1 (b) SETTING screen (10.4-inch) 4 Move the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE using cursor keys. 5 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then press [ON:1] to enable parameter writing. At this time, the CNC enters the alarm state SW0100. 6 Afte...

  • Page 1474

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1444 - The pitch error compensation data is set according to the characteristics of the machine connected to the NC. The content of this data varies according to the machine model. If it is changed, the machine accuracy is reduced. In princi...

  • Page 1475

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1445 - • Pitch error compensation in the reference position when moving to the reference position from opposite to the reference position return direction (for each axis) : Parameter No. 3627 Procedure for displaying and setting the pitch ...

  • Page 1476

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1446 - 4 Move the cursor to the compensation point number to be set in either of the following ways: • Enter the compensation point number and press the soft key [NO.SRH]. • Move the cursor to the compensation point number using the page...

  • Page 1477

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1447 - P4 [C4x, C4y, C4z]P (Px, Py, Pz)P5 [C5x, C5y, C5z]P6 [C6x, C6y, C6z] P1 [C1x, C1y, C1z] P2 [C2x, C2y, C2z] P3 [C3x, C3y, C3z]P8 [C8x, C8y, C8z] P7 [C7x, C7y, C7z]x yz Suppose three compensation axes to be X, Y, and Z (three basic ax...

  • Page 1478

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1448 - Max1×Max2×Max3 Max1×Max2×(Max3-1)+1 … … Max1×Max2×3 Max1×Max2×2 Max1×Max2 … … Max1×Max2+1 Max1×3 Max1×2 1 2 3 ………………… Max1 Max1×Max2+...

  • Page 1479

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1449 - • Magnification for 3-dimensional error compensation (third compensation axis) : Parameter No. 10811• Compensation interval for 3-dimensional error compensation (first compensation axis) : Parameter No. 10812• Compensation inter...

  • Page 1480

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1450 - 12.4.4 Servo Parameters This subsection describes the initialization of digital servo parameters performed, for example, at the time of field tuning of the machine tool. Procedure for servo parameter setting Procedure 1 Turn on the p...

  • Page 1481

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1451 - 12.4.5 Servo Tuning Data related to servo tuning is displayed and set. Procedure for servo tuning Procedure 1 Turn on the power in the emergency stop state. 2 Set bit 0 (SVS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display servo setting and tu...

  • Page 1482

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1452 - 12.4.6 Spindle Setting Parameters related to spindles are set and displayed. In addition to the parameters, related data can be displayed. Screens for spindle setting, spindle tuning, and spindle monitoring are provided. Setting spin...

  • Page 1483

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1453 - 12.4.7 Spindle Tuning Spindle tuning data is displayed and set. Setting for spindle tuning Procedure 1 Set bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display spindle setting and tuning screens. 2 Press function key , continuous menu k...

  • Page 1484

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1454 - 12.4.8 Spindle Monitor Spindle-related data is displayed. Displaying the spindle monitor Procedure 1 Set bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display spindle setting and tuning screens. 2 Press function key , continuous menu key...

  • Page 1485

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1455 - 12.4.9 Color Setting Screen Screen colors can be set on the color setting screen. Displaying the color setting screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press the continuous menu key several times to display soft key [COLOR]. 3 Pres...

  • Page 1486

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1456 - (When operation soft keys [COLOR1], [COLOR2], and [COLOR3] are not displayed, press the rightmost soft key to display the operation soft keys.) COLOR1 Standard color data parameters Nos. 6581 to 6595 COLOR2 Parameters Nos. 10421 to...

  • Page 1487

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1457 - • Allowable acceleration change value for each axis in acceleration change under jerk control in successive linear interpolation operations • Ratio of the change time of the rate of change of acceleration in smooth bell-shaped acc...

  • Page 1488

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1458 - Fig. 12.4.10.1 (b) Machining parameter tuning screen (AI contour) (10.4-inch) 4 Move the cursor to the position of a parameter to be set, as follows: Press page key or , and cursor keys , , and /or to move the cursor to the param...

  • Page 1489

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1459 - Explanation - Look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation Set an acceleration rate for a linear portion in look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. Unit of data: mm/sec2, inch/sec2, deg/sec2 (machine ...

  • Page 1490

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1460 - Set an allowable acceleration change value per ms for each axis in velocity control based on acceleration change under jerk control in successive linear interpolation operations. The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning sc...

  • Page 1491

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1461 - Parameter No. 1737: Allowable acceleration rate for each axis applicable to the deceleration function based on acceleration in AI contour control CAUTION When bit 0 (MCR) of parameter No. 13600 is set to 1, the deceleration functio...

  • Page 1492

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1462 - • Display Tuning target parameter numbers are displayed. CAUTION As arbitrary items, the numbers of the following parameters cannot be specified: • Bit parameter • Spindle parameters (Parameters Nos. 4000 to 4799) • Real-...

  • Page 1493

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1463 - Fig. 12.4.10.2 (a) Machining parameter tuning screen (nano smoothing) (10.4-inch) 5 Move the cursor to the position of a parameter to be set, as follows: Press page key or , and cursor keys , , and /or to move the cursor to the p...

  • Page 1494

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1464 - Parameter No. 11684 (smoothing level 1) Parameter No. 11685 (smoothing level 10) Moreover, the following parameter is also set according to the smoothing level: Parameter No. 19547: Tolerance specified for rotary axes in nano smoothi...

  • Page 1495

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1465 - Byte display (1 byte in hexadecimal) Word display (2 bytes in hexadecimal) Long display (4 bytes in hexadecimal) Double display (8 bytes in decimal: Double precision floating-point display) One screen displays 256-byte memory data. ...

  • Page 1496

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1466 - 12.4.12 Parameter Tuning Screen The parameter tuning screen is a screen for parameter setting and tuning designed to achieve the following: 1 The minimum required parameters that must be set when the machine is started up are collecti...

  • Page 1497

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1467 - Fig. 12.4.12.1 (a) Menu screen for parameter tuning (10.4-inch) 6 Move the cursor to a desired item by pressing cursor key or . 7 Press soft key [SELECT]. The screen display switches to the selected screen. Returning to the menu s...

  • Page 1498

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1468 - 4 Upon completion of parameter setting, switch the setting of "PARAMETER WRITE" to "DISABLED". NOTE Some setting screens can also be displayed by a chapter selection soft key. If a screen is selected using a chap...

  • Page 1499

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1469 - Display and setting Procedure 1 Move the cursor to [SYSTEM SETTING] by pressing cursor key or on the parameter tuning menu screen described in Subsection III-12.4.12.1. 2 Press soft key [SELECT]. The screen display switches to the s...

  • Page 1500

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1470 - NOTE 1 If the cursor is placed on a parameter that has no standard value assigned, no standard value is input even when [INIT] is pressed. 2 When the cursor is placed on multiple bits for bit parameters, the multiple bits can be input...

  • Page 1501

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1471 - 12.4.12.4 Displaying and setting the FSSB amplifier setting screen From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB amplifier setting screen can be displayed. For details of the FSSB amplifier setting screen, see the description of the FSSB...

  • Page 1502

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1472 - 12.4.12.5 Displaying and setting the FSSB axis setting screen From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB axis setting screen can be displayed. For details of the FSSB axis setting screen, see the description of the FSSB axis setting s...

  • Page 1503

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1473 - 12.4.12.7 Parameter tuning screen (spindle setting) The spindle-related parameters can be displayed and modified. For the display and setting procedure, see the description of the parameter tuning screen (system setting) in Subsection...

  • Page 1504

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1474 - 12.4.12.9 Displaying and setting the servo tuning screen From the parameter tuning screen, the servo tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the servo tuning screen, see the description of the servo tuning screen in Subsection ...

  • Page 1505

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1475 - 12.4.12.11 Displaying and setting the machining parameter tuning screen From the parameter tuning screen, the machining parameter tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the machining parameter tuning screen, see the descriptio...

  • Page 1506

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1476 - *2 : When intra-path axis number ≤ 8, (path number - 1)*10+(intra-path axis number - 1) When intra-path axis number ≥ 9, no standard value is available. Example) When path 1 has 9 axes, and path 2 has 3 axes: 0,1,...,7,(none) for ...

  • Page 1507

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1477 - Table 12.4.12 (c) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (3) Menu Group Parameter No. NameBrief description Standard setting AXIS SETTING Basic 1001#0 INM Least command increment on linear axes: 0:Metric (millimeter machine) 1:Inc...

  • Page 1508

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1478 - Table 12.4.12 (d) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (4) Menu Group Parameter No. NameBrief description Standard setting AXIS SETTING Coordinate 1240 Machine coordinate of the first reference position 1241 Machine coordina...

  • Page 1509

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1479 - Explanation There are four periodic maintenance screens: the status screen, the setting screen, the machine menu screen, and the NC menu screen. Status screen : Item names, remaining times, and count statuses are displayed, and item n...

  • Page 1510

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1480 - Fig. 12.4.13 (a) Status screen - Item name As the item name, set the name of a consumable to be managed by periodic maintenance. To set an item name, select a name from the machine menu screen or NC menu screen, or directly enter t...

  • Page 1511

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1481 - NOTE 1 An asterisk "*" is used as a control code, so it cannot be used in item names. In addition, characters "[", "]", "(", and ")" cannot be used in item names. 2 When an item name c...

  • Page 1512

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1482 - Fig. 12.4.13 (b) Setting screen Display procedure 1 When the status screen is displayed, press soft key [(OPRT)]. 2 Press soft key [CHANGE]. - Life time Set the life time of a consumable. Move the cursor to an existing item, type...

  • Page 1513

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1483 - NOTE 1 If a setting operation is attempted when the item name or life time is not registered, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued. 2 When a value exceeding the valid range is entered, the warning “DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” is is...

  • Page 1514

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1484 - - Displaying the screen 1 When the status screen is displayed, press soft key [MACHINE]. On the machine menu screen, item names can be registered using one of the following two methods: • Registration from a program • Registrati...

  • Page 1515

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1485 - Fig. 12.4.13 (d) NC menu screen - Displaying the screen 1 When the status screen is displayed, press soft key [NC]. NOTE On the NC screen, the registration, deletion, and I/O of item names cannot be performed. When a blank item...

  • Page 1516

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1486 - Fig. 12.4.14 (a) System configuration screen Hardware configuration screen This screen shows the names and IDs of the hardware used by the NC. Fig. 12.4.14 (b) Hardware configuration screen Software configuration screen This scre...

  • Page 1517

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1487 - Fig. 12.4.14 (c) Software configuration screen Servo information screen When a servo system is connected to the NC, ID information of the connected servo devices (servo motors and servo amplifier modules) can be displayed on the NC....

  • Page 1518

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1488 - Fig. 12.4.14 (e) Spindle information screen 12.4.15 Overview of the History Function The history function makes it possible to record a history of operations performed by the operator, alarms and external operator messages issued, a...

  • Page 1519

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1489 - NOTE 1 History data remains even after the power is turned off. Memory clear operation, however, erases history data as well. 2 Set the time and date correctly on the setting screen. 3 All history data including data of alarms, extern...

  • Page 1520

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1490 - When modal O data that is a program name is output, only the first five characters are output. Procedure 1 Press function key to display a screen of parameters and so on. 2 Press return menu key . 3 Press continuous menu key severa...

  • Page 1521

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1491 - Display of external alarms and macro alarms When an external alarm or macro alarm is issued, it becomes possible to record its message as well as the alarm number in the alarm history if the parameter shown below is set. As the messag...

  • Page 1522

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1492 - 12.4.15.2 External operator message history From all history data recorded, only external operator message history and macro message history are extracted and displayed on the screen. When the amount of history data exceeds the storag...

  • Page 1523

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1493 - NOTE When history data is erased, not only external operator message history data but also other history data such as operation history data and alarm history data is erased. It is impossible to erase only a specific history. Storin...

  • Page 1524

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1494 - NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 3 (SOH) of parameter No. 11354 is set to 1. #6 MS0 #7 MS1 Set the combination of the number of characters and the number of messages to be preserved in the external operator message history...

  • Page 1525

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1495 - NOTE 1 The setting of bit 3 (SOH) of parameter No. 11354 will be effective the next time the power is turned on. At this time, all history data (operation history, alarm history, and external operator message history) will be erased....

  • Page 1526

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1496 - Parameter setting #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3106 OPH [Data type] Bit #4 OPH The operation history screen is: 0: Not displayed. 1: Displayed. 3122 Time interval used to record time data in operation history [Input type...

  • Page 1527

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1497 - #1 HWO A modification history of workpiece offset data/extended workpiece offset data/workpiece shift (T series) is: 0: Not recorded. 1: Recorded. #2 HPM A modification history of parameters is: 0: Not recorded. 1: Recorded. #3...

  • Page 1528

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1498 - (Example) Specifying 50 then [NO.SRH] displays the 50th data. Fig. 12.4.15.3 (a) Operation history screen - Displayed information 1 Serial number and display start history number/total number of history data items A serial number...

  • Page 1529

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1499 - • I/O signals When bit 6 (HDE) of parameter No. 3195 is set to 0, I/O signals specified on the operation history signal selection screen are recorded. Recorded signals are indicated on a bit-by-bit basis with information about the s...

  • Page 1530

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1500 - History data not displayed on the screen In addition to history data of MDI keys, I/O signal status, alarms issued, external operator messages (not displayed on the operation history screen), and time stamps, data described below can ...

  • Page 1531

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1501 - If bit 3 (HMV) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 1, when a custom macro common variable is modified, the number of the common variable is recorded as well as the common variable value before modification, the common variable value afte...

  • Page 1532

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1502 - NOTE 4 When the ON/OFF width of an input signal is less than 4 msec, recording of history data is not performed. Also, there are some signals that are not recorded. 5 When many signals are selected, the processing speed may lower. Cl...

  • Page 1533

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1503 - [Data type] Bit #4 PHS Operation history signal selection: 0: Does not interact with parameters. Operation history signal selection is added or deleted on the operation history signal selection screen. Changing the settings of pa...

  • Page 1534

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1504 - NOTE 2 To deselect a signal, set 0. At this time, 0 is set as the initial value in the address type (Nos. 12801 to 12820), the address number (Nos. 12841 to 12860), and the bit number (Nos. 12881 to 12900) corresponding to that signa...

  • Page 1535

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1505 - NOTE 1 Operation history signals that can be selected and deselected with parameters are for the first 20 of 60 sets. If an operation history signal is specified from the operation history signal selection screen, the PMC path number ...

  • Page 1536

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1506 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 12881 RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 to to 12900 RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit RB7 - RB0 History of the respective operation history signal selection b...

  • Page 1537

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1507 - 2 I/O signals After "DI/DO", "PMC-number_", "signal-address_bit-status", and "time-of-change" are output in this order. <Example> DI/DO 1_F0002.2_on 12:34:56 DI/DO 1_ G0043.0_off G0043...

  • Page 1538

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1508 - <Example> Tool Offset 01_X0002 0.000 → 1 at 12:15:43 Tool Offset 02_XW0001 -9999.999 → 9999.999 at 12:15:46 Tool Offset 01_RG0032 0.000 → 0.003 at 12:15:52 Tool Offset 02_T0001 5. → 2. at 19:34:11 Tool Offset 02_W0...

  • Page 1539

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1509 - Screens of a 15-inch display unit 12.4.16 Displaying and Setting Parameters (15-inch Display Unit) When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters are set to determine the specifications and functions of the machine in order to fu...

  • Page 1540

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1510 - 3 Press vertical soft key [SETTING] to display the setting screen. Fig. 12.4.16 (b) SETTING screen (15-inch) 4 Move the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE using cursor keys. 5 Press horizontal soft key [ON:1] to enable parameter writing. At...

  • Page 1541

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1511 - Pitch error compensation data is set for each compensation point at the intervals specified for each axis. The origin of compensation is the reference position to which the tool is returned. The pitch error compensation data is set ac...

  • Page 1542

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1512 - • Number of the pitch error compensation point at the positive end (for travel in the positive direction, for each axis) : Parameter No. 3622• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the negative end (for travel in the n...

  • Page 1543

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1513 - Fig. 12.4.17 (a) PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION screen (15-inch) 4 Move the cursor to the compensation point number to be set in either of the following ways: • Enter the compensation point number and press the horizontal soft key [NO.S...

  • Page 1544

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1514 - - Calculation of compensation 3-dimensional error compensation is calculated as follows. P4 [C4x, C4y, C4z]P (Px, Py, Pz)P5 [C5x, C5y, C5z]P6 [C6x, C6y, C6z] P1 [C1x, C1y, C1z] P2 [C2x, C2y, C2z] P3 [C3x, C3y, C3z]P8 [C8x, C8y, C8z...

  • Page 1545

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1515 - Max1×Max2×Max3 Max1×Max2×(Max3-1)+1 … … Max1×Max2×3 Max1×Max2×2 Max1×Max2 … … Max1×Max2+1 Max1×3 Max1×2 1 2 3 ………………… Max1 Max1×Max2+...

  • Page 1546

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1516 - • Magnification for 3-dimensional error compensation (third compensation axis) : Parameter No. 10811• Compensation interval for 3-dimensional error compensation (first compensation axis) : Parameter No. 10812• Compensation int...

  • Page 1547

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1517 - 12.4.19 Servo Parameters (15-inch Display Unit) This subsection describes the initialization of digital servo parameters performed, for example, at the time of field tuning of the machine tool. Procedure for servo parameter setting P...

  • Page 1548

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1518 - 12.4.20 Servo Tuning (15-inch Display Unit) Data related to servo tuning is displayed and set. Procedure for servo tuning Procedure 1 Turn on the power in the emergency stop state. 2 Set bit 0 (SVS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to disp...

  • Page 1549

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1519 - 12.4.21 Spindle Setting (15-inch Display Unit) Parameters related to spindles are set and displayed. In addition to the parameters, related data can be displayed. Screens for spindle setting, spindle tuning, and spindle monitoring are...

  • Page 1550

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1520 - 12.4.22 Spindle Tuning (15-inch Display Unit) Spindle tuning data is displayed and set. Setting for spindle tuning Procedure 1 Set bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display spindle setting and tuning screens. 2 Press function...

  • Page 1551

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1521 - 12.4.23 Spindle Monitor (15-inch Display Unit) Spindle-related data is displayed. Displaying the spindle monitor Procedure 1 Set bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display spindle setting and tuning screens. 2 Press function k...

  • Page 1552

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1522 - 12.4.24 Color Setting Screen (15-inch Display Unit) Screen colors can be set on the color setting screen. Displaying the color setting screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times to dis...

  • Page 1553

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1523 - COLOR1 Standard color data parameters (Nos. 6581 to 6595) COLOR2 Parameters (Nos. 10421 to 10435) COLOR3 Parameters (Nos. 10461 to 10475) 2 Press horizontal soft key [MEMORY]. The horizontal soft key display switches to the fo...

  • Page 1554

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1524 - • Ratio of the change time of the rate of change of acceleration in smooth bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation • Allowable acceleration rate • Acceleration rate of acceleration/deceleration after interpola...

  • Page 1555

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1525 - 8 In addition to the setting method described above, a parameter setting method using horizontal soft keys is available. Pressing horizontal soft key [INIT] displays the standard value (recommended by FANUC) of the item selected by th...

  • Page 1556

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1526 - Moreover, the following parameter is also set according to the precision level: Parameter No. 1772: Time constant for bell-shaped look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation of constant acceleration time type CAUTION ...

  • Page 1557

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1527 - NOTE This setting item is displayed only when the jerk control function is enabled. - Ratio of the change time of the jerk control in smooth bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation Unit of data: % Set the ratio ...

  • Page 1558

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1528 - The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is reflected in the following parameters: Parameter No. 13624 (velocity-emphasized parameter) Parameter No. 13625 (precision-emphasized parameter) Moreover, the following pa...

  • Page 1559

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1529 - • Tolerance (rotary axis) For details of each parameter, see the descriptions of nano smoothing. By setting bit 0 (MPR) of parameter No. 13601 to 1, this screen can be hidden. For the method of setting a smoothing level, see the des...

  • Page 1560

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1530 - The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen (smoothing) is reflected in the following parameters: Parameter No. 11682 (smoothing level 1) Parameter No. 11683 (smoothing level 10) Moreover, the following parameter is al...

  • Page 1561

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1531 - Fig. 12.4.26 (a) Memory contents display screen (15-inch) 4 Key in a desired address (hexadecimal) then press horizontal soft key [ADDRES SEARCH]. Starting at the specified address, 256-byte data is displayed. (Example: When you in...

  • Page 1562

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1532 - WARNING 1 If a memory address that must not be accessed in address search is input, a system alarm is issued. When making an address search, check that the address is accessible and that the address is input correctly. 2 This functio...

  • Page 1563

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1533 - 12.4.27 Parameter Tuning Screen (15-inch Display Unit) The parameter tuning screen is a screen for parameter setting and tuning designed to achieve the following: 1 The minimum required parameters that must be set when the machine is ...

  • Page 1564

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1534 - Fig. 12.4.27.1 (a) Parameter tuning menu screen (15-inch) 5 Move the cursor to a desired item by pressing cursor key or . 6 Press horizontal soft key [SELECT]. The screen display switches to the selected screen. Returning to the m...

  • Page 1565

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1535 - 3 Upon completion of parameter setting, switch the setting of "PARAMETER WRITE" to "DISABLED". NOTE Part of the setting screens can be displayed also by using a vertical soft key for chapter selection. When these...

  • Page 1566

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1536 - 12.4.27.2 Parameter tuning screen (system setting) (15-inch display unit) This screen enables the parameters related to the entire system configuration to be displayed and modified. The parameters can be initialized to the standard va...

  • Page 1567

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1537 - NOTE 1 If the cursor is placed on a parameter that has no standard value assigned, no standard value is input even when [INIT] is pressed. 2 When the cursor is placed on multiple bits for bit parameters, the multiple bits can be input...

  • Page 1568

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1538 - 12.4.27.4 Displaying and setting the FSSB amplifier setting screen (15-inch display unit) From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB amplifier setting screen can be displayed. For details of the FSSB amplifier setting screen, see the ...

  • Page 1569

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1539 - 12.4.27.5 Displaying and setting the FSSB axis setting screen (15-inch display unit) From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB axis setting screen can be displayed. For details of the FSSB axis setting screen, see the description of ...

  • Page 1570

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1540 - 12.4.27.7 Parameter tuning screen (spindle setting) (15-inch display unit) The spindle-related parameters can be displayed and modified. For the display and setting procedure, see the description of the parameter tuning screen (system...

  • Page 1571

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1541 - 12.4.27.9 Displaying and setting the servo tuning screen (15-inch display unit) From the parameter tuning screen, the servo tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the servo tuning screen, see the description of the servo tuni...

  • Page 1572

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1542 - 12.4.27.11 Displaying and setting the machining parameter tuning screen (15-inch display unit) From the parameter tuning screen, the machining parameter tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the machining parameter tuning scr...

  • Page 1573

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1543 - *2 : When intra-path axis number ≤ 8, (path number - 1)*10+(intra-path axis number - 1) When intra-path axis number ≥ 9, no standard value is available. Example) When path 1 has 9 axes, and path 2 has 3 axes: 0,1,...,7,(none) for ...

  • Page 1574

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1544 - Table 12.4.27 (c) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (3) Menu Group Parameter No. NameBrief description Standard setting AXIS SETTING Basic 1001#0 INM Least command increment on linear axes: 0:Metric (millimeter machine) 1:Inc...

  • Page 1575

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1545 - Table 12.4.27 (d) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (4) Menu Group Parameter No. NameBrief description Standard setting AXIS SETTING Coordinate 1240 Machine coordinate of the first reference position 1241 Machine coordina...

  • Page 1576

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1546 - 12.4.28 Periodic Maintenance Screen (15-inch Display Unit) Periodic maintenance screens are used for managing consumables (such as the backlight of a LCD unit and backup batteries). By setting the name of a consumable, its life time, ...

  • Page 1577

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1547 - Fig. 12.4.28 (a) Status screen - Item name As the item name, set the name of a consumable to be managed by periodic maintenance. To set an item name, select a name from the machine menu screen or NC menu screen, or directly enter ...

  • Page 1578

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1548 - NOTE 1 An asterisk "*" is used as a control code, so it cannot be used in item names. In addition, characters "[", "]", "(", and ")" cannot be used in item names. 2 When an item name c...

  • Page 1579

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1549 - Fig. 12.4.28 (b) Setting screen Display procedure 1 Press horizontal soft key [CHANGE]. - Life time Set the life time of a consumable. Move the cursor to an existing item, type a life time, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT] ...

  • Page 1580

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1550 - NOTE 1 If a setting operation is attempted when the item name or life time is not registered, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued. 2 When a value exceeding the valid range is entered, the warning “DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” is i...

  • Page 1581

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1551 - Fig. 12.4.28 (c) Machine menu screen - Displaying the screen 1 When the status screen is displayed, press vertical soft key [MACHINE]. On the machine menu screen, item names can be registered using one of the following two method...

  • Page 1582

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1552 - When typing 2-byte characters, type an asterisk "*" before and after the character codes. An item name to be registered must be up to 24 characters long if it consists of alphanumeric characters only; or it must be up to 12 ...

  • Page 1583

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1553 - 12.4.29 System Configuration Screen (15-inch Display Unit) The system configuration screen provides information about the types of installed hardware and software. Procedure for displaying the screen Procedure 1 Press the key, then ...

  • Page 1584

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1554 - Software configuration screen This screen shows the names and series/editions of the software used by the NC. Fig. 12.4.29 (c) Software configuration screen Servo information screen When a servo system is connected to the NC, ID i...

  • Page 1585

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1555 - Fig. 12.4.29 (e) Spindle information screen 12.4.30 Overview of the History Function (15-inch Display Unit) The history function makes it possible to record a history of operations performed by the operator, alarms and external oper...

  • Page 1586

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1556 - NOTE 1 History data remains even after the power is turned off. Memory clear operation, however, erases history data as well. 2 Set the time and date correctly on the setting screen. 3 All history data including data of alarms, extern...

  • Page 1587

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1557 - When modal O data that is a program name is output, only the first five characters are output. - Procedure 1 Press function key to display a screen of parameters and so on. 2 Press vertical soft key [HISTRY] to display the alarm hi...

  • Page 1588

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1558 - NOTE 1 History data such as alarm history data, operation history data, external operator message history data, and data modification history data is stored in the same storage area. Therefore, alarm history data may be erased when th...

  • Page 1589

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1559 - 3 The screen display can be changed to the previous page and the next page by using page keys and . NOTE 1 History data such as external operator message history data, operation history data, alarm history data, and data modificat...

  • Page 1590

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1560 - ⅰ Alarms issued ⅱ Modal information in a block executed and coordinates observed when an alarm was issued (Not displayed on the screen) c Data modification history ⅰ Modification of tool offset data (When bit 0 (HTO) of paramete...

  • Page 1591

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1561 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3195 EKE HDE HKE [Data type] Common to the bit system #5 HKE A key operation history is: 0: Recorded. 1: Not recorded. #6 HDE A DI/DO history is: 0: Recorded. 1: Not recorded. #7 EKE Soft key...

  • Page 1592

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1562 - [Valid data range] 1 to the maximum number of G code groups Set the number of a G code modal group to be recorded in the alarm history and operation history when an alarm is issued. * If a value beyond the valid data range is set, ...

  • Page 1593

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1563 - 12996 (7th) G code modal group to be recorded in the history when an alarm is issued [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to the maximum number of G code groups Set the number of a G code modal...

  • Page 1594

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1564 - Fig. 12.4.30.3 (a) Operation history screen - Displayed information 1 Serial number and display start history number/total number of history data items A serial number is indicated on the left side of each recorded history data it...

  • Page 1595

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1565 - • I/O signals When bit 6 (HDE) of parameter No. 3195 is set to 0, I/O signals specified on the operation history signal selection screen are recorded. Recorded signals are indicated on a bit-by-bit basis with information about the s...

  • Page 1596

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1566 - History data not displayed on the screen In addition to history data of MDI keys, I/O signal status, alarms issued, external operator messages (not displayed on the operation history screen), and time stamps, data described below can ...

  • Page 1597

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1567 - If bit 3 (HMV) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 1, when a custom macro common variable is modified, the number of the common variable is recorded as well as the common variable value before modification, the common variable value afte...

  • Page 1598

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1568 - NOTE 4 When the ON/OFF width of an input signal is less than 4 msec, recording of history data is not performed. Also, there are some signals that are not recorded. 5 When many signals are selected, the processing speed may lower. Cl...

  • Page 1599

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1569 - 8 Enter a file name, and press horizontal soft key [EXEC]. When horizontal soft key [EXEC] is pressed without entering a file name, the output file name is assumed to be OPRT_HIS.TXT. Output format History data is output as an ASCII ...

  • Page 1600

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1570 - 4 External operator messages After "EXT_Message", "message-number", "message", and "date-and-time-of-issuance" are output in this order. <Example> EXT_Message 01234 OIL PRESSURE DECREAS...

  • Page 1601

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1571 - 8 Modification of custom macro common variables (#100 to #999) After "Macro variable", "path-number_", "#variable-number", "common-variable-value-before-modification", "common-variable-val...

  • Page 1602

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1572 - 12.5 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY By pressing the function key , data such as alarms, and alarm history data can be displayed. For information relating to alarm display, see Section III-7.1. For information relating to alarm his...

  • Page 1603

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1573 - 12.6.2 Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or Input/Output Operation The current mode, automatic operation state, alarm state, and program editing state are displayed on the next to last line on the screen allowing the ...

  • Page 1604

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1574 - (4) State in which an auxiliary function is being executed FIN : Indicates the state in which an auxiliary function is being executed. (Waiting for the complete signal from the PMC) *** : Indicates a state other than the above. (5)...

  • Page 1605

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1575 - TWP : Indicates that operation is being performed in the tilted working plane command mode. Space : Indicates that no editing operation is being performed. (9) Warning for data setting or input/output operation When invalid data is ...

  • Page 1606

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1576 - Sequence number Program number Fig. 12.6.3 (a) Program number and sequence number (15-inch) In the EDIT mode, the number and name of the program currently edited in the foreground are indicated. 12.6.4 Displaying the Program Name...

  • Page 1607

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1577 - Fig. 12.6.4 (b) Program name longer than 18 characters 12.6.5 Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or Input/Output Operation (15-inch Display Unit) The current mode, automatic operation state, alarm state, and program ...

  • Page 1608

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1578 - STRT : Automatic operation start-up (The state in which the system operates automatically) MSTR : Manual numerical command start state (The state in which a manual numerical command is being executed) Alternatively, tool retract and r...

  • Page 1609

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1579 - WZR : Indicates that the active offset value change mode (workpiece origin offset value) is set. TOFS : Indicates that the active offset value change mode (tool offset value of the T series) is set. OFSX : Indicates that the active of...

  • Page 1610

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1580 - 12.7 SWITCHING BETWEEN MULTI-PATH DISPLAY AND SINGLE-PATH DISPLAY FUNCTION Overview In a multi-path system, the screen can be switched between simultaneous multi-path display and single-path display by soft key operation. This functio...

  • Page 1611

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1581 - 4 Press soft key [SINGLE PATH]. The single-path display appears as shown below: 5 Press soft key [MULTI PATHS]. The multi-path display appears. Procedure (15-inch display unit) The procedure is explained using the current positio...

  • Page 1612

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1582 - 2 Press horizontal soft key [SINGLE PATH]. The single-path display appears as shown below: 3 Press horizontal soft key [MULTI PATHS]. The multi-path display appears. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11355 MTS [Input ...

  • Page 1613

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1583 - #3 MTS The function for switching between simultaneous multi-path display and single-path display is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11304 PGR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 PGR Wh...

  • Page 1614

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1584 - Screen display As shown in Fig. 12.8 (a), the coordinates for five axes are displayed on one screen on a 7.2- or 8.4-inch display unit. Fig. 12.8 (a) Absolute position display screen When this function is enabled with the overall p...

  • Page 1615

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1585 - Fig. 12.8 (b) Overall position display screen Handle interruption screen

  • Page 1616

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1586 - Fig. 12.8 (c) Handle interruption screen Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11350 9DE [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #4 9DE On 7.2- and 8.4-inch display units, the maximum number of axes that can be disp...

  • Page 1617

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1587 - This function is enabled by setting bit 2 (PNE) of parameter No. 11350. With all screens other than those for the C language executor and macro executor (conversational macro), this function is available. Fig. 12.9 (a) Sample scree...

  • Page 1618

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1588 - Fig. 12.9 (b) Character color numbers for the path name expansion display function Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11350 PNE [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #2 PNE Path name expansion display function ...

  • Page 1619

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1589 - 3141 Path name (1st character) 3142 Path name (2nd character) 3143 Path name (3rd character) 3144 Path name (4th character) 3145 Path name (5th character) 3146 Path name (6th character) 3147 Path name (7th character) [I...

  • Page 1620

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1590 - - Screen erasure by the automatic screen erasure function If the following conditions are all satisfied for the time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC screen is erased. Conditions for automatically erasing the CNC scree...

  • Page 1621

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1591 - 12.11 LOAD METER SCREEN Overview The servo and spindle load meters can be displayed in place of the modal code display part and the remaining travel distance part of the current position display on the program check screen. This funct...

  • Page 1622

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1592 - Screen switching The servo load meter and spindle load meter are displayed by pressing soft key [MONITOR] on the left side of the screen. Initially the servo load meter is displayed. Each time soft key [MONITOR] is pressed, the servo ...

  • Page 1623

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1593 - Fig. 12.11.2 (b) Spindle load meter screen Screen switching By pressing soft key [LOAD METER], the screen display can be switched among the modal information display, servo load meter display, and spindle load meter display.

  • Page 1624

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1594 - Modal information Press soft key [LOAD METER]. Spindle load meter Press soft key [LOAD METER]. Servo load meter ...

  • Page 1625

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1595 - 13140 First character in spindle load meter display 13141 Second character in spindle load meter display [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte spindle [Valid data range] These parameters set character codes to set the nam...

  • Page 1626

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1596 - 13 GRAPHIC FUNCTION Chapter 13, "GRAPHIC FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 13.1 GRAPHIC DISPLAY .....................................................................................................................1596 13....

  • Page 1627

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1597 - Fig. 13.1 (a) Tool path graphic screen (M series) Fig. 13.1 (b) Tool path graphic screen (T series) - Tool path In a graphic coordinate system set by the graphic parameters described later, a tool path in the workpiece coordinate system is ...

  • Page 1628

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1598 - NOTE Up to three graphic axes are used with the M series, and up to two graphic axes are used with the T series. - Graphic coordinate system On the lower-right portion of the screen, the coordinate axes and axis names of the graphic coordinat...

  • Page 1629

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1599 - - Graphic parameter screen page 2 Fig. 13.1 (d) Graphic parameter screen page 2 On graphic parameter screen page 2, graphic colors, rotation angles, and whether to perform automatic erase operation are set. - Graphic parameter screen page 3...

  • Page 1630

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1600 - T - Graphic parameter screen page 1 Fig. 13.1 (f) Graphic parameter screen page 1 On graphic parameter screen page 1, a graphic coordinate system, graphic range, and so forth are set. In the setting of a graphic coordinate system, the coordin...

  • Page 1631

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1601 - - Graphic parameter screen page 3 Fig. 13.1 (h) Graphic parameter screen page 3 On graphic parameter screen page 3, coordinate axes to be used for drawing are set. Graphic parameter setting Explanation For tool path drawing, a graphic coor...

  • Page 1632

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1602 - T Setting = 0 Setting = 1Setting = 2Setting = 3 Setting = 4 Setting = 5Setting = 6Setting = 7 X ZZZZZ ZZZ XXX X XXX Fig. 13.1 (j) Graphic coordinate system (T series) M - Horizontal rotation angle When a 3-dimensional graphic coordinate syst...

  • Page 1633

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1603 - A vertical rotation axis can be set with the angle with the horizontal axis of the screen on the horizontal plane. This angle can be set with parameter No. 24832. In Fig. 13.1 (l) below, the graphic coordinate system XYZ is converted to X'Y'Z' ...

  • Page 1634

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1604 - When a scale is automatically determined, the scale is clamped to within the range 0.01 to 100. Moreover, a maximum value must be greater than the corresponding minimum value. NOTE When the maximum values and minimum values of a graphic range ...

  • Page 1635

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1605 - Procedure for tool path drawing Procedure - Start of drawing (1) Display the tool path graphic screen. (2) Press the [START] soft key. The state that enables the movement of the tool in automatic operation or manual operation to be drawn is set...

  • Page 1636

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1606 - Before graphic movement After graphic movement Fig. 13.1 (m) Graphic movement (magnification = 2.00) - Procedure for changing the graphic range with a rectangle A tool path can be drawn by enlarging a specified rectangular area. (1) Press...

  • Page 1637

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1607 - 13.2 DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY Overview The dynamic graphic display function has two features: • Path Drawing The path of coordinates specified in a program is drawn on the screen. By displaying a travel path on the screen, the path can be check...

  • Page 1638

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1608 - Fig. 13.2.1.1 (a) GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen (first page) Fig. 13.2.1.1 (b) GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen (second page) 2 Two screens are used for the GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen. Use the MDI page keys to switch between the screens for display of a de...

  • Page 1639

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1609 - - Graphic coordinate system Select a graphic coordinate system for drawing from the following and set its number. Y X Setting=0 (XY) ZYSetting=1 (ZY) ZY Setting=2 (YZ) Z X Setting =3 (XZ) Setting=5 (XYZ) Z XY Setting=6 (YXZ)ZYXXZSetting=4 (ZX...

  • Page 1640

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1610 - Figure Select a type of blank figure from the following (Table 13.2.1.1 (a)) and set the corresponding value: Table 13.2.1.1 (a) Setting Figure 0 Column or cylinder (parallel with the Z-axis) 1 Rectangular parallelepiped Position Set the...

  • Page 1641

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1611 - + - Rotation center Horizontal plane rotation angle Set a rotating angle at the vertical direction center in front of the screen. The rotation direction is as follows. + - Rotation center Screen center rotation angle Set a rotating ang...

  • Page 1642

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1612 - Setting 0: The previously drawn path is not erased. 1: The previously drawn path is erased. - Tool offset(Path) For tool path drawing, whether to enable or disable the tool offset function (tool length compensation, cutter/tool-noise radius ...

  • Page 1643

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1613 - Fig. 13.2.1.2 (b) PATH GRAPHIC screen 3 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The soft keys for tool path drawing are displayed. Fig. 13.2.1.2 (c) PATH GRAPHIC screen (operation) 4 Press the continuous menu key to display the soft keys for enlargin...

  • Page 1644

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1614 - Fig. 13.2.1.2 (g) Program list screen ([DRAW SELECT] soft key) Pressing the [DRAW SELECT] soft key selects a drawing target program and switches the screen display to the PATH GRAPHIC screen. The file whose name is prefixed by a "#"...

  • Page 1645

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1615 - The operations of these soft keys are as follows: • [STOP] soft key This soft key terminates the execution of the drawing target program to stop drawing. • [PAUSE] soft key This soft key temporarily stops the execution of the drawing target...

  • Page 1646

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1616 - - End of drawing When M02 or M30 is executed, the program executed for drawing terminates drawing. Upon program termination, the soft key display returns to the soft keys (Fig. 13.2.1.2 (c)) displayed before drawing is started. - Erasing a d...

  • Page 1647

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1617 - - Changing the graphic coordinate system The following soft keys displayed by step 5 are used. A graphic coordinate system selected here is the same one as set in the graphic parameter for the graphic coordinate system. • [XY] soft key This ...

  • Page 1648

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1618 - NOTE 1 Set the travel increment made by one rotation operation in parameter No. 14716. 2 The rotation angle of the graphic coordinate system set here is not set in the graphic parameter for rotation angle. 13.2.1.3 PATH GRAPHIC (TOOL POSITION) ...

  • Page 1649

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1619 - Fig. 13.2.1.3 (b) PATH GRAPHIC (TOOL POSITION) screen For the method of checking the current tool position, see the explanation. Pressing a soft key other than the [TOOL POS] soft key displays the corresponding screen. Explanation Use the f...

  • Page 1650

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1620 - NOTE 3 When the graphic parameter of the graphic coordinate system, scale, graphic range center, blank figure / position / dimensions and rotation angle is changed, the drawn tool path drawn is erased. Therefore, please draw the tool path again...

  • Page 1651

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1621 - Fig. 13.2.2.1 (b) GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen (second page) 2 Two screens are used for the GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen. Use the MDI page keys to switch between the screens for display of a desired setting item. 3 Move the cursor to a desired settin...

  • Page 1652

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1622 - Figure Select a type of blank figure from the following and set the corresponding value: Setting Figure 0 Column or cylinder (parallel with the Z-axis) 1 Rectangular parallelepiped Position Set the reference position of a blank with coo...

  • Page 1653

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1623 - - Tool length offset (Anime) For animation drawing, whether to enable or disable the tool length offset can be selected. Setting 0: The tool length offset is disabled for drawing. 1: The tool length offset is enabled for drawing. NOTE In an...

  • Page 1654

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1624 - Animation Graphic Screen Procedure Procedure 1 Press the function key (or when a small MDI unit is used) to display the GRAPHIC PARAMETER (DYNAMIC GRAPHIC) screen. 2 Press the [ANIME EXEC] soft key. The ANIMATION GRAPHIC screen is displayed. ...

  • Page 1655

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1625 - Explanation The operations listed below are the same operations as for the tool path drawing screen. See the explanation of the tool path drawing screen. • Graphic program selection • Rewind of a drawing target program • Starting / Stoppi...

  • Page 1656

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1626 - NOTE 1 Set the travel increment made by one horizontal move operation in parameter No. 14714. 2 Set the travel increment made by one vertical move operation in parameter No. 14715. 3 The graphic range modified here is not set in the graphic para...

  • Page 1657

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1627 - • [CCW] soft key This soft key rotates the graphic coordinate system counterclockwise. • [OK] soft key This soft key changes the rotation angle of the current graphic coordinate system to the one set by one of the soft keys above. • [CANCE...

  • Page 1658

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1628 - Tool name Tool geometry size dataTool compensation Parameter No. Point nose straight Setting Tip position No.27366#0 tool Cutting edge angle Cutting edge length No.27367 Tool angle Holder length No.27368 Holder width No.27369 Holder le...

  • Page 1659

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1629 - If the tool geometry size data corresponding to a specified number does not exist or the tool geometry size data is not set correctly, tool drawing is disabled with the warning "ILLEGAL SETTING OF TOOL FIGURE DATA". 13.2.3 Programmabl...

  • Page 1660

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1630 - Blank figure Address I Address J Address K Cylinder Diameter of outer circle of cylinder Diameter of inner circle of cylinder Length of cylinder The specified value are set in parameter No.11345 (address I), parameter No.11346 (address J), and ...

  • Page 1661

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1631 - 13.2.5 Note NOTE 1 The coordinates used in drawing are absolute coordinates. Therefore, even if the coordinate system is changed while it is drawing, it draws in the coordinate system when having begun to draw. 1 The coordinates used in drawing ...

  • Page 1662

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1632 - - Simultaneous multi-path display The screens of this function do not support simultaneous multi-path display based on the setting of parameter No. 13131 and No. 13132. - Functions that operate differently in drawing execution and automatic o...

  • Page 1663

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1633 - 2) G20, G21 (inch/metric switch) 3) Auxiliary function (M, S, T, B) 4) G22, G23 (stored stroke limit check on/off) 5) G10.6 (tool retract data setting) 6) G81.1 (chopping) 7) G25/G26 (spindle variation detection on/off) 8) G10 (programmable data...

  • Page 1664

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1634 - NOTE 2 It is possible to draw with the G68 (Coordinate system rotation, 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion) instruction only in the tool path drawing. And, the display of coordinates when instructing in G68 is a coordinate value on the ...

  • Page 1665

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1635 - • Cancellation of polar coordinate interpolation mode in drawing operation The cancellation of polar coordinate interpolation mode in drawing operation is performed with the following: - Execution of the G13.1 command in drawing operation - ...

  • Page 1666

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1636 - • If the specified address value is 1 (diameter specification) → Drawing is performed with the diameter specification. NOTE 1 For the G10.9 command in the background operation, the diameter/radius specification switching status signal of th...

  • Page 1667

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1637 - (1) The execution macro specified with system variable #8610 is called. If bit 4 (P98) of compilation parameter No. 9163 is 0, the execution macro is called with an operation equivalent to a simple call (G65), and if P98 is 1, it is called with ...

  • Page 1668

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1638 - So, when using the VGA window, determine the screen of this function by screen number and close the VGA window before switching the screen display. - Use of the CNC screen display function The following restriction exists when the screen of dy...

  • Page 1669

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION - 1639 - 14 VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION Chapter 14, "VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 14.1 VIRTUAL MDI KEY ........................................................................................................

  • Page 1670

    14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1640 - - Simultaneous pressing of two keys The operation to be performed for pressing two key simultaneously, such as the "CAN" and "RESET" keys to erase alarm PS100, is as follows: (1) Press the "SPCL" key. The &...

  • Page 1671

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION - 1641 - Operation - Function key page switching Pressing "MENU" located near the lower right corner of the screen switches the screen to page 1, page 2, page 3, and back to page 1 in this order. Function keys on page 1 Function ke...

  • Page 1672

    14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1642 - Fig. 14.1 (d) Key tops in the shift state - Simultaneous pressing of two keys The operation to be performed for pressing two key simultaneously, such as the "CAN" and "RESET" keys to erase alarm PS100, is as follow...

  • Page 1673

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 15.EMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION - 1643 - 15 EMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION 15.1 Template Program Function Overview This function is used to manage machining programs, offsets, parameters and so on in folders, as batches. (Such a folder and the data in it are collectively called machi...

  • Page 1674

    15.EMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1644 - //CNC_MEM SYSTEM/MTB1/MTB2/USER/xxxx/yyyy/PATH1/xxxx/yyyy/PATH2/TEMPLATE/WORKS/SP_WORK1/ SP_WORKn/ LIBRARY/TMP1/TMPn/ Fig. 15.1.1 (a) Initial folder configuration NOTE TMP1, TMPn, SP_WORK1, and SP_WORKn are examples of user-created fo...

  • Page 1675

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 15.EMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION - 1645 - Template folder The template folder is for templates of machining data. Folders created here and the programs in the folders are handled as templates of machining data. When new machining data is to be created, it is possible to create p...

  • Page 1676

    15.EMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1646 - Setting the workpiece origin offset for an additional workpiece coordinate system G10 L20 Pn IP_ ; G11 ; Pn : Specification code of the workpiece coordinate system for which to set a workpiece origin offset n : 1 to 48 or 1 to 300 IP_ :...

  • Page 1677

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 15.EMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION - 1647 - 15.1.2 Operation Creating a template A template can be created by only those operators whose operation level is 6 or higher. 1. Display the program folder screen. 2. Move to the template folder. 3. Enter a folder name and press the sof...

  • Page 1678

    15.EMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1648 - 4. A list of templates (list of folders in the template folder) is displayed. Using the up and down cursor keys, select a template, and press the soft key [SELECT]. It is possible to search for a template by entering the name of the tem...

  • Page 1679

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 15.EMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION - 1649 - 4. Press soft key [MAIN PROGRM]. When machining data is selected, the program in the folder that is named "machining-data-name.TEMPL" is selected as a program for automatic operation. The selected machining data folder is set a...

  • Page 1680

    15.EMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1650 - Storage file name The name entered in the key-in buffer before pressing [EXEC] in step 5 of the above procedure will be the storage file name. Up to 32 characters can be specified as a storage file name. If no storage file name is speci...

  • Page 1681

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 15.EMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION - 1651 - 15.1.3 Protection Function Protecting the template folder The template folder is protected with the 8-level data protection function. The template folder is not displayed to those operators whose operation level is lower than 6. Those o...

  • Page 1682

    15.EMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/04 - 1652 - • It is not possible to make insertions into, make changes to, and make deletions from a block that has (R) at the beginning. • It is not possible to make insertions, changes, deletions, and replacements that will cause (R) to appear...

  • Page 1683

    B-63944EN/04 OPERATION 15.EMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION - 1653 - 15.1.4 Limitations • This function cannot be used together with the limitations of folder manipulation due to bit 6 (FPF) of parameter No. 11302 and bit 7 (CFP) of parameter No. 11304. The settings of FPF and CFP of these parameters ar...

  • Page 1684

  • Page 1685

    IV. MAINTENANCE

  • Page 1686

  • Page 1687

    B-63944EN/04 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1657 - 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE This chapter describes routine maintenance work that the operator can perform when using the CNC. WARNING Only those persons who have been educated for maintenance and safety may perform maintenance work not describe...

  • Page 1688

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-63944EN/04 - 1658 - 1.1 ACTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN A PROBLEM OCCURRED If an unexpected operation occurs or an alarm or warning is output when the CNC and machine are used, the problem needs to be solved quickly. For this purpose, the status of the problem must be ...

  • Page 1689

    B-63944EN/04 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1659 - 1.2 BACKING UP VARIOUS DATA ITEMS With the CNC, various data items such as offset data and system parameters are stored in the SRAM of the control unit and are protected by a backup battery. However, an accident can erase the data. By storin...

  • Page 1690

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-63944EN/04 - 1660 - CAUTION Before recovery of the following data items, consult with the machine tool builder of the machine used: • System parameters • PMC data • Macro programs and custom macro variables • Pitch error compensation values NOTE The...

  • Page 1691

    B-63944EN/04 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1661 - 1.3 METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY This chapter describes how to replace the CNC backup battery and absolute Pulsecoder battery. This section consists of the following subsections: 1.3.1 Replacing Battery for LCD-mounted Type CNC Control Unit ...

  • Page 1692

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-63944EN/04 - 1662 - Lithium batteryA02B-0236-K102ConnectorBattery case Fig. 1.3.1 (a) Unit without option slots Battery caseConnectorLithium batteryA02B-0236-K102 Fig. 1.3.1 (b) Unit with option slots Battery cable Fig. 1.3.1 (c) Clamping the battery cable ...

  • Page 1693

    B-63944EN/04 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1663 - CAUTION Steps <1> to <3> should be completed within 30 minutes. Do not leave the control unit without a battery for any longer than the specified period. Otherwise, the contents of memory may be lost. If steps <1> to &l...

  • Page 1694

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-63944EN/04 - 1664 - 1.3.2 Replacing the Battery for Stand-alone Type CNC Control Unit When using a lithium battery - Replacing the battery If a lithium battery is used, have A02B-0200-K102 (FANUC internal code: A98L-0031-0012) handy. <1> Turn the CNC on...

  • Page 1695

    B-63944EN/04 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1665 - When using commercial D-size alkaline dry cells - Replacing the battery <1> Have commercial D-size alkaline dry cells handy. <2> Turn the CNC on. <3> Remove the cover from the battery case. <4> Replace the old dr...

  • Page 1696

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-63944EN/04 - 1666 - 1.3.3 Battery in the PANEL i (3 VDC) A lithium battery is used to back up BIOS data in the PANEL i. This battery is factory-set in the PANEL i. This battery has sufficient capacity to retain BIOS data for one year. When the battery voltage b...

  • Page 1697

    B-63944EN/04 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1667 - 1.3.4 Replacing Battery for Absolute Pulsecoders 1.3.4.1 Overview • When the voltage of the batteries for absolute Pulsecoders becomes low, alarm 307 or 306 occurs, with the following indication in the CNC state display at the bottom of th...

  • Page 1698

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-63944EN/04 - 1668 - WARNING • The absolute Pulsecoder of each of the αi/αi S series servo motors and the βi S series servo motors (βi S0.4 to βi S22) has a built-in backup capacitor. Therefore, even when the power to the servo amplifier is off and the b...

  • Page 1699

    B-63944EN/04 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1669 - CAUTION • Purchase the battery from FANUC because it is not commercially available. It is therefore recommended that you have a backup battery. • When the built-in battery is used, do not connect BATL (B3) of connector CXA2A/CXA2B. Also...

  • Page 1700

  • Page 1701

    APPENDIX

  • Page 1702

  • Page 1703

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1673 - A PARAMETERS This manual describes all parameters indicated in this manual. For those parameters that are not indicated in this manual and other parameters, refer to the parameter manual. NOTE A parameter that is valid with only one of the path contro...

  • Page 1704

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1674 - #1 FCV Program format 0: Series 16 standard format 1: Series 15 format NOTE 1 Programs created in the Series 15 program format can be used for operation on the following functions: 1 Subprogram call M98 2 Thread cutting with equal leads G32 (T serie...

  • Page 1705

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1675 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0100 NCR CTV [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit #1 CTV Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program. 0: Performed 1: Not performed #3 NCR Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO co...

  • Page 1706

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1676 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1001 INM [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. #0 INM Least command increment on the linear axis 0: In mm ...

  • Page 1707

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1677 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1004 IPR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #7 IPR When a number with no decimal point is specified, the least input increment of each axis is: 0: Not 10 times greater than the least command increme...

  • Page 1708

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1678 - NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. #0 ROTx Setting linear or rotary axis. #1 ROSx Setting linear or rotary axis. ROSx ROTx Meaning 0 0 Linear axis (1) Inch/metric conversi...

  • Page 1709

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1679 - NOTE RAA is valid when bit 0 (ROA) of parameter No. 1008 is set to 1 and bit 1 (RAB) of parameter No. 1008 is set to 0. To use this function, the option for rotary axis control is required. #5 G90x A command for a rotary axis control is: 0: Regard...

  • Page 1710

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1680 - NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. #0 ISAx #1 ISCx #2 ISDx #3 ISEx Increment system of each axis Increment system Bit 3 (ISE) Bit 2 (ISD) Bit 1 (ISC) Bit 0 (ISA) IS...

  • Page 1711

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1681 - NOTE 2 An address other than addresses A, B, and C cannot be used as the address of a rotary axis used for the function for tool length compensation in a specified direction or the tool center point control function. 3 When the custom macro function is ...

  • Page 1712

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1682 - • With an axis for which Cs contour control/spindle positioning is to be performed, set -(spindle number) as the servo axis number. Example) When exercising Cs contour control on the fourth controlled axis by using the first spindle, set -1. • For t...

  • Page 1713

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1683 - NOTE ZPR is valid while a workpiece coordinate system function is not provided. If a workpiece coordinate system function is provided, making a manual reference position return always causes the workpiece coordinate system to be established on the basi...

  • Page 1714

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1684 - Program example G90 G17 G54 G68.2 X_Y_Z_ I_ J_ K_ G53.1 G43H_ G55 X_Y_Z_ G56 X_Y_Z_ G57 X_Y_Z_ G49 G69 Machine zero point X_Y_Z_: Coordinate system zero point shift amount G54 Coordinate system zero point shift amount Feature coordinate system (G68.2)...

  • Page 1715

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1685 - 1244 Coordinate value of the floating reference position in the machine coordinate system [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the ap...

  • Page 1716

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1686 - NOTE When this parameter is set to 1, the alarm is issued if the tool enters stored stroke limit 1 during automatic operation. #2 LMS The stored stroke check 1 select signal (EXLM3, EXLM2, or EXLM when stored stroke check 1 area expansion is used) f...

  • Page 1717

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1687 - NOTE 1 Specify diameter values for any axes for which diameter programming is specified. 2 The area outside the area set by parameters Nos. 1320 and 1321 is a prohibited area. 1322 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the positive direction on...

  • Page 1718

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1688 - 1353 Coordinate value IV of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis 1354 Coordinate value V of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis 1355 Coordinate value V of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direct...

  • Page 1719

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1689 - #0 RPD Manual rapid traverse during the period from power-on time to the completion of the reference position return. 0: Disabled (Jog feed is performed.) 1: Enabled #1 LRP Positioning (G00) 0: Positioning is performed with non-linear type positio...

  • Page 1720

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1690 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 FC0 FM3 1404 FC0 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #2 FM3 The increment system of an F command without a decimal point in feed per minute is: 0: 1 mm/min (0.01 inch/min for inch input) 1: 0....

  • Page 1721

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1691 - Set the dry run rate at the 100% position on the jog feedrate specification dial. The unit of data depends on the increment system of the reference axis. 1411 Cutting feedrate NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before op...

  • Page 1722

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1692 - Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis. 1423 Feedrate in manual continuous feed (jog feed) for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Min. unit...

  • Page 1723

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1693 - [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000....

  • Page 1724

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1694 - NOTE 1 To this feedrate setting 100%, a rapid traverse override (F0, 25, 50, or 100%) is applicable. 2 For automatic return after completion of reference position return and machine coordinate system establishment, the normal rapid traverse rate is used...

  • Page 1725

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1695 - Set a maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode such as AI contour control. When the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode is not set, the maximum cutting feedrate set in parameter No...

  • Page 1726

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1696 - niFF100max=Δ (where, i=1 or 2) In the above equation, set n. That is, the number of revolutions of the manual pulse generator, required to reach feedrate Fmaxi is obtained. Fmaxi refers to the upper limit of the feedrate for a one-digit F code feed co...

  • Page 1727

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1697 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1490 PGF LMV TOV [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 TOV The threading start position compensation in changing spindle speed function is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. #2 LMV The offset value for Z-...

  • Page 1728

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1698 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1606 MNJx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis #0 MNJx In manual handle interrupt or automatic manual simultaneous operation (interrupt type): 0: Only cutting feed acceleration/deceleration is enable...

  • Page 1729

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1699 - For bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration Speed Rapid traverse rate (Parameter No. 1420) Time T1 T2T2 T2T2 T1 T1 : Setting of parameter No. 1620 T2 : Setting of parameter No. 1621 (However, T1 ≥ T2 must be satisfied.) Total acceleration (decelerat...

  • Page 1730

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1700 - If 0 is set, the specification of 100000.0 is assumed. If 0 is set for all axes, however, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is not performed. If a maximum allowable acceleration rate set for one axis is greater than a maximum allowable acc...

  • Page 1731

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1701 - Feedrate in tangent dire ctio nM axim um ac c eleration rate not exc eedingma ximu m a llow a b le a c c e le ra tion rate s e t b yparam eter N o. 1671 for eac h axis isa u to m atic a lly c a lc ula te d .T im e s e t b y p a ra m e te r N o . 1 6 7 2...

  • Page 1732

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1702 - 1712 Override value for inner corner override [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 1 to 100 Set an inner corner override value in automatic corner overriding. 1713 Start distance (Le) for inner c...

  • Page 1733

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1703 - [Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) With the deceleration function based on acceleration in circular interpolation, an optimum feedrate is automatically calculated so...

  • Page 1734

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1704 - In circular interpolation, however, the deceleration function based on feedrate control using acceleration in circular interpolation (parameter No. 1735) is enabled. 1738 Minimum allowable feedrate for the deceleration function based on acceleration i...

  • Page 1735

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1705 - Feedrate in tangent directionOptimum inclination is automaticallycalculated from the setting of parameterNo. 1660.Time set by parameter No. 1772(A)(B)(B)(B)(B)(A)(A)(C)(C) 1783 Maximum allowable feedrate difference for feedrate determination based on ...

  • Page 1736

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1706 - Set a maximum allowable acceleration change rate for each axis in feedrate control based on acceleration change under control on the rate of change of acceleration in successive linear interpolation operations. In feedrate control based on acceleration ...

  • Page 1737

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1707 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1802 DC2x DC4x [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis #1 DC4x When the reference position is established on the linear scale with reference marks: 0: An absolute position is established by detecting thr...

  • Page 1738

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1708 - #4 APZx Machine position and position on absolute position detector when the absolute position detector is used 0: Not corresponding 1: Corresponding When an absolute position detector is used, after primary adjustment is performed or after the absol...

  • Page 1739

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1709 - #1 RF2x If G28 is specified for an axis for which a reference position is already established (ZRF<Fn120> = “1”) when a linear scale with an absolute address zero point or a linear scale with absolute address reference marks is used: 0: A mo...

  • Page 1740

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1710 - Relationship between the increment system and the least command increment (1) T series Least input increment Least command increment0.001 mm (diameter specification) 0.0005 mm Millimeter input 0.001 mm (radius specification) 0.001 mm 0.0001 inch (diame...

  • Page 1741

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1711 - Setting command multiply (CMR), detection multiply (DMR), and the capacity of the reference counter least command increment ×CMR Error counter DA Converter ×DMRPosition detectorReference counter Command pulse Feedback pulse Detection unit To velocity ...

  • Page 1742

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1712 - [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999 Set a reference counter size. As a reference counter size, specify a grid interval for reference position return based on the grid method. When a value less than 0 is set, the specificatio...

  • Page 1743

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1713 - 1841 Position deviation limit of each axis in moving state during other than Dual Check Safety monitoring (for Dual Check Safety Function) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Para...

  • Page 1744

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1714 - [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] -999999999 to 999999999 1884 Distance 2 from the scale zero point to reference position (linear scale with absolute address reference marks) or di...

  • Page 1745

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1715 - [Example of parameter settings] When an encoder as shown Fig. A.1 (b) is used with an IS-B, millimeter machine: 20.000 19.980 9.94010.0609.960 10.040 9.980 10.0205.00020.000mm20.020mm -[9960/(20020-20000)*20000+5000] = -9965000Mark 1Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark...

  • Page 1746

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1716 - Mark 1Mark 2Mark 1Mark 2Mark 1Mark 1 Mark 2Reference position 10.020 9.98010.0409.96010.0609.940Base point 20.000 20.020 Fig. A.1 (c) If the reference position is located in the positive direction when viewed from the base point, set a positive val...

  • Page 1747

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1717 - #0 FMD The FSSB setting mode is: 0: Automatic setting mode. (When the relationship between an axis and amplifier is defined on the FSSB setting screen, parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1936 to 1939, and 14340 to 14407 (plus parameter Nos. 14408 to 14425 and...

  • Page 1748

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1718 - 1936 Connector number of the first separate detector interface unit 1937 Connector number of the second separate detector interface unit 1938 Connector number of the third separate detector interface unit 1939 Connector number of the fourth sepa...

  • Page 1749

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1719 - NOTE When automatic setting mode is selected for FSSB setting (when the bit 0 (FMD) of parameter No. 1902 is set to 0), these parameters are automatically set when input is performed with the FSSB setting screen. When manual setting 2 mode is selected ...

  • Page 1750

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1720 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3002 OVM POV [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #6 POV Dwell/Auxiliary function time override function is: 0: Invalid. 1: Valid. #7 OVM In Dwell/Auxiliary function time override function, overrid...

  • Page 1751

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1721 - NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is set to 1. Depending on the option configuration of the I/O Link, the actually usable X addresses are: <X0000 to X0127>, <X0200 to X0327>, <X0400 to X0527>, <X...

  • Page 1752

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1722 - Set an X address to which the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP, measurement position arrival signals (XAE, YAE, and ZAE (M series) or XAE and ZAE (T series)), and tool offset write signals (±MIT1 and ±MIT2 (T series)) are to be assigned. Example 1...

  • Page 1753

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1723 - Value of parameter No. 3021 (the first digit) Setting value Input signal address Output signal address 0 0 0 1 1 1 : 7 7 7 [Example of setting] Axis number No. 3021 Signal allocation 1 0 +J1<G0100.0>, -J1<G0102.0>, ZP1<F0090.0>, ......

  • Page 1754

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1724 - Spindle number No. 3022 Signal allocation 1 0 TLMLA<G0070.0>, TLMHA<G0070.1>, ALMA<F0045.0>, ... 2 1 TLMLB<G0074.0>, TLMHB<G0074.1>, ALMB<F0049.0>, ... 3 10 TLMLA<G1070.0>, TLMHA<G1070.1>, ALMA<F1045.0&...

  • Page 1755

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1725 - #3 PPD Relative position display when a coordinate system is set 0: Not preset 1: Preset NOTE If any of the following is executed when PPD is set to 1, the relative position display is preset to the same value as the absolute position display: (1) M...

  • Page 1756

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1726 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3111 OPS OPM SPS SVS [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path #0 SVS Servo setting screen and servo tuning screen 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed #1 SPS Spindle tuning screen 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed ...

  • Page 1757

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1727 - #1 DAP For absolute coordinate display: 0: The actual position considering a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed. 1: The programmed position excluding a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed. NOTE In machining center systems, whether to excl...

  • Page 1758

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1728 - Specify a path name with codes. Any character string consisting of alphanumeric characters, katakana characters, and special characters with a maximum length of seven characters can be displayed as a series name. NOTE 1 For characters and codes, see Ap...

  • Page 1759

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1729 - #4 NE9 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 9000 to 9999 0: Not inhibited 1: Inhibited When this parameter is set to 1, the following editing operations are disabled: (1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, progra...

  • Page 1760

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1730 - NOTE If the bit 6 (MER) of parameter No. 3203 is set to 1, executing the last block provides a choice of whether to automatically erase a created program. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3207 VRN [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #5...

  • Page 1761

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1731 - NOTE The value set in this parameter is not displayed. When the power is turned off, this parameter is set to 0. 3220 Password (PSW) [Input type] Locked parameter [Data type] 2-word [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets a password (...

  • Page 1762

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1732 - NOTE 4 When a password (PSW) or keyword (KEY) is set, [+INPUT] has the same effect as [INPUT]. For example, if the input operation "1[+INPUT]" is performed when 99 is set in the keyword (KEY) parameter, 1 is set. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 323...

  • Page 1763

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1733 - 7 : Spanish 8 : Dutch 9 : Danish 10 : Portuguese 11 : Polish 12 : Hungarian 13 : Swedish 14 : Czech 15 : Chinese(simplified characters) 16 : Russian 17 : Turkish If a number not indicated above is set, English is selected. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 ...

  • Page 1764

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1734 - #5 ABS Program command in MDI operation 0: Assumed as an incremental programming 1: Assumed as an absolute programming NOTE ABS is valid when bit 4 (MAB) of parameter No. 3401 is set to 1. When G code system A of the lathe system is used, this param...

  • Page 1765

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1735 - #6 CLR key on the MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, and emergency stop signal 0: Cause reset state. 1: Cause clear state. For the reset and clear states, refer to Appendix in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL. #7 G23 When the power ...

  • Page 1766

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1736 - NOTE The following notes apply when this parameter is set to 1: 1 G codes with a decimal point omitted do not cause the alarm PS5073. 2 Commands using a macro variable or numerical expression are treated as commands with a decimal point. Accordingly, t...

  • Page 1767

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1737 - #0 AUX When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-type decimal point input format or with a decimal point, the multiplication factor for a value output (onto the code signal) relative to a specified value is such that: 0: The sa...

  • Page 1768

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1738 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3406 C07 C06 C05 C04 C03 C02 C01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3407 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 C09 C08 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3408 C23 C22 C20 C19 C18 C17 C16 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3409 C30 C29 C28 C27 C26 C25 C24 [Inp...

  • Page 1769

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1739 - 3421 Range specification 1 of M codes that do not perform buffering (lower limit) 3422 Range specification 1 of M codes that do not perform buffering (upper limit) 3423 Range specification 2 of M codes that do not perform buffering (lower limit) 3...

  • Page 1770

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1740 - The settings of parameters (1) to (4) (excluding the setting of 0) must satisfy: 99 < (1), (1)+99 < (2), (2)+99 < (3), (3) +99 < (4) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3450 BDX AUP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 ...

  • Page 1771

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1741 - #0 GQS When threading is specified, the threading start angle shift function (Q) is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 EAP 3452 EAP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #7 EAP When bit 0 (ADX) of p...

  • Page 1772

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1742 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3456 PVT [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis #0 PVT As a pivot axis control axis: 0: Not used. 1: Used. NOTE 1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued....

  • Page 1773

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1743 - #3 SYS The system directory "//CNC_MEM/SYSTEM/" of the initial directories is: 0: Set as a search directory. 1: Not set as a search directory. #6 SCC The same folder as the main program is added to the top of the search order as a search...

  • Page 1774

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1744 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3459 ESL [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. #0 ESL When an NC program contains lowercase alphabetic cha...

  • Page 1775

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1745 - [Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table (B)) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) This parameter sets the maximum allowable difference (absolute value) between th...

  • Page 1776

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1746 - 3621 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Vali...

  • Page 1777

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1747 - Minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions = maximum feedrate/7500 Unit : mm, inch, deg or mm/min, inch/min, deg/min [Example] When the maximum feedrate is 15000 mm/min, the minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions i...

  • Page 1778

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1748 - 3627 Pitch error compensation at reference position when a movement to the reference position is made from the direction opposite to the direction of reference position return NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before opera...

  • Page 1779

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1749 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3700 NRF CRF [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 CRF Reference position setting at an arbitrary position under Cs contour control is: 0: Not used. 1: Used. NOTE When this function is used, an at...

  • Page 1780

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1750 - NOTE 1 When an analog spindle is used, the option for spindle analog output is required. 2 When a serial spindle is used, the option for spindle serial output is required. 3 The option for the number of controlled spindles needs to be specified. 3717 ...

  • Page 1781

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1751 - Spindle motor max. clamp speed (Parameter No.3736) Spindle speed command (S command) Max. speed (4095, 10V)Spindle motor minimum clamp speed (Parameter No.3735) Spindle motor speedGear 1 Max. speed(Parameter No.3741) Gear 2 Max. speed(Parameter No.37...

  • Page 1782

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1752 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 4900 FLRs [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit spindle #0 FLRs When the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is used, the unit of an allowable ratio (q) and fluctuation ratio (r) set by parameters...

  • Page 1783

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1753 - When the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is used, set a time (p) from the change of a specified speed until spindle speed fluctuation detection is started. In other words, spindle speed fluctuation detection is not performed until a set tim...

  • Page 1784

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1754 - 4962 M code for specifying a spindle positioning angle [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word spindle [Valid data range] 6 to 9999999 Two methods are available for specifying spindle positioning. One method uses axis address for arbitrary-...

  • Page 1785

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1755 - This parameter sets the number of M codes used for Half-fixed angle positioning using M codes. As many M codes as the number specified in this parameter, starting with the M code specified in parameter No. 4962, are used to specify half-fixed angle posi...

  • Page 1786

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1756 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 EVO 5001 EVO TAL TLB TLC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 TLC #1 TLB These bits are used to select a tool length compensation type. Type TLB TLC Tool length compensation A 0 0 Tool len...

  • Page 1787

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1757 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5003 SUV SUP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 SUP #1 SUV These bits are used to specify the type of startup/cancellation of tool radius - tool nose radius compensation. SUV SUP Type Operation...

  • Page 1788

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1758 - NOTE This parameter is valid only for an axis based on diameter specification. For an axis based on radius specification, specify a radius value, regardless of the setting of this parameter. #2 ODI The setting of a tool radius - tool nose radius co...

  • Page 1789

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1759 - When using memories common to paths, set the number of common tool compensation values in this parameter. Ensure that the setting of this parameter does not exceed the number of tool compensation values set for each path (parameter No. 5024). [Example ...

  • Page 1790

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1760 - WARNING Before changing the setting of this parameter, cancel the offset. If the setting is changed while the offset is applied, the subsequent offset operation may not be performed correctly or an alarm PS0368 occurs. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5042 ...

  • Page 1791

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1761 - [Input type] Parameter Input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axis This parameter specifies the controlled axis numbers of the first and second axis for which grinding-wheel wear compensation is applied. 5081 1st-...

  • Page 1792

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1762 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5105 TFA #5 TFA During tool center point control or tool length compensation in tool axis direction, canned cycles: 0: Cannot be used. 1: Can be used. However, an alarm PS5424, “ILLEGAL TOOL DIRECTION” is issued ...

  • Page 1793

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1763 - For the Machining Center system: Set the Grinding axis number of Direct Constant Dimension Plunge Grinding Cycle (G77). NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specifie...

  • Page 1794

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1764 - [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Set the axis number of dressing axis in Plunge grinding cycle(G75). NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis or grinding axis can be specified. When the axis number which ...

  • Page 1795

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1765 - [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Set the axis number of dressing axis in Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79). NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis or grinding axis can be specified. When the...

  • Page 1796

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1766 - NOTE 3 The interpolation type rigid tapping function cannot be used in a path that has a spindle positioning axis. If interpolation type rigid tapping is specified for a path that has a spindle positioning axis, an alarm PS1223 is issued. #7 #6 #5 #4...

  • Page 1797

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1767 - #2 D3R When Reset is done by reset operation or reset signal from PMC, 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode, tilted working plane command mode and workpiece setting error compensation mode is: 0: Canceled. 1: Not canceled. #6 XSC The set...

  • Page 1798

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1768 - [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) This parameter sets a rapid traverse rate for canned cycl...

  • Page 1799

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1769 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5450 PLS [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #2 PLS The polar coordinate interpolation shift function is: 0: Not used. 1: Used. This enables machining using the workpiece coordinate system with a des...

  • Page 1800

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1770 - [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) This parameter sets the feedrate of the movement along the normal direction controlled axis that is inserted at t...

  • Page 1801

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1771 - This parameter sets the ordinal number, among the controlled axes, for the rotation axis to which exponential interpolation is applied. 5643 Amount of linear axis division (span value) in exponential interpolation [Input type] Setting input [Data ...

  • Page 1802

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1772 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SBM HGO MGO G67 6000 SBM HGO V15 MGO G67 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 G67 If the macro modal call cancel command (G67) is specified when the macro modal call mode (G66/G66.1) is not set: ...

  • Page 1803

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1773 - If you want to disable the single blocks in custom macro statements using system variable #3003, set this parameter to 0. If this parameter is set to 1, the single blocks in custom macro statements cannot be disabled using system variable #3003. To cont...

  • Page 1804

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1774 - #6 CCV Common variables #100 to #149(NOTE) cleared by power-off are: 0: Cleared to <null> by reset 1: Not cleared by reset NOTE Cleared variables are as the table according to the combination of added options. Option “Addition of custom mac...

  • Page 1805

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1775 - #2 VHD With system variables #5121 to #5140: 0: The tool offset value (geometry offset value) in the block currently being executed is read. (This parameter is valid only when tool geometry/tool wear compensation memories are available.) 1: An interru...

  • Page 1806

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1776 - #4 CVA The format for macro call arguments is specified as follows: 0: Arguments are passed in NC format without modifications. 1: Arguments are converted to macro format then passed. [Example] When G65 P_ X10 ; is specified, the value in local varia...

  • Page 1807

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1777 - #7 IJK For addresses I, J, and K specified as arguments: 0: Argument specification I or II is automatically determined. 1: Argument specification I is always used. Example When K_J_I_ is specified: • When this parameter is set to 0: Argument speci...

  • Page 1808

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1778 - [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path *0 to *7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating * is set. =0 to =7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating = is set. #0 to #7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or IS...

  • Page 1809

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1779 - #2 DPD When argument D is specified for a macro call without a decimal point, the number of decimal places: 0: Is assumed to be 0. [Example] When G65PppppD1 is specified, #7=1.0000 is passed as the argument. 1: Depends on the increment system of the...

  • Page 1810

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1780 - [Valid data range] 0 to 400 When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom macro common variables to be shared (custom macro variables common to paths). Common variables #100 to #199 (up to #499 in a system with the em...

  • Page 1811

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1781 - 6039 Start program number of a custom macro called by G code [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 1 to 9999 6040 Number of G codes used to call custom macros [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path ...

  • Page 1812

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1782 - 6043 Number of G codes with a decimal point used to call custom macros [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 255 Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using G codes with a decimal point at a t...

  • Page 1813

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1783 - 6046 Number of M codes used to call subprograms (number of subprograms called by M codes) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set this parameter to define multiple subprogram calls using M codes at a ti...

  • Page 1814

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1784 - [Example] When parameter No. 6047 = 90000000, parameter No. 6048 = 4000, and parameter No. 6049 = 100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls (simple calls) is defined as follows: M90000000 → O4000 M90000001 → O4001 M90000002 → O4002 : M900000...

  • Page 1815

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1785 - 6064 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of program number 9044 6065 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of program number 9045 6066 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of program nu...

  • Page 1816

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1786 - 6080 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9020 6081 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9021 6082 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9022 6083 M code used to call the custom macro of progra...

  • Page 1817

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1787 - Address Parameter setting value T series M series L 76 O O M 77 O O P 80 O O Q 81 O O R 82 O O S 83 O O T 84 O O V 86 X O X 88 X O Y 89 X O Z 90 X O NOTE 1 When address L is set, the number of repeats cannot be specified. 2 Set 0 when no subprogram is ...

  • Page 1818

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1788 - #7 SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for G31 skip command 0: Disabled 1: Enabled #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6201 SKPXE CSE IGX TSE SEB [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 SEB When a skip signal o...

  • Page 1819

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1789 - Whether the skip signals are enabled or disabled Parameter Bit 4 (IGX) of parameter No. 6201 Bit 0 (GSK) of parameter No. 6200 Bit 7 (SKPXE) of parameter No .6201 Skip signal SKIPP Skip signal SKIP Multistage skip signals SKIP2-SKIP8 0 0 0 Disabled Enab...

  • Page 1820

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1790 - 1S1to1S8, 2S1to2S8, 3S1to3S8, 4S1to4S8, DS1toDS8 Specify which skip signal is enabled when the skip command (G31, or G31P1 to G31P4) and the dwell command (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4) are issued with the multi-step skip function. The following table shows the ...

  • Page 1821

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1791 - #2 SFN The feedrate used when the skip function based on high-speed skip signals (with bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 set to 1) or the multi-skip function is being executed is: 0: Feedrate of a programmed F code. 1: Feedrate set in a parameter from...

  • Page 1822

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1792 - Signal ignoring period (parameter No. 6220)High-speed skip signals These signals are ignored. 6221 Torque limit dead zone time for a torque limit skip command [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] 2msec [Valid data r...

  • Page 1823

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1793 - NOTE For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the description of parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285. 6282 Feedrate for the skip function (G31, G31 P1) 6283 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P2) 6284 Feedrate for the skip function ...

  • Page 1824

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1794 - When 16 groups of five are used, the meanings of parameters are changed as follows: Group A No. 6411(1) to No. 6415(5) Group B No. 6416(1) to No. 6420(5) : Group P No. 6486(1) to No. 6490(5) When 10 groups of eight are used, they are changed as foll...

  • Page 1825

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1795 - (3) Cycle start lamp signal STL<Fn000.5> is set to 1. (4) Check mode input signal MMOD<Gn067.2> is set to 1. (5) Handle input signal MCHK<Gn067.3> is set to 1 in the check mode. #6 HST When the manual handle retrace function is used...

  • Page 1826

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1796 - This parameter sets an override value (equivalence) for clamping the rapid traverse rate used with the manual handle retrace function. If a value greater than 100 is set in parameter No. 6405, the rapid traverse rate is clamped to an override of 100%. T...

  • Page 1827

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1797 - 6443 M code of group I in manual handle retrace (1) to to 6446 M code of group I in manual handle retrace (4) 6447 M code of group J in manual handle retrace (1) to to 6450 M code of group J in manual handle retrace (4) 6451 M code of group K i...

  • Page 1828

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1798 - For an M code which is not set in any group by any of the above parameters, the M code for forward movement is output. With these parameters, an M code in the same group can be output in backward movement only when the M code is the first M code in each...

  • Page 1829

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1799 - 6711 Number of machined parts [Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999 The number of machined parts is counted (+1) together with the total number of machined parts when the M02, M30, or a M code specifie...

  • Page 1830

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1800 - 6752 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) 2 [Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] min [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999 This parameter displays the integrated value of time during automati...

  • Page 1831

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1801 - NOTE After changing this parameter, set data again by using G10 L3 ;(registration after deletion of data of all groups). #3 SIG When a tool is skipped by a signals TL01 to TL512 <Gn047.0 to Gn048.1>, the group number is: 0: Not input by the t...

  • Page 1832

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1802 - #3 EMD In the tool life management function, the mark "*" indicating that the life has expired is displayed when: 0: The next tool is used. 1: The life has just expired. NOTE If this parameter is set to 0, the "@" mark (indicatin...

  • Page 1833

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1803 - T If the life count is specified by use count, when a tool group command (T code) is specified after the M99 command is specified, a tool whose life has not expired is selected from a specified group, and the tool life counter is incremented by one. ...

  • Page 1834

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1804 - #4 ARL Tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB <Fn064.3> of tool life management is: 0: Output for each tool. 1: Output for the last tool of a group. This parameter is valid only when bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 6802 is set to 1. #5 TGN In the...

  • Page 1835

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1805 - The tool life arrival notice signal is turned off when one of the following operations is performed for the currently used group: • Clears the execution data on the tool life management list screen. • Deletes all tool group data at a time, adds a to...

  • Page 1836

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1806 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6805 TAD TRU TRS LFB FGL FCO [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 FCO If the life count type is the duration specification type, the life is counted as follows: 0: Every second. 1: Every 0.1 second. Acc...

  • Page 1837

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1807 - NOTE If the life is counted every 0.1 second (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 6805 is set to 1), cutting time less than 0.1 second is always rounded up and is counted as 0.1 second. #7 TAD With tool change type D (bit 7 (M6E) of parameter No. 6801 is s...

  • Page 1838

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1808 - This parameter sets the maximum number of groups to be used for each path. As the maximum number of groups, set a multiple of eight. When the tool life management function is not used, 0 must be set. Set this parameter so that the total number of groups...

  • Page 1839

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1809 - [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter...

  • Page 1840

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1810 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7001 MFM JEX JSN JST ABS MIT [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 MIT Manual intervention and return function is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. #1 ABS For the move command after manual intervention in t...

  • Page 1841

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1811 - #3 JBF In manual numerical specification, B function specification is: 0: Allowed. 1: Not allowed. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7040 RPS [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #2 RPS When the tool retract signal TRESC <Gn059....

  • Page 1842

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1812 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7100 HCL THD JHD [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 JHD Manual handle feed in JOG feed mode or incremental feed in the manual handle feed is: 0: Invalid. 1: Valid. #1 THD In the TEACH IN JOG mod...

  • Page 1843

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1813 - [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999 This parameter sets the number of pulses from the manual pulse generator that exceed the rapid traverse rate and can be accumulated without being discarded if manual handle feed faster than the rapid traverse rate is sp...

  • Page 1844

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1814 - #1 OP2 JOG feed axis select and manual rapid traverse select on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed #2 OP3 Manual pulse generator's axis select and manual pulse generator's magnification select on software operator's panel 0: No...

  • Page 1845

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1815 - Setting value Feed axis and direction 0 Not moved 1 First axis, positive direction 2 First axis, negative direction 3 Second axis, positive direction 4 Second axis, negative direction 5 Third axis, positive direction 6 Third axis, negative direction 7 F...

  • Page 1846

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1816 - #0 ROF When the coordinates for restarting are displayed on the program restart screen: 0: Tool length compensation (M series), tool position compensation (T series), cutter compensation (M series), and tool-nose radius compensation (T series) are con...

  • Page 1847

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1817 - #4 IT0 #5 IT1 #6 IT2 IT2 IT1 IT0 Interpolation of high-speed cutting G05 data (ms) 0 0 0 8 0 0 1 2 0 1 0 4 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 16 1 1 1 0.5 NOTE To perform high-speed cycle cutting for multiple paths, set the same interpolation for all paths. #7 ...

  • Page 1848

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1818 - #0 BM0 During high-speed cycle cutting or high-speed binary program operation, axis moving signals MV1 to MV8 <Fn102> are: 0: Always set to “1”. 1: Set to “1” when the tool moves along the axis. NOTE When bit 0 (BM0) of parameter No. 7...

  • Page 1849

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1819 - 7515 Number of retract operation distributions in a high-speed cycle machining retract operation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the number of retract operation distributions ...

  • Page 1850

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1820 - [Example 3] When the high-speed cycle cutting data variable mode is addition D (2000000 variables) and all variables are to be used as common variables No.7516 No.7517 Available variables Path 1 0 0 #2000...

  • Page 1851

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1821 - NOTE 4 When the PMC window function or G10 command is used to rewrite this parameter, rewrite this parameter before the block specifying the spindle-spindle polygon command G51.2. When the PMC window function is used to rewrite this parameter in the blo...

  • Page 1852

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1822 - NOTE 4 When the PMC window function or G10 command is used to rewrite this parameter, rewrite this parameter before the block specifying the spindle-spindle polygon command G51.2. When the PMC window function is used to rewrite this parameter in the blo...

  • Page 1853

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1823 - #2 HDR Direction of helical gear compensation (usually, set 1.) [Example] To cut a left-twisted helical gear when the direction of rotation about the C-axis is the negative (-) direction: 0: Set a negative (-) value in P. 1: Set a positive (+) value...

  • Page 1854

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1824 - #0 TDP The specifiable number of teeth, T, of the electronic gear box (G81) is: 0: 1 to 1000 1: 0.1 to 100 (1/10 of a specified value) NOTE In either case, a value from 1 to 1000 can be specified. #3 ART The retract function executed when an ala...

  • Page 1855

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1825 - NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 1 (ARE) of parameter No. 7703 is set to 1. The following table lists the parameter settings and corresponding operation. ARE ARO Operation 1 0 During EGB synchronization 1 1 During EGB synchronization and automat...

  • Page 1856

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1826 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7731 ECN EFX [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 EFX As the EGB command: 0: G80 and G81 are used. 1: G80.4 and G81.4 are used. NOTE When this parameter is set to 0, no canned cycle for drilling c...

  • Page 1857

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1827 - [Example 1] When the EGB master axis is the spindle and the EGB slave axis is the C-axis Synchronization switch CNC Detection unitβ p/rev α p/rev C-axis Least command increment 0.001deg Command pulses ×FFGGear ratio A Detector ×CMR Slave axis Gea...

  • Page 1858

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1828 - [Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) This parameter sets the feedrate during automatic phase synchronization for the workpiece axis. When this parameter is set to 0, t...

  • Page 1859

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1829 - For a slave axis, set the number of pulses generated from the position detector per EGB slave axis rotation. Set the number of pulses output by the detection unit. Set this parameter when using the G81.5 EGB synchronization command. The method for setti...

  • Page 1860

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1830 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8001 RDE OVE MLE [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 MLE Whether all axis machine lock signal MLK <Gn108> is valid for PMC-controlled axes 0: Valid 1: Invalid The axis-by-axis machine lock si...

  • Page 1861

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1831 - #4 PF1 #5 PF2 Set the feedrate unit of cutting feedrate (feed per minute) for an axis controlled by the PMC. Bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002 Bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002 Feedrate unit 0 0 1 / 10 1 1 / 101 0 1 / 1001 1 1 / 1000 #6 FR1 #7 ...

  • Page 1862

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1832 - NOTE When this parameter is set to 1, bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002 is invalid. #6 EZR In PMC axis control, bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is: 0: Invalid. With a PMC controlled axis, the alarm PS0224 is not issued. 1: Valid. A reference posi...

  • Page 1863

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1833 - P8010 Description 36 DI/DO 36th group (G8178toG8189) is used. 37 DI/DO 37th group (G9142toG9153) is used. 38 DI/DO 38th group (G9154toG9165) is used. 39 DI/DO 39th group (G9166toG9177) is used. 40 DI/DO 40th group (G9178toG9189) is used. NOTE When a v...

  • Page 1864

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1834 - NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. #0 MWT As the signal interface for the waiting M code: 0: The path individual signal interface is used. 1: The path common signal interfac...

  • Page 1865

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1835 - #7 NUMx When neither synchronous control nor composite control is applied, a move command for the axis is: 0: Not disabled. 1: Disabled. NOTE If a move command is specified for an axis with NUMx set to 1 when neither synchronous control nor composi...

  • Page 1866

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1836 - NOTE SWSx is enabled when bit 2 (SPSx) of parameter No. 8163 or bit 6 (SPVx) of parameter No. 8167 is set to 1. #6 SPVx At the end of synchronous control, automatic workpiece coordinate system setting for the slave axis is: 0: Not performed. 1: Per...

  • Page 1867

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1837 - This parameter sets with which axis each axis is to be placed under composite control. When zero is specified, control of the axis is not replaced under composite control. An identical number can be specified in two or more parameters, but composite con...

  • Page 1868

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1838 - #3 AZP When a movement is made along the Cartesian axis due to a movement along the slanted axis, reference position return end signals for the Cartesian axis ZP1 to ZP8 <F0094.0 to F0094.7> are: 0: Not cleared. 1: Cleared. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2...

  • Page 1869

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1839 - [Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes When angular axis control is to be applied to an arbitrary axis, these parameters set the axis numbers of a slanted axis and Cartesian axis. If 0 is set in either of the two parameters, the same number i...

  • Page 1870

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1840 - #1 ATSx In axis synchronous control, automatic setting for grid positioning is: 0: Not started 1: Started Set this parameter with a slave axis. NOTE When starting automatic setting for grid positioning, set ATS to 1. Upon the completion of setting,...

  • Page 1871

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1841 - #2 ADJx In axis synchronous control, this parameter specifies an axis along which a movement is made in the modification mode. 0: A movement is not made in the modification mode along the axis. 1: A movement is made in the modification mode along the ...

  • Page 1872

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1842 - #0 SSO The uni-directional synchronization function in axis synchronous control is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. #1 SSE After emergency stop, the uni-directional synchronization function in axis synchronous control is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled. 8311 A...

  • Page 1873

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1843 - NOTE In synchronous operation with mirror image applied, synchronization error compensation, synchronization establishment, synchronization error checking, and modification mode cannot be used. 8314 Maximum allowable error in synchronization error ch...

  • Page 1874

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1844 - Specify a slave axis for this parameter. To enable this parameter, set the bit 7 (SOF) of parameter No. 8303 to 1. When 0 is set in this parameter, synchronization establishment is not performed. 8326 Difference between master axis and slave axis refe...

  • Page 1875

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1845 - 8332 Maximum allowable synchronization error for synchronization error excessive alarm 2 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of da...

  • Page 1876

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1846 - This parameter sets synchronization error compensation gain 2 for synchronization error smooth suppression. Set this parameter with a slave axis. NOTE Set a value less than the value set in parameter No. 8334. 8337 M code for turning off synchroniza...

  • Page 1877

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1847 - For the function of decelerating according to the cutting load in AI contour control, the override set in a parameter can be applied according to the angle at which the tool moves downward along the Z-axis. The feedrate obtained according to other condi...

  • Page 1878

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1848 - This parameter specifies a block length used as a reference to decide whether to apply smooth interpolation or Nano smoothing. If the line specified in a block is longer than the value set in the parameter, smooth interpolation or Nano smoothing is not ...

  • Page 1879

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1849 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 10335 MSC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 MSC The reconfirming of midway block start of operator error prevent function is: 0: Enabled independently for each path. 1: Enabled for the local pat...

  • Page 1880

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1850 - #0 STC If, in a TCP start block (G43.4), address "L" is omitted, TCP is: 0: Started as normal TCP. 1: Started as smooth TCP. 10486 First rotation axis compensation tolerance in smooth TCP mode [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real...

  • Page 1881

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1851 - [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table (B)) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) If a va...

  • Page 1882

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1852 - [Valid data range] 1 to number of compensation points These parameters set the compensation point number of the reference position for each axis for 3-dimensional error compensation. 10809 Magnification for 3-dimensional error compensation (first comp...

  • Page 1883

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1853 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11005 SIC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 SIC Spindle indexing is: 0: Performed based on absolute coordinates. 1: Performed based on machine coordinates. 11090 Path number with which the rotatio...

  • Page 1884

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1854 - [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 8 This parameter sets the number of decimal places of rotation direction errors in workpiece setting error compensation. Parameter No. 11201 1 2 3 4 Least input increment (deg) 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 Maximum...

  • Page 1885

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1855 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11221 TLC 3DW D3R MTW [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 MTW Multiple tilted working plane commands are: 0: Not used. 1: Used. #1 D3R In the 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode, tilte...

  • Page 1886

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1856 - • Issuance of a move command with the machine locked • Movement by handle interrupt • Operation with a mirror image • Shifting of a workpiece coordinate system when a local coordinate system or workpiece coordinate system is set up #7 PDM Whe...

  • Page 1887

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1857 - #4 MTO In the program restart auxiliary function output function, modal T codes are: 0: Not output to the MDI program. 1: Output to the MDI program. # 7 OAA In the program restart output function, the approach to the program restart position for e...

  • Page 1888

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1858 - This parameter sets the amount of a retract operation in the tool axis direction when G10.6 is specified alone during tool retraction and return (during tool center point control and workpiece setting error compensation). The retract operation is perfor...

  • Page 1889

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1859 - 11305 Maximum number of simultaneously displayed axes NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 2 By setting this paramet...

  • Page 1890

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1860 - Display sequence of coordinatesSetting 1 2 3 4 4 Absolute coordinates Remaining travel distanceRelative coordinates Machine coordinates 5 Machine coordinates Remaining travel distanceRelative coordinates Absolute coordinates If the setting is beyond th...

  • Page 1891

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1861 - 11344 Blank reference position in dynamic graphic display [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm,inch (input unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of mi...

  • Page 1892

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1862 - NOTE A macro executor option, or a macro executor and C executor options are required. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11350 QLS 9DE PNE [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power mus...

  • Page 1893

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1863 - NOTE During a subprogram call, the sequence number of the subprogram is maintained. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11354 DPC CRS [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be ...

  • Page 1894

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1864 - 11411 Number of the workpiece coordinate system used as the reference for workpiece setting error amount No. 01 11412 Number of the workpiece coordinate system used as the reference for workpiece setting error amount No. 02 11413 Number of the work...

  • Page 1895

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1865 - 11427 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping (gear 3) 11428 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in optimum acceleration/deceleration for r...

  • Page 1896

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1866 - [Valid data range] 0 to 100 These parameters set the spindle speeds at P1 to P3 of acceleration points P0 to P4 as ratios to the maximum spindle speed (parameters Nos. 5241 to 5244). The spindle speed at P0 is 0, while the spindle speed at P4 is the max...

  • Page 1897

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1867 - 11465 Permissible deceleration at P4 in optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping (gear 1) 11466 Permissible deceleration at P0 in optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping (gear 2) 11467 Permissible deceleration at P1 in optimu...

  • Page 1898

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1868 - [Valid data range] 1 to 10 This parameter sets the smoothing level currently selected when nano smoothing or nano smoothing 2 is used. 11682 Tolerance when nano smoothing is used (smoothing level 1) 11683 Tolerance when nano smoothing is used (smoot...

  • Page 1899

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1869 - [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] Least input increment of the error in the rotation direction in workpiece setting error compensation (see the explanation of parameter No. 11201) [Unit of data] 0 to 999999999 If th...

  • Page 1900

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1870 - For a machine with a table rotation axis, these parameters are effective to the errors Δa, Δb, and Δc in the rotation direction, respectively, when the table rotation axis position in the workpiece coordinate system is 0. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1...

  • Page 1901

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1871 - 12310 States of the manual handle feed axis selection signals when tool axis direction handle feed/interrupt and table-based vertical direction handle feed/interrupt are performed [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range...

  • Page 1902

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1872 - [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to 24 This parameter sets the states of the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1A to HS1E <Gn018.0 to Gn018.3, Gn411.0> for the first manual handle) or the manual handle interrupt axis selectio...

  • Page 1903

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1873 - 12314 States of the manual handle feed axis selection signals when the second rotation axis is turned in tool tip center rotation handle feed/interrupt [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to 24 This parameter sets...

  • Page 1904

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1874 - #0 TWD The directions of 3-dimensional machining manual feed (other than tool tip center rotation feed) when the tilted working plane command is issued are: 0: Same as those not in the tilted working plane command. That is, the directions are: Tool a...

  • Page 1905

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1875 - [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 0 to 90 When a tilted working plane command (G68.3) is issued to perform 3-dimensional machining manual feed in the latitude direction, longitude direction, and ...

  • Page 1906

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1876 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 13113 CFD CLR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 CLR Upon reset, the display of a travel distance by 3-dimensional machining manual feed is: 0: Not cleared. 1: Cleared. #3 CFD As feedrate F, t...

  • Page 1907

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1877 - NOTE When specifying groups, specify group numbers not less than 1 successively. On 7.2-inch and 8.4-inch display units, simultaneous multi-path display cannot be specified. In this case, set 1 in this parameter for all paths. On 9.5-inch and 10.4-i...

  • Page 1908

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1878 - NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 3 (ETE) of parameter No. 13200 is set to 0 (arrival notice for each type number). #3 ETE The tool life arrival notice signal is output: 0: For each tool type. 1: For each tool. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 13201 ...

  • Page 1909

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1879 - NOTE This parameter is valid when the machine control type is the lathe system or compound system. #4 DO2 On the tool management function screen, the second geometry tool offset data is: 0: Displayed. 1: Not displayed. NOTE This parameter is vali...

  • Page 1910

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1880 - 13221 M code for tool life count restart of tool management or tool life management [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] • When tool management function is used: When 0 is set in this parameter, this parameter is...

  • Page 1911

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1881 - 13227 Number of data items in the second cartridge NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to 64(Extended to 240 or 1000 by the...

  • Page 1912

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1882 - 13237 Number of data items in the fourth cartridge NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to 64(Extended to 240 or 1000 by the...

  • Page 1913

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1883 - Usually, when H99 is specified, tool length offset is enabled by the H code of the tool being used. By setting any H code in this parameter, the H code instead of H99 can be used. If 0 is specified, H99 is assumed. A value ranging from 0 to 9999 can b...

  • Page 1914

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1884 - NOTE 1 In G93 mode, if the axis command and the feedrate (F) command are not in the same block, alarm PS1202, "NO F COMMAND AT G93" is issued regardless of the setting of this parameter. 2 If this parameter bit is set to 1, and if the G code ...

  • Page 1915

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1885 - #0 MCR When an allowable acceleration rate adjustment is made with the machining condition selection function or machining quality level adjustment function (machining parameter adjustment screen, precision level selection screen), parameter No. 1735 ...

  • Page 1916

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1886 - Each of these parameters sets an acceleration rate change time (bell-shaped) in AI contour control. Set a value (precision level 1) with emphasis placed on speed, and a value (precision level 10) with emphasis on precision. 13614 Allowable acceleratio...

  • Page 1917

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1887 - 13618 Rate of change time of the rate of change of acceleration in smooth bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation when AI contour control is used (precision level 1) 13619 Rate of change time of the rate of change of acceleration i...

  • Page 1918

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1888 - [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is ...

  • Page 1919

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1889 - 13632 Value with emphasis on speed (precision level 10) of the parameter corresponding to arbitrary item 1 when AI contour control is used 13633 Value with emphasis on speed (precision level 10) of the parameter corresponding to arbitrary item 2 when...

  • Page 1920

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1890 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 14000 IRFx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis #2 IRFx An inch-metric switch command (G20, G21) at the reference position is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. When this function is enabled for an axis, if ...

  • Page 1921

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1891 - NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. When the bit 3 (RGE) of parameter No. 14250 is set to 0 14270 Angle 1 (θ - data for G diagrams) 14271 Angle 2 (θ - data for G diagrams) 14272 Angle 3 (...

  • Page 1922

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1892 - NOTE When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] ×1/512 [Min. unit of data] -32768(×-63) to 32767(×64.9) Set these parameters for ...

  • Page 1923

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1893 - Set -1.0 in the parameter for "maximum number of items used + 1", where items refer to angles. The table gives values if angles 1.0 to 75.0 are set in 1-degree steps. If there are multiple pivot axes, the settings are used universally to all t...

  • Page 1924

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1894 - NOTE 1 When bit 3 (RGE) of parameter No. 14250 is set to 1, the number of angles and the number of settings for the gain multipliers for the angles vary depending on the number of controlled axes. [Example] For eight axes, up to 80 items can be set, an...

  • Page 1925

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1895 - NOTE 2 When the FSSB is set to the automatic setting mode (when the bit 0 (FMD) of parameter No. 1902 is set to 0), parameter Nos. 14340 to 14357 are automatically set as data is input on the FSSB setting screen. When the manual setting 2 mode is set (w...

  • Page 1926

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1896 - - Example 2 Example of axis configuration and parameter settings when the electronic gear box (EGB) function is used (EGB slave axis: A-axis, EGB dummy axis: B-axis) 1021324455664 7-56 83Slave numberATR No.14340 to 14357 X Y A Z C (M1) (M2) B(Dummy)Ax...

  • Page 1927

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1897 - NOTE 2 When the FSSB is set to the automatic setting mode (when the bit 0 (FMD) of parameter No. 1902 is set to 0), parameters Nos. 14358 to 14375 are automatically set as data is input on the FSSB setting screen. When the manual setting 2 mode is set (...

  • Page 1928

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1898 - 14713 Unit of magnification by which enlargement and reduction is performed with the dynamic graphic display function [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 255 This parameter sets the unit of magnification by which en...

  • Page 1929

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1899 - When an M code that prohibits backward movement is specified during backward movement, backward movement of blocks before the M code is prohibited. In this case, backward movement prohibition signal MRVSP<Fn091.2> is output. The M code that prohi...

  • Page 1930

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1900 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19500 FNW [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #6 FNW When the feedrate is determined according to the feedrate difference and acceleration in AI contour control: 0: The maximum feedrate at which the...

  • Page 1931

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1901 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19515 ZG2 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 ZG2 When the deceleration function based on cutting load in AI contour control (deceleration based on Z-axis fall angle) is used: 0: Stepwise override...

  • Page 1932

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1902 - (2) Bit 6 (CYS) of parameter No. 19530) is set to 1 If the amount of cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation is smaller than the value set in this parameter, cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation is performed together with t...

  • Page 1933

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1903 - Setting an acceleration pattern A cce le ra tio n Sp eed FbFaA a P1 P2P3P4P5A b A cce leration pa ttern P0 Set the speed at each of the acceleration setting points (P0 to P5) in a corresponding parameter, then in parameters for each axis, set acce...

  • Page 1934

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1904 - 19545 Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P0 during movement in + direction and acceleration) 19546 Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P1 during movement in + direction and acceleration) 19547 Optimal to...

  • Page 1935

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1905 - 19568 Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P5 during movement in - direction and deceleration) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] 0.01% [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 For each travel direction and ...

  • Page 1936

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1906 - This parameter sets the tolerance of rotation axes in a program created using small line segments in nano smoothing 2. This parameter is valid only for the rotation axes specified in nano smoothing 2. When 0 is set in this parameter, a minimum amount of...

  • Page 1937

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1907 - #3 WCD This parameter specify a direction of compensation vector by a sign of offset value in grinding-wheel wear compensation Offset vale by D code Minus Plus 0 Direction from compensation center to command end position. Direction from command end p...

  • Page 1938

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1908 - #1 NI5 The interference check in 3-dimensional cutter compensation is performed by: 0: Projecting a look-ahead command position onto a plane perpendicular to the tool axis direction of a block for which compensation is planned. Interference avoidance...

  • Page 1939

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1909 - [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A)) (When the increment ...

  • Page 1940

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1910 - The interference check/avoidance function of 3-dimensional tool compensation machining is executed when the angle difference between the tool direction vectors for the target two points is less than the setting. This parameter is valid when bit 1 (NI5)...

  • Page 1941

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1911 - 19662 Spindle center compensation vector in tool axis direction tool length compensation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axi...

  • Page 1942

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1912 - #5 SVC The controlled point is: 0: Not shifted. 1: Shifted. The method of shifting is specified by bit 4 (SPR) of parameter No. 19665. NOTE When the machine has no rotation axis for rotating the tool (when parameter No. 19680 is set to 12 to specify...

  • Page 1943

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1913 - Parameter No. 19680 Mechanical unit type Controlled rotation axis Master and slave 0 Mechanism having no rotation axis 2 Tool rotation type Two rotation axes of the tool The first rotation axis is the master, and the second rotation axis is the slave....

  • Page 1944

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1914 - 2: On Y-axis 3: On Z-axis 4: On an axis tilted a certain angle from the X-axis from the positive X-axis to positive Y-axis 5: On an axis tilted a certain angle from the Y-axis from the positive Y-axis to positive Z-axis 6: On an axis tilted a certain an...

  • Page 1945

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1915 - Parameter No.19682YZX 546 Parameter No.19683 19684 Rotation direction of the first rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 1 Set the direction in which the first rotation axis rotates as a mechanic...

  • Page 1946

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1916 - 19687 Axis direction of the second rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 6 Specify the axis direction of the second rotation axis. 1: On X-axis 2: On Y-axis 3: On Z-axis 4: On an axis tilted a certa...

  • Page 1947

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1917 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19696 RFC WKP NPC IA2 IA1 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 IA1 0: The first rotation axis is an ordinary rotation axis. 1: The first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis. If IA1 is 1, set 0 as the ...

  • Page 1948

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1918 - Reference tool axis direction XYZTool axis direction is positive X-axis direction.Tool axis direction is positive Y-axis direction. Tool axis direction is positive Z-axis direction. 19698 Angle when the reference tool axis direction is tilted (refe...

  • Page 1949

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1919 - Tool axis direction when the reference tool axis direction is Z-axis RAX Y Z XYZRBX ZTool holder offset Tool length offsetY 19700 Rotary table position (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19701 Rotary table position (Y-axis of the basic three axes) 1...

  • Page 1950

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1920 - 19703 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19704 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (Y-axis of the basic three axes) 19705...

  • Page 1951

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1921 - If parameter No. 19680 is 21, set the vector from point D on the tool axis to point E determined on the tool rotation axis as the intersection offset vector in the machine coordinate system when the rotation axes for controlling the tool are all at 0 de...

  • Page 1952

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1922 - When tool axis and tool rotary axis do not intersect Tool length offsetTool holder offset Intersection offset vector between tool axis and second rotary axis of tool D E Tool center point Controlled point Second rotary axis of tool F First rotary axis ...

  • Page 1953

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1923 - When an appropriate value is set in parameter No. 19738 in tool posture control for tool center point control (type 2), a tool posture near the singular point may occur during the execution of a block. If this happens, change the tool posture at the end...

  • Page 1954

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1924 - 19744 Lower limit of the movement range of the second rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of mini...

  • Page 1955

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1925 - [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A)) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) This parameter s...

  • Page 1956

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1926 - #7 SPM The rotation axis position used as the reference when the parameters related to the functions below, parameters Nos. 19681 to 19714, are set is: 0: Absolute coordinates. 1: Machine coordinates This parameter is effective to the functions belo...

  • Page 1957

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1927 - Cutting edge length Tip Holder When 0 is set, 12 mm for metric input or 0.4724 inch for inch input is assumed. 27352 Holder length applied when a general-purpose tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word ...

  • Page 1958

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1928 - 27354 Holder length 2 applied when a general-purpose tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This parameter s...

  • Page 1959

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1929 - Front RearTip HolderHolder 27357 Cutting edge width applied when a threading tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 o...

  • Page 1960

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1930 - 27359 Holder width applied when a threading tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This parameter sets the h...

  • Page 1961

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1931 - Holder lengthTip Holder When 0 is set, 50 mm for metric input or 1.9685 inch for inch input is assumed. 27362 Holder width applied when a groove cutting tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of...

  • Page 1962

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1932 - 27364 Holder length applied when a round-nose tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This parameter sets the...

  • Page 1963

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1933 - Front RearTip HolderHolder 27367 Cutting edge length applied when a point nose straight tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data...

  • Page 1964

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1934 - 27369 Holder width applied when a point nose straight tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This parameter ...

  • Page 1965

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1935 - Holder width 2Tip HolderHolder width 27372 Length of cut applied when a drill tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0...

  • Page 1966

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1936 - 27374 Length of cut applied when a tapping tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This parameter sets the le...

  • Page 1967

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1937 - Length of cut When 0 is set, 26 mm for metric input or 1.0236 inch for inch input is assumed. 27377 Cutter length applied when a chamfering tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001m...

  • Page 1968

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1938 - 27379 Shank diameter applied when a chamfering tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This parameter sets th...

  • Page 1969

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1939 - Length of cut When 0 is set, 50 mm for metric input or 1.9685 inch for inch input is assumed. 27382 Length of cut applied when a boring tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (m...

  • Page 1970

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1940 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 27384 VRP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 VRP When a multifunction tool is drawn in animated simulation, the tip is: 0: Positioned on the front. 1: Positioned on the rear. Front RearTip HolderHold...

  • Page 1971

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1941 - Holder width Tip Holder When 0 is set, 14 mm for metric input or 0.5512 inch for inch input is assumed. A.2 DATA TYPE Parameters are classified by data type as follows: Data type Valid data range Remarks Bit Bit machine group Bit path Bit axis Bit spi...

  • Page 1972

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1942 - NOTE 5 For spindle types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of spindles are present, so that independent data can be set for each spindle axis. 6 The valid data range for each data type indicates a general range. The range varies according ...

  • Page 1973

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1943 - (C) Velocity and angular velocity parameters Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unitValid data range IS-A 0.01 0.00 to +999000.00 IS-B 0.001 0.000 to +999000.000 IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999 IS-D 0.00001 ...

  • Page 1974

    B.PROGRAM CODE LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1944 - B PROGRAM CODE LIST ISO code EIA code Custom macro Character name Character Code (hexadecimal)CharacterCode (hexadecimal)Without custom macro With custom macro Usable as file name Number 0 0 30 0 20 * Number 1 1 B1 1 01 * Number 2 2 B2 2 02 ...

  • Page 1975

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX B.PROGRAM CODE LIST - 1945 - ISO code EIA code Custom macro Character name Character Code (hexadecimal)CharacterCode (hexadecimal)Without custom macro With custom macro Usable as file name Plus sign + 2B + 70 * Minus sign - 2D - 40 * Colon (address O) : 3A Optional b...

  • Page 1976

    B.PROGRAM CODE LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1946 - ISO code EIA code Custom macro Character name Character Code (hexadecimal)CharacterCode (hexadecimal)Without custom macro With custom macro Usable as file name Lowercase letter y y F9 * Lowercase letter z z FA * NOTE 1 The symbols used in ...

  • Page 1977

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX - 1947 - C.LIST OF FUNCTIONS ANDPROGRAM FORMATC LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT With some functions, the format used for specification on the machining center system differs from the format used for specification on the lathe system. Moreover, some functions are used f...

  • Page 1978

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1948 - C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT Functions Illustration Program format Circular thread cutting B (G02.1, G03.1) RKI Start point End point (X,Z)C axis Arc centerZ axis X axis In the case of the ZpXp plane, the major axis being the Z-axis, the minor axis bein...

  • Page 1979

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX - 1949 - C.LIST OF FUNCTIONS ANDPROGRAM FORMATFunctions Illustration Program format AI contour control (G05) G05 P10000 ; AI contour control start G05 P0 ; AI contour control end AI contour control (G05.1) G05.1 Q1 ; AI contour control mode on G05.1 Q0 ; AI contour c...

  • Page 1980

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1950 - C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT Functions Illustration Program format Programmable internal data change (G10.8) Tolerance change in smooth TCP mode G10.8 L1 ; α_ β_ P_ α : Compensation tolerance for the first rotation axis β : Compensation ...

  • Page 1981

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX - 1951 - C.LIST OF FUNCTIONS ANDPROGRAM FORMATFunctions Illustration Program format Floating reference position return (G30.1) StartpointFloating reference positionIntermediate pointIP G30.1 IP_ ; Skip function (G31) Start pointSkip signalIPG31 IP_ F_ ; Threading (G33) ...

  • Page 1982

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1952 - C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT Functions Illustration Program format Tool length compensation (G43, G44, G49) Z Compensation G43Z_ H_ ;G44G43H_ ;G44 H : Tool compensation number G49 : Cancel Tool length compensation in tool axis direction (G43.1) CBZYXCBT...

  • Page 1983

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX - 1953 - C.LIST OF FUNCTIONS ANDPROGRAM FORMATFunctions Illustration Program format Scaling (G50, G51) P1'P1P2P4P3P2'P4'P3'IP • For machining center G51 X_ Y_ Z_ P_I_ J_ K_; P, I, J, K : Scaling magnification X, Y, Z : Control position of scaling G50 : Cancel • For la...

  • Page 1984

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1954 - C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT Functions Illustration Program format Rotary table dynamic fixture offset (G54.2) XYXYXYF0Fθ0θZWMachine coordinatesystem originW : Workpiece origin offset valueθ0 : Reference angleF0 : Reference fixture offset value...

  • Page 1985

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX - 1955 - C.LIST OF FUNCTIONS ANDPROGRAM FORMATFunctions Illustration Program format Coordinate system rotation, 3-dimensional coordinate conversion (G68, G69) (G68.1, G69.1) YX(x y)α In case of X-Y plane • For machining center G68G17 X_ Y_G18 Z_ X_G19 Y_ Z_R α ; G69 ; ...

  • Page 1986

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1956 - C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT Functions Illustration Program format Canned cycle for drilling (G73, G74, G80 to G89) • For machining center G80 ; Cancel G73 G74 G76 G81 : G89 Canned cycle (G71 to G76) (G90, G92, G94) • For lathe only N G70P Q ;...

  • Page 1987

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX - 1957 - C.LIST OF FUNCTIONS ANDPROGRAM FORMATFunctions Illustration Program format Change of workpiece coordinate system (G92) Maximum spindle speed clamp (G92) IP • For machining center G92 IP_ ; Change of workpiece coordinate system G92 S_ ; Constant surface speed cont...

  • Page 1988

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1958 - C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT Functions Illustration Program format In-feed control (for grinding machine) (G160, G161) • For machining center G161 R_ ; Figure program (G01, G02, G03) G160 ;

  • Page 1989

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX D.RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE - 1959 - D RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE Linear axis - In case of millimeter input, feed screw is millimeter Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E Least input increment (mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 Least command increment (mm) 0.01 0.0...

  • Page 1990

    D.RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1960 - Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E Max. programmable dimension (inch) ±99,999.999 ±99,999.9999 ±9,999.99999 ±999.999999 ±99.9999999 Max. rapid traverse (inch/min)*1 96,000 9,600 4,000 400 40 Feedrate range (inch/min)*1 0.001 to ...

  • Page 1991

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX D.RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE - 1961 - Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E Backlash compensation amount (pulses)*3 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 Dwell (sec)*4 0 to 999,999.99 0 to 999,999.999 0 to 99,999.9999 0 to 9,999.99999 0 to 999.999...

  • Page 1992

    E.NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1962 - E NOMOGRAPHS Appendix E, "NOMOGRAPHS", consists of the following sections: E.1 INCORRECT THREADED LENGTH...........................................................................................1962 E.2 SIMPLE CALCULATION OF INCORRECT THREAD...

  • Page 1993

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX E.NOMOGRAPHS - 1963 - When the value of “a” is determined, the time lapse until the thread accuracy is attained. The time “t” is substituted in (2) to determine δ1: Constants V and T1 are determined in the same way as for δ2. Since the calculation of δ1 is rather ...

  • Page 1994

    E.NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1964 - - How to determine δ1 δ1= LR1800*( - 1 - lna) (mm) =δ2( - 1 - lna)(mm) R : Spindle speed (min-1) L : Thread lead (mm) * When time constant T1 of the servo system is 0.033 s. Following a is a permitted value of thread. a-1-lna0.0054.2980.010.0150.02...

  • Page 1995

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX E.NOMOGRAPHS - 1965 - E.3 TOOL PATH AT CORNER When servo system delay (by exponential acceleration/deceleration at cutting or caused by the positioning system when a servo motor is used) is accompanied by cornering, a slight deviation is produced between the tool path (tool ...

  • Page 1996

    E.NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1966 - θVVX1VY1φ2VY2VX2φ2VZX0 Fig. E.3 (b) Example of tool path - Description of conditions and symbols VX1 = Vcos φ1 VY1 = Vsin φ1 VX2 = Vcos φ2 VY2 = Vsin φ2 V : Feedrate at both blocks before and after cornering VX1 : X-axis component of feedr...

  • Page 1997

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX E.NOMOGRAPHS - 1967 - T1 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant. (T=0) T2 : Time constant of positioning system (Inverse of position loop gain) - Analysis of corner tool path The equations below represent the feedrate for the corner section in X-axis dir...

  • Page 1998

    E.NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1968 - E.4 RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCLE CUTTING When a servo motor is used, the positioning system causes an error between input commands and output results. Since the tool advances along the specified segment, an error is not produced in linear interpolat...

  • Page 1999

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX - 1969 - F.SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, INTHE CLEAR STATE, OR IN THE RESET STATEF SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN THE CLEAR STATE, OR IN THE RESET STATE Either the clear state or reset state is entered during a reset is set by bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 (0: reset state/1: clear st...

  • Page 2000

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1970 - F. SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN THE CLEAR STATE, OR IN THE RESET STATE Item Power-on Clear state Reset state CNC alarm signal AL "0”(when no alarm cause is present) “0” (when no alarm cause is present) “0” (when no alarm cause is present) Reference pos...

  • Page 2001

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX - 1971 - F.SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, INTHE CLEAR STATE, OR IN THE RESET STATENOTE 6 When one of the following two settings, which hold the modal G code in group 1 by a reset is set: - Reset state (bit 6 of parameter No. 3402 is 0) - Clear state (bit 1 of parameter No. 3402 is 1...

  • Page 2002

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1972 - G. CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE G CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE Appendix G, "CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE", consists of the following sections: G.1 CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE ...........................................

  • Page 2003

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX - 1973 - G.CHARACTER-TO-CODESCORRESPONDENCE TABLEG.2 FANUC DOUBLE-BYTE CHARACTER CODE TABLE

  • Page 2004

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1974 - G. CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE

  • Page 2005

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX - 1975 - G.CHARACTER-TO-CODESCORRESPONDENCE TABLE

  • Page 2006

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1976 - G. CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE

  • Page 2007

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX - 1977 - G.CHARACTER-TO-CODESCORRESPONDENCE TABLE

  • Page 2008

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1978 - G. CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE

  • Page 2009

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 1979 - H ALARM LIST Appendix H, "ALARM LIST", consists of the following itemss: (1) Alarms on program and operation (PS alarm) ...................................................................................1979 (2) Background edit alarms (BG ala...

  • Page 2010

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1980 - Number Message Description 0010 IMPROPER G-CODE 1) An unusable G code is specified. 2) The continuous circle motion-based groove cutting option parameter is not effective. 3) The continuous circle motion-based groove cutting enable signal is "0&quo...

  • Page 2011

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 1981 - Number Message Description 0028 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The plane selection instructions G17 to G19 are in error. Reprogram so that same 3 basic parallel axes are not specified simultaneously. This alarm is also generated when an axis that should not be sp...

  • Page 2012

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1982 - Number Message Description 0044 G27-G30 NOT ALLOWED IN FIXED CYC One of G27 to G30 is commanded in canned cycle mode. Modify the program. 0045 ADDRESS Q NOT FOUND (G73/G83) In a high-speed peck drilling cycle (G73) or peck drilling cycle (G83), the amou...

  • Page 2013

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 1983 - Number Message Description 0060 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND[External data input/output] The specified number could not be found for program number and sequence number searches. Although input/output of a pot number of tool data or offset input was reque...

  • Page 2014

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1984 - Number Message Description 0075 PROTECT An attempt was made to register a program whose number was protected. In program matching, the password for the encoded program was not correct. An attempt was made to select a program being edited in the backgrou...

  • Page 2015

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 1985 - Number Message Description 0082 G37 SPECIFIED WITH H CODE - For machining center series The tool length measurement function (G37) is specified together with an H code in the same block. Correct the program. - For lathe The automatic tool compensatio...

  • Page 2016

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1986 - Number Message Description 0096 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (WRK OFS CHG) P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the automatic operation was interrupted, the workpiece offset amount changed.) Perform the correct operation according to t...

  • Page 2017

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 1987 - Number Message Description 0124 MISSING END STATEMENT The END instruction corresponding to the DO instruction was missing in a custom macro. 0125 MACRO STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR The format used in a macro statement in a custom macro is in error. 0126 ILLEG...

  • Page 2018

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1988 - Number Message Description 0148 SETTING ERROR Automatic corner override deceleration rate is out of the settable range of judgement angle. Modify the parameters (No.1710 to No.1714). 0149 FORMAT ERROR IN G10L3 In registration (G10L3 to G11) of tool life...

  • Page 2019

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 1989 - Number Message Description 0161 ILLEGAL P OF WAITING M-CODE P in a waiting M-code is incorrect. <1> When address P is negative <2> When a P value inappropriate for the system configuration was specified <3> When a waiting M code withou...

  • Page 2020

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1990 - Number Message Description 0199 MACRO WORD UNDEFINED Undefined macro word was used. Modify the custom macro. 0200 ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND In the rigid tap, an S value was out of range or was not specified. The parameters Nos. 5241 to 5243 setting is an S...

  • Page 2021

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 1991 - Number Message Description 0221 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHR-MODE Polygon machining synchronous operation and axis control or balance cutting are executed at a time. Modify the program. 0222 DNC OP. NOT ALLOWED IN BG-EDIT Input and output are executed at a...

  • Page 2022

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1992 - Number Message Description 0300 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SCALING An illegal G code was specified during scaling. Modify the program. For the T system, one of the following functions is specified during scaling, this alarm is generated. - finishing cycle (G70...

  • Page 2023

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 1993 - Number Message Description 0311 CALLED BY FILE NAME FORMAT ERROR An invalid format was specified to call a subprogram or macro using a file name. 0312 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING Direct input of drawing dimensions was comman...

  • Page 2024

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1994 - Number Message Description 0326 LAST BLOCK OF SHAPE PROGRAM IS A DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS In a shape program in the multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73), a command for direct input of drawing dimensions in the last block is terminat...

  • Page 2025

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 1995 - Number Message Description 0350 PARAMETER OF THE INDEX OF THE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AXIS SET ERROR. An illegal synchronization control axis number (parameter No. 8180) is set. 0351 BECAUSE THE AXIS IS MOVING, THE SYNC CONTROL IS CAN'T BE USED. While the ...

  • Page 2026

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1996 - Number Message Description 0364 THE G53 WAS INSTRUCTED IN TO THE SUPERPOS CONTROL SLAVE AXIS. This error occurred when G53 was specified to the slave axis being moved during superposition control. 0365 TOO MANY MAXIMUM SV/SP AXIS NUMBER PER PATH The max...

  • Page 2027

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 1997 - Number Message Description 0374 ILLEGAL REGISTRATION OF TOOL MANAGER(G10) G10L75 or G10L76 data was registered during the following data registration: - From the PMC window. - From the FOCAS2. - By G10L75 or G10L76 in another system. Command G10L75 or G...

  • Page 2028

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 1998 - Number Message Description 0402 ILLEGAL TOKEN FOR RTM A token, variable, or function that is not supported by the real time custom macro function was detected. 0403 ACCESS TO RTM PROTECT VAR An attempt was made to access a protected variable. 0404 RTM E...

  • Page 2029

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 1999 - Number Message Description 0438 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN TOOL DIRC CMP If, on a 5-axis machine, either of the two cases below applies, a parameter is illegal. <1> The setting is such that tool direction compensation is performed if workpiece setting e...

  • Page 2030

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2000 - Number Message Description 0461 ILLEGAL SETTING OF ROTATE AXIS FOR TORCH The parameter setting (bit 0 of parameter No. 1006 = 1) of the rotation axis is not applied to the torch turning axis. 0501 THE COMMANDED M-CODE CAN NOT BE EXECUTED The M code spec...

  • Page 2031

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2001 - Number Message Description 0516 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN SMOOTH TCP (G43.4L1) A parameter related to smooth TCP is illegal. • On a machine whose axis configuration is table rotation type or composite type, when the setting was such that the workpiece coor...

  • Page 2032

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2002 - Number Message Description 1059 COMMAND IN BUFFERING MODE The manual intervention compensation request signal MIGET became “1” when a advanced block was found during automatic operation. To input the manual intervention compensation during automatic...

  • Page 2033

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2003 - Number Message Description 1125 ILLEGAL EXPRESSION FORMAT The description of the expression in a custom macro statement contains an error. A parameter program format error. The screen displayed to enter periodic maintenance data or item selection menu (...

  • Page 2034

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2004 - Number Message Description 1196 ILLEGAL DRILLING AXIS SELECTED An illegal axis was specified for drilling in a canned cycle for drilling. If the zero point of the drilling axis is not specified or parallel axes are specified in a block containing a G co...

  • Page 2035

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2005 - Number Message Description 1305 DATA OUT OF RANGE Out–of–range data was found while loading parameters or pitch error compensation data from a tape. The values of the data setting addresses corresponding to L Nos. during data input by G10 was out of...

  • Page 2036

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2006 - Number Message Description 1509 DUPLICATE M-CODE (SPOS AXIS ORIENTATION) A function to which the same code as this M code is set exists. (spindle positioning, orientation) 1510 DUPLICATE M-CODE (SPOS AXIS POSITIONING) A function to which the same code a...

  • Page 2037

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2007 - Number Message Description 1581 ENCODE ALARM (PARAMETER) When an attempt was made to punch an encrypted tape, the punch code parameter was set to EIA. Set bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No. 0000 to “0”. An incorrect instruction was specified for program e...

  • Page 2038

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2008 - Number Message Description 1596 EGB OVERFLOW An overflow occurred in the calculation of the synchronization coefficient. 1597 EGB AUTO PHASE FORMAT ERROR Format error in the G80 or G81 block in EGB automatic phase synchronization (1) R is outside the pe...

  • Page 2039

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2009 - Number Message Description 1820 ILLEGAL DI SIGNAL STATE 1. An each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signal was turned “1” in the state in which all axes on the path including the axis on which to perform preset with the each axis workpiece co...

  • Page 2040

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2010 - Number Message Description 1970 ILLEGAL CARD (MEMORY CARD) This memory card cannot be handled. 1971 ERASE ERROR (MEMORY CARD) An error occurred during memory card erase. 1972 BATTERY LOW (MEMORY CARD) The memory card battery is low. 1973 FILE ALREADY EX...

  • Page 2041

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2011 - Number Message Description 2061 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G43.4/G43.5 An illegal command was specified in tool center point control. - A rotation axis command was specified in tool center point control (type 2) mode. - With a table rotary type or mixed-type ma...

  • Page 2042

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2012 - Number Message Description 5018 POLYGON SPINDLE SPEED ERROR In G51.2 mode, the speed of the spindle or polygon synchronous axis either exceeds the clamp value or is too small. The specified rotation speed ratio thus cannot be maintained. For polygon tur...

  • Page 2043

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2013 - Number Message Description 5061 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G02.3/G03.3 The exponential interpolation command (G02.3/G03.3) has a format error. The command range for address I or J is -89.0 to -1.0 or +1.0 to +89.0. No I or J is specified or out-of -range value i...

  • Page 2044

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2014 - Number Message Description 5124 CAN NOT COMMAND SPIRAL A spiral interpolation or conical interpolation was specified in any of the following modes: 1) Scaling 2) Polar coordinate interpolation 3) In tool radius⋅tool nose radius compensation mode, the ...

  • Page 2045

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2015 - Number Message Description 5244 TOO MANY DI ON • When an attempt was made to change the flexible synchronous control status, the select signal was not turned on or off after the execution of the M code. • An attempt was made to turn flexible synchro...

  • Page 2046

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2016 - Number Message Description 5305 ILLEGAL SPINDLE NUMBER In a spindle select function by address P for a multiple spindle control, 1) Address P is not specified. 2) Parameter No.3781 is not specified to the spindle to be selected. 3) An illegal G code whi...

  • Page 2047

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2017 - Number Message Description 5361 ILLEGAL MAGAZINE DATA Tools stored in the cartridge are interfering with each other. Reregister the tools in the cartridge, or modify the tool management data or tool figure data. If this alarm is issued, no tool interfer...

  • Page 2048

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2018 - Number Message Description 5381 INVALID COMMAND IN FSC MODE An attempt was made to issue the following commands: 1 When the reference position for the master axis under flexible synchronization control has not been established, G28 command for the maste...

  • Page 2049

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2019 - Number Message Description 5421 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G43.4/G43.5 An illegal command was specified in tool center point control. - A rotation axis command was specified in tool center point control (type 2) mode. - With a table rotary type or mixed-type ma...

  • Page 2050

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2020 - Number Message Description 5430 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN 3-D CIR In a modal state in which 3-dimensional circular interpolation cannot be specified, a 3-dimensional circular interpolation (G02.4/G03.4) is specified. Alternatively, in 3-dimensional circular in...

  • Page 2051

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2021 - Number Message Description 5459 MACHINE PARAMETER INCORRECT - The parameter No. 19665 to No. 19667, No. 19680 to No. 19744 for configuring the machine are incorrect. - The axis specified with parameter No. 19681 or No. 19686 is not a rotary axis. - In ...

  • Page 2052

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2022 - Number Message Description 5460 ILLEGAL USE OF 3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION - In the 3-dimensional cutter compensation mode (except the tool side offset function for a tool rotation type machine), a move command other than G00/G01 is specified. - W...

  • Page 2053

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2023 - Number Message Description 5464 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G43.8/G43.9 An illegal value is specified with the cutting point command of tool center point control. - A value is specified that causes the angle formed by the tool length offset direction and the dir...

  • Page 2054

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2024 - Number Message Description SV0007 SV ALM ANOTHER PATH(MULTI AMP.) When a multi-axis amplifier was used in a multi-path system across paths, a servo alarm occurred on an axis belonging to another path. When a system with two or more paths and multiple se...

  • Page 2055

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2025 - Number Message Description SV0369 DATA TRANS. ERROR(INT) A CRC error or stop bit error occurred in the communications data from the built–in Pulsecoder. SV0380 BROKEN LED(EXT) Separate detector error SV0381 ABNORMAL PHASE (EXT) An abnormal alarm in th...

  • Page 2056

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2026 - Number Message Description SV0417 ILL DGTL SERVO PARAMETER A digital serve parameter setting is incorrect. When bit 4 of diagnosis information No. 203 is 1, an illegal parameter was detected by the servo software. Identify the cause with reference to ...

  • Page 2057

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2027 - Number Message Description SV0441 ABNORMAL CURRENT OFFSET The digital servo software detected an abnormality in the motor current detection circuit. SV0442 CNV. CHARGE FAILURE Common Power Supply (PS) : The spare charge circuit for the DC link is abno...

  • Page 2058

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2028 - Number Message Description SV0468 HI HRV SETTING ERROR(AMP) An attempt was made to set up HIGH SPEED HRV control for use when the controlled axis of an amplifier for which HIGH SPEED HRV control could not be used. SV0474 EXCESS ERROR(STOP:SV ) The servo...

  • Page 2059

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2029 - Number Message Description SV0494 ILLEGAL SPEED CMD.(CNC) The CNC detected that the speed command exceeded the safety speed (parameters Nos. 13821 to 13824 (during position control) or parameters Nos. 13826 to 13829 (during speed control)) during safety...

  • Page 2060

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2030 - Number Message Description SV1025 V_READY ON (INITIALIZING ) The ready signal (VRDY) of the velocity control which should be OFF is ON while the servo control is ON. SV1026 ILLEGAL AXIS ARRANGE The parameter for servo axis arrange is not set correctly. ...

  • Page 2061

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2031 - (6) Overtravel alarms (OT alarm) Number Message Description OT0500 + OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) Exceeded the positive side stored stroke check 1. OT0501 - OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) Exceeded the negative side stored stroke check 1. OT0502 + OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 2 ) ...

  • Page 2062

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2032 - Number Message Description IO1032 MEMORY ACCESS OVER RANGE Accessing of data occurred outside the CNC part program storage memory range. IO1104 OVER MAXIMUM TOOL LIFE PAIRS The maximum number of tool life management pairs is exceeded. Modify the settin...

  • Page 2063

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2033 - Number Message Description PW0014 CPU TEST ALARM (CNC) An error occurred in a test of the CPU of the CNC. PW0015 SAFETY PARAM ERROR The CNC detected that an error occurred in a safety parameter for other than servo axes or spindle axes. PW0016 RAM CHECK...

  • Page 2064

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2034 - Number Message Description SP0757 SAFETY SPEED OVER The CNC CPU detected that during safety monitoring (when safety monitoring request signal *VLDPs is 0), the spindle motor speed was greater than the safety speed (parameter No. 4372, 4438, 4440, or 444...

  • Page 2065

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2035 - Number Message Description SP1700 SAFETY PARAM ERROR The CNC detected that a safety parameter error occurred in the n-th spindle. SP1969 SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR An error occurred in the spindle control software. SP1970 SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR Initialization...

  • Page 2066

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2036 - Number Message SP indication(*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9001 SSPA:01 MOTOR OVERHEAT 01 1 Check and correct the peripheral temperature and load status. 2 If the cooling fan stops, replace it. The internal temperature of the motor exceeds...

  • Page 2067

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2037 - Number Message SP indication(*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9011 SSPA:11 OVERVOLT POWER CIRCUIT 11 1 Check the selected Common Power Supply (PS). 2 Check the input power voltage and change in power during motor deceleration. If the voltag...

  • Page 2068

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2038 - Number Message SP indication(*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9022 SERIAL SPINDLE ALARM 22 1 Review operation conditions (acceleration/ deceleration and cutting) to reduce the load. 2 Check and correct the parameters. A Spindle Amplifier (SP)...

  • Page 2069

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2039 - Number Message SP indication(*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9036 SSPA:36 OVERFLOW ERROR COUNTER 36 Check whether the position gain value is too large, and correct the value. An error counter overflow occurred.SP9037 SSPA:37 ILLEGAL SETTING ...

  • Page 2070

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2040 - Number Message SP indication(*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9052 SSPA:52 ITP FAULT 1 52 1 Replace the Spindle Amplifier (SP) control printed circuit board. 2 Replace the main board or additional spindle board in the CNC. An abnormality is d...

  • Page 2071

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2041 - Number Message SP indication(*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9069 SAFETY SPEED OVER 69 1 Check the specified speed. 2 Check parameter settings. 3 Check the sequence. In the state in which safety speed monitoring was enabled, the system detec...

  • Page 2072

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2042 - Number Message SP indication(*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9080 ALARM AT THE OTHER SP AMP. 80 Remove the cause of the alarm of the remote Spindle Amplifier (SP). During inter-Spindle Amplifier (SP) communication, an alarm was generated on ...

  • Page 2073

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2043 - Number Message SP indication(*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9092 SERIAL SPINDLE ALARM 92 Check the sequence (whether SFR or SRV is turned on and off in the position control mode). The motor speed exceeds the acceleration level corresponding...

  • Page 2074

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2044 - Number Message SP indication(*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9122 COMMUNICATION DATA ERROR C2 1 Replace the communication cable between CNC and Spindle Amplifier (SP). 2 Replace the Spindle Amplifier (SP) control printed circuit board. 3 Rep...

  • Page 2075

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2045 - Spindle amplifier indication (*1) Description Remedy 01 Although neither *ESP (emergency stop signal; there are two types of signals including the input signal and Common Power Supply (PS) contact signal) nor MRDY (machine ready signal) is input, SFR (f...

  • Page 2076

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2046 - Spindle amplifier indication (*1) Description Remedy 16 The parameter settings are such that the differential speed control function is not used (bit 5 of parameter No. 4000 = 0), but DEFMD (differential speed mode command) is input. Check the parameter...

  • Page 2077

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2047 - Spindle amplifier indication (*1) Description Remedy 36 The submodule SM (SSM) is faulty . For action to be taken, refer to the FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series PARAMETER MANUAL (B-65280EN). 37 The current loop setting (No. 4012) has been changed. Chec...

  • Page 2078

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2048 - Number Message Description DS0005 EXCESS MAXIMUM ACCELERATION The malfunction prevention function detected the command in which a value exceeding the maximum acceleration was specified. DS0006 ILLEGAL EXECUTION SEQUENCE The malfunction prevention functi...

  • Page 2079

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2049 - Number Message Description DS0023 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (I-COMP VAL) The setting of the inclination compensation parameter is incorrect. The compensation per compensation point is too large or too small. DS0024 UINT SIGNAL WAS ILLEGALLY INPUTAn interruption...

  • Page 2080

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2050 - Number Message Description DS0072 MANUAL REFERENCE RETURN CANNOT BE DONE Manual reference position return cannot be performed in the advanced superimposition state. DS0131 TOO MANY MESSAGE An attempt was made to display an external operator message or e...

  • Page 2081

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2051 - Number Message Description DS1124 OUTPUT REQUEST ERROR OUTPUT REQUEST ERROR An output request was issued during external data output, or an output request was issued for an address that has no output data. DS1128 DI.EIDLL OUT OF RANGE The numerical valu...

  • Page 2082

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2052 - Number Message Description DS1711 ILLEGAL ACC. PARAMETER (RIGID TAPPING OPTIMUM ACC/DEC) The permissible acceleration parameter for rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration contains an error. The cause is one of the following: 1) The ratio of the...

  • Page 2083

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX - 2053 - I.PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARDPROGRAM OPERATION/EDITINGI PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING Appendix I, "PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING", consists of the following sections: I.1 PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITI...

  • Page 2084

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2054 - I. PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING I.1.3 Explanation Of Operations - Outline of screen (1)(2) (3)(4)(5) 1) Menu bar : The menu of this PC tool is displayed. 2) Tree view : Browsing the folders of the memory card program file. 3) Column : Att...

  • Page 2085

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX - 2055 - I.PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARDPROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING • When "Create a new file" is selected After OK button pushed, "Save As" dialogue window is displayed. Please create a new memory card program file on the selected folder. When the new ...

  • Page 2086

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2056 - I. PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING - Menu File menu [New] Create a new memory card program file. [Open...] Open the existing memory card program file. [Exit] Terminate this PC tool. Edit menu [New Folder] Create new folder. It is...

  • Page 2087

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX - 2057 - I.PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARDPROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING[Rename] Rename a folder or file. NOTE For naming folder and program file, characters which can be used are limited. Please refer to "Naming rules". Option menu [Hide Confirm Message] When the fo...

  • Page 2088

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2058 - I. PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING [Change Work Folder] Work folder is used for temporarily keeping the dropped out files. If work folder has no enough free space, Drop-out will not be executed. To avoid this, you can check this option and chan...

  • Page 2089

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX - 2059 - I.PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARDPROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING [About...] Version number of this PC tool is displayed. - Mouse Operation [Drop-in and Drop-out] • Drop-in from Explorer NC program can be added by dropping files including the NC files into the List view w...

  • Page 2090

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2060 - I. PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING O1 G91 X10. Y10. M30 O10 G91 X10. Y10. M30 % O1 G91 X10. Y10. M30 % O1 G91 X10. Y10. M30 Available for Drop-in Example of Program <O1> G91 X10. Y10. M30 Unavailable for Drop-in NOTE 1 If the same named p...

  • Page 2091

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX - 2061 - I.PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARDPROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING Clicking "Rename", the selected folder is renamed. If clicking on root folder, "Delete" and "Rename" are not activated. • Focus on List view • Clicking "Delete", the...

  • Page 2092

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2062 - I. PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING I.2 NAMING RULES Overview Naming rules of folder and program file are described as follows. I.2.1 Naming Rules of Program File Here are Naming rules of Program file: • Program file name can have a maximum of 3...

  • Page 2093

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX - 2063 - I.PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARDPROGRAM OPERATION/EDITINGI.3 RULES OF CHARACTERS IN PROGRAM FILE Overview Words in parentheses "( )" in Program file are treated as comments. The mark of comment start "(" is named "Control-out". The mark of co...

  • Page 2094

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/04 - 2064 - I. PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING NOTE In the Control-in, "O", ":", and "<" can not be used at top of the line except for the 1st line. - Usable characters in Control-out(characters in parentheses) List of ANS...

  • Page 2095

    B-63944EN/04 APPENDIX - 2065 - I.PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARDPROGRAM OPERATION/EDITINGMessage Remarks Please input an integer between 2 and 2048The size of the memory card program file is available from 2Mbyte to 2048Mbyte. An illegal character is included in the specified file. Please refer to the c...

  • Page 2096

  • Page 2097

    B-63944EN/04 INDEX i-1 INDEX <Number> 10.4" LCD CNC Display Panel....................................845 12.1" LCD CNC Display Panel....................................846 15" LCD CNC Display Panel.......................................846 3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATIO...

  • Page 2098

    INDEX B-63944EN/04 i-2 COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION.............172 Copy...........................................................................1131 Copying and Moving Files between Devices .............1135 CREATING A FOLDER ...........................................1154 CREATING PROGRAMS...

  • Page 2099

    B-63944EN/04 INDEX i-3 Displaying and setting the machining parameter tuning screen......................................................................1475 Displaying and setting the machining parameter tuning screen (15-inch display unit) ..................................1542 Displaying and ...

  • Page 2100

    INDEX B-63944EN/04 i-4 FLOATING REFERENCE POSITION RETURN (G30.1) .....................................................................152 Folder Attributes ..........................................................252 Folder Configuration ....................................................250 ...

  • Page 2101

    B-63944EN/04 INDEX i-5 Line Search ................................................................1133 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01) ..............................45 LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED REFERENCE MARKS (SERIAL)...........................907 List of Error Message..........................

  • Page 2102

    INDEX B-63944EN/04 i-6 Outputting decimal point position data of customize data .........................................................................1082 Outputting magazine data...........................................1074 Outputting name data of customize data ....................1077 Ou...

  • Page 2103

    B-63944EN/04 INDEX i-7 REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO ...............................466 Rectangular parallelepiped setting screen ..................1416 REFERENCE POSITION............................................147 Reference Position (Machine-specific Position) ............12 REFERENCE POSITION RET...

  • Page 2104

    INDEX B-63944EN/04 i-8 Setting the Floating Reference Position (15-inch Display Unit) ..........................................................1197 SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN THE CLEAR STATE, OR IN THE RESET STATE ..................................1969 Shape number list screen.......................

  • Page 2105

    B-63944EN/04 INDEX i-9 Tool geometry data screen (15-inch display unit) ......1370 Tool holder and object monitor screen.......................1406 Tool holder figure setting screen................................1412 TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION (G43, G44, G49)289 Tool Life Count Restart M Code.......

  • Page 2106

  • Page 2107

    Revision Record FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A, Series 31i-MODEL A, Series 32i-MODEL A OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System )(B-63944EN) 04 Jan., 2010Total revision 03 Dec., 2007Total revision 02 Jun, 2004 Addition of functions Additi...

  • Page 2108

    B-63944EN/04* B -63944E N /04*

  • Page 2109

    ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

  • Page 2110

    B-63944EN/03-05 TitleDrawNo. Ed. Date Design Description Date Design. Apprv. 1/7 pageFANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-A, 31i-A5 Rate Feed function FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i-A, 31i-A5 Rate Feed function 1. Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Series 30i -MODEL A FANUC Series 31...

  • Page 2111

    B-63944EN/03-05 TitleDrawNo. Ed. Date Design Description Date Design. Apprv. 2/7 pageFANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-A, 31i-A5 Rate Feed function Add the following descriptions as 5.7 "Rate Feed" of II Programming. 5.7 Rate Feed M Outline Specify the rate feed mode with G93.2...

  • Page 2112

    B-63944EN/03-05 TitleDrawNo. Ed. Date Design Description Date Design. Apprv. 3/7 pageFANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-A, 31i-A5 Rate Feed function Explanation About the initial speed The initial speed of the rate feed of each block is decided depending on the speed of the previous block, ...

  • Page 2113

    B-63944EN/03-05 TitleDrawNo. Ed. Date Design Description Date Design. Apprv. 4/7 pageFANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-A, 31i-A5 Rate Feed function (2) When the speed is changed during the rate feed (Dry run signal, External deceleration signal) A machine is accelerated or decelerated from...

  • Page 2114

    B-63944EN/03-05 TitleDrawNo. Ed. Date Design Description Date Design. Apprv. 5/7 pageFANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-A, 31i-A5 Rate Feed function (4) When the axes more than two are interpolated(linear interpolation, circular interpolation) Tangential speed becomes a speed of the rate...

  • Page 2115

    B-63944EN/03-05 TitleDrawNo. Ed. Date Design Description Date Design. Apprv. 6/7 pageFANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-A, 31i-A5 Rate Feed function (Example2) When the continuous blocks of linear interpolation are commanded with two axes X and Y N0001 G93.2 G91 G01 X30. Y20. F100; N0002 X1...

  • Page 2116

    B-63944EN/03-05 TitleDrawNo. Ed. Date Design Description Date Design. Apprv. 7/7 pageFANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-A, 31i-A5 Rate Feed function (5) When the interpolations except G01 liner interpolation, G02/G03 circular interpolation are specified (Helical interpolation, Hypothetical ax...

  • Page 2117

    1/2 ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleFANUC Series 30i/31i -A, 31i -A5 Rigid Tapping By Manual Handle B-63944EN/04-02 2010.06.07 FANUC Series 30i /31i-A, 31i-A5 Rigid Tapping By Manual Handle 1. Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Series 30i –MODEL...

  • Page 2118

    2/2 ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleFANUC Series 30i/31i -A, 31i -A5 Rigid Tapping By Manual Handle B-63944EN/04-02 2010.06.07 - Feed forward In rigid tapping by manual handle, feed forward is disabled even if bit 2 (RFF) of parameter No. 5203 is set to 1 (Fee...

  • Page 2119

    B-63944EN/04-03 TitleDrawNo. Ed. Date Design Description Date 14.Jun.2010 Design. Apprv. 1/2 pageFANUC Series 30i-MODEL A FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A FANUC Series 32i-MODEL A Correction of Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System OPERATOR'S MANUAL FANUC Series ...

  • Page 2120

    B-63944EN/04-03 TitleDrawNo. Ed. Date Design Description Date 14.Jun.2010 Design. Apprv. 2/2 pageFANUC Series 30i-MODEL A FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A FANUC Series 32i-MODEL A Correction of Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System OPERATOR'S MANUAL - Automatic...

  • Page 2121

    1/21 ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function FANUC Series 30i/ 31i/ 32i-MODEL A FANUC Series 30i/ 31i/ 32i-MODEL...

  • Page 2122

    2/21 ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function 15.7 Tool offset conversion function Overview In the complicated m...

  • Page 2123

    3/21 ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function Format The program format is shown below. T G44.1 Dα Pn; Tool off...

  • Page 2124

    4/21 ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function Sample program 1 (Machining center system) N10 G90 G00 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0...

  • Page 2125

    5/21 ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function Explanation Setting of basic machine composition Before using this...

  • Page 2126

    6/21 ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function Change of the direction of imaginary tool nose by the rotation of ea...

  • Page 2127

    7/21 ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function The swivel head axis (β) is approximated to 4 sections (90×n [deg...

  • Page 2128

    8/21 ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function Example1 Change of tool nose compensation value (In case that tool t...

  • Page 2129

    9/21 ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function Example2 Change of tool nose compensation value (In case that tool t...

  • Page 2130

    10/21ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function Example3 Change of the tool offset value In this section, the calcul...

  • Page 2131

    11/21ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function Setting of the rotation axis by parameter The tool nose rotation axi...

  • Page 2132

    12/21ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function Information of the tool offset conversion The information of tool of...

  • Page 2133

    13/21ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function Limitations In this section, the matters that should be noted when t...

  • Page 2134

    14/21ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function Parameters for tool offset The parameters, which are effective and n...

  • Page 2135

    15/21ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function The setting is fixed to “0: When a tool compensation value is cha...

  • Page 2136

    16/21ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function Diagnosis display Diagnosis 1800 Reference angle of the tool nose r...

  • Page 2137

    17/21ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function Diagnosis 1806 Offset value of X-axis before conversion [Data type]...

  • Page 2138

    18/21ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 RS3 RS2 RS1 19640 RS3 RS2 RS...

  • Page 2139

    19/21ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 INW SRD TRD 19641 INW SRD TRD...

  • Page 2140

    20/21ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function 19691 Controlled-axis number for the 3rd rotation axis [Input typ...

  • Page 2141

    21/21ED Date Design Date Design ApproveDescription PageDrawNo. TitleB-63944EN/04-04, B-64484EN/02-01 29 Jun. 2011 FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AFANUC Series 30i-B/ 31i-B5/ 31i-B/ 32i-BTool offset conversion function Number Message Description PS0535 TL OFS CONVERSION SETTING ERROR ...

  • Page 2142

    TitleDrawNo.1/5 SheetED ApproveDesign Date Design DescriptionDate 2011.8.25 FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-MODEL B Display function for Display unit for Automotive B-63944EN/04-05 B-64484EN/02-03 B-64524EN/01-02 FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A FANUC Series 30i/3...

  • Page 2143

    TitleDrawNo.2/5 SheetED ApproveDesign Date Design DescriptionDate 2011.8.25 FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-MODEL B Display function for Display unit for Automotive B-63944EN/04-05 B-64484EN/02-03 B-64524EN/01-02 2.2.6 Display function for Display unit fo...

  • Page 2144

    TitleDrawNo.3/5 SheetED ApproveDesign Date Design DescriptionDate 2011.8.25 FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-MODEL B Display function for Display unit for Automotive B-63944EN/04-05 B-64484EN/02-03 B-64524EN/01-02 Fig. 2.2.6 (b) Vertical soft key [F13] Function k...

  • Page 2145

    TitleDrawNo.4/5 SheetED ApproveDesign Date Design DescriptionDate 2011.8.25 FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-MODEL B Display function for Display unit for Automotive B-63944EN/04-05 B-64484EN/02-03 B-64524EN/01-02 Above keys can be assigned to the one touch menu.Af...

  • Page 2146

    TitleDrawNo.5/5 SheetED ApproveDesign Date Design DescriptionDate 2011.8.25 FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-MODEL B Display function for Display unit for Automotive B-63944EN/04-05 B-64484EN/02-03 B-64524EN/01-02 1: Display unit for Automotive #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2...

  • Page 2147

    1/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page FANUC Series 30i–A / 31i–A5 / 31i–A / 32i–A Machining progam / execution command dual display 1. T...

  • Page 2148

    2/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page 16 MACHINING PROGRAM / EXECUTION COMMAND DUAL DISPLAY Outline In this function, the following display and...

  • Page 2149

    3/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page Fig.16 (b) Program check screen (10.4 inch) ・Folder tree display The folder tree can be displayed on pr...

  • Page 2150

    4/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. PageNOTE 1 When this function is used in 7.2/8.4 inch display unit, the screen is displayed with the same layout...

  • Page 2151

    5/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page Fig.16.1 (b) Program check screen (10.4 inch) (Call stack display) A part of the program check screen ch...

  • Page 2152

    6/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page3 Press the horizontal soft key [CALL STK ON]. The call stack is displayed on the program check screen. And ...

  • Page 2153

    7/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. PageExample of screen When the block of the cursor position is executed by the subprogram call from the main pr...

  • Page 2154

    8/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page Fig.16.2 (a) Program check screen (10.4 inch) (Non display interpreted and original programs on the same s...

  • Page 2155

    9/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. PageDisplay interpreted and original programs on the same screen (for 15 inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press th...

  • Page 2156

    10/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page 4 The screen returns to Fig.16.2(c)by pressing the horizontal soft key [ORIGINAL]. Explanation ・For int...

  • Page 2157

    11/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. PageNote 1 In case of the program stored in internal memory (CNC MEM) and the program in memory card program de...

  • Page 2158

    12/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. PageNote If the bit 1 (CFP) of parameter No.11304 is set to 1, the folder tree is not displayed because the av...

  • Page 2159

    13/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page Fig.16.3.2 (b) Select next folder: Press the cursor key or . Fig.16.3.2 (c) 16.3.3 Switching the disp...

  • Page 2160

    14/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page Fig.16.3.3 (a) Folder tree screen (10.4 inch) (Folder tree display) 16.3.4 Creating a folder Outline A ne...

  • Page 2161

    15/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page16.3.5 Deleting a folder Outline A folder can be deleted on the folder tree screen. NOTE 1 The initial fol...

  • Page 2162

    16/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. PageRenaming a folder on folder tree (for 15 inch display unit) Procedure 1 Display the folder tree screen. (Re...

  • Page 2163

    17/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page16.3.8 Input / Output programs Outline The programs and folder can be input/output by selecting a folder on...

  • Page 2164

    18/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page16.4 Copy / movement operation with each folder 16.4.1 Copy / movement operation Outline Programs and fold...

  • Page 2165

    19/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page7 Press the soft key [COPY]. The program or folder is selected, and the background color becomes selected ...

  • Page 2166

    20/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. PageCopying some programs and folders (for 7.2/8.4/10.4 inch display unit) Procedure Selection by range 1 Press...

  • Page 2167

    21/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. PageCopying some programs and folders (for 15 inch display unit) Procedure Selection by range 1 Press the funct...

  • Page 2168

    22/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page・ When the soft key [YES] is pressed, the program/folder is overwritten. If the same name programs/folder...

  • Page 2169

    23/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page7 Press the soft key [COPY]. The program or folder is selected, and the background color becomes selected ...

  • Page 2170

    24/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page- A memory card program device cannot be used with a memory card device. ・ Memory card - A memory card d...

  • Page 2171

    25/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page 0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input device 00...

  • Page 2172

    26/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0110 IO4 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit NOTE When this...

  • Page 2173

    27/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page [Input type] parameter input [Data type] Bit #1 COW When the file of specified name already exists on ...

  • Page 2174

    28/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11364 FLI [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #7 FLI On th...

  • Page 2175

    29/29FANUC Series 30i-A/ 31i-A5/ 31i-A/ 32i-AMachining progam / execution command dual display B-63944EN/04-06 Description ApproveDesign 24 Aug. 2011 Design ED Date Date TitleDrawNo. Page [Data type] Bit #1 TRE In the program folder screen, folder tree display is: 0: Available. 1: Not av...

x